The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutC2024-064 - 2/27/2024 - Approved CONFORMANCE SET FOR CONSTRUCTION ASSEMBLED 02/04/2024 Airline Lift Station Upgrades RFB 5504, Project No. 22130 ADDENDUM No. 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI FINANCE AND PROCUREMENT Addendum Date: January 2, 2024 Addendum No: 1 Bidder must acknowledge the receipt of this Addendum in its bid. Failure of the Bidder to acknowledge this Addendum may result in City’s rejection for the Bidder for non-responsiveness. ATTACHMENTS 1.Responses to Requests for Clarification 2.SCADA Standards (as of April 20, 2023) Page 1 of 1 Addendum No. 1 Q&A and Clarifications CIVCAST QUESTIONS Since the project schedule is tight considering leadtimes, can the Automatic Transfer Switch be removed as an internal device to the MCC and remote mounted as a separately enclosed ATS? This will decrease MCC complexity and greatly improve leadtime, with minimal to zero impact to cost. Providing separate ATS is acceptable. ( No service entrance rated type). Is a main service disconnect switch or breaker needed between the utility transformer and MCC? Yes. Main service disconnect is required. Would you please post the pre-bid meeting attendees list? Please provide the latest version of the SCADA Wastewater Lift Station PLC Standards from I.T. Department. Latest version of the SCADA Standards, dated April 20, 2023, are attached. What's the goal for minority participation? The minority goals are in 00 72 00 – 103, General Conditions under ARTICLE 23 – MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY. Minority participation goal is 45%. Electrical Sheet 32 Details Reflect Light Pole Detail Are Fixtures Existing or Need Added Fixtures in Schedule There are new light fixtures, as shown on the plans and in Detail 7 on Plan Sht. 32. The stanchion mounted light fixture is specified in the following: LED straight Stanchion mount, 7500 Lumens, 4000K, Type III optic distribution, 120V, polycarbonate lens with photocell: Crouse Hinds ModelNo. PVML 7 P R3 UNV1 S903 D2S20 or Approved equal. RFB 5504 Airline Lift Station Upgrades, Project 22130 Wastewater Dept. PLC SCADA Standards I.T. Department Revision 2 04/20/2023 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards Contents 1 Purpose and Scope ..................................................................................................................................... 2 1.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................................................... 2 1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 2 2 SCADA PLC Standards ................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1 PLC Hardware Standards ..................................................................................................................... 3 2.2 Network Connectivity ......................................................................................................................... 4 2.3 PLC Programming Standards ............................................................................................................... 4 2.4 Control Panel PLC Wiring .................................................................................................................... 5 2.5 Relays .................................................................................................................................................. 5 2.6 PLC HMI Standards .............................................................................................................................. 5 3 Special Considerations ............................................................................................................................... 6 3.1 WW Lift Stations ................................................................................................................................. 6 3.2 OSO WWTP SCADA Upgrade ................................................................ 3.3 Additional WWTP Upgrades ............................................................................................................... 6 4 Revision History ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Page 1 of 7 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 1 Purpose and Scope 1.1 Purpose The purpose of implementing the SCADA PLC Standard is to standardize the brand and model of all SCADA equipment/devices which helps facilitate administrative duties, and improve: system functionality, support, and reliability. In addition, standardizing assists with Security Firmware Patching, Incident Response and Disaster Recovery procedures thus helping with overall security and recovery. This document specifies the City of Corpus Christi, I.T. Department’s standards for PLCs (Programmable Logic Controllers) used at Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) and Wastewater Lift Stations (WWLS) throughout the city. This document includes the specifications of the new standards to be used for any PLC upgrade, replacement, and new installation at any WWTP or WWLS Facility. All deviations must be approved by the I.T. Department prior to installation, and preferably at design time. 1.2 Scope The scope is inclusive of all PLCs located at all WWTPs and WWLSs. This includes local HMI screens installed at any site, if applicable. Any PLC upgrade, replacement, or new installation is required to meet the standards listed in this document. Page 2 of 7 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2 SCADA PLC Standards The SCADA PLC Standards are the minimum system requirements for new PLCs. All deviations must be approved by the City of Corpus Christi, I.T. Department prior to installation. All system firmware/software versions must be compatible with City’s system at time of implementation. Versions must be verified prior or at design time to ensure compatibility. 2.1 PLC Hardware Standards The PLC used shall be in the CompactLogix family of PLCs manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen- Bradley) only. Details of the components of the CompactLogix PLC system are listed below: Controller 5069-L310ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 1MB User Memory, 8 I/O, 24 EtherNet/IP Devices 5069-L320ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 2MB User Memory, 16 I/O, 40 Ethernet/IP Devices 5069-L330ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 3MB User Memory, 31 I/O, 60 Ethernet/IP Devices (Only Select this Processor if Absolutely Necessary for the Application) 5069-L340ER Description: Controller, CompactLogix 5380, 4MB User Memory, 31 I/O, 90 Ethernet/IP Devices (Only Select this Processor if Absolutely Necessary for the Application) I/O Modules Discrete Input Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069IB16, 16-point Discrete Input Modules Discrete Output Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-OB16 16-point Discrete Output Modules Analog Input Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-IF8, 8-point Analog Input Modules Analog Output Modules: Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 5069-OF8, 8-Point Analog Output Modules Communication Module Not Required – If Modbus is required, Protocol Converter will be used. See section 2.2 Network Connectivity. Power Supplies CompactLogix PLC 24-volt DC power supplies manufactured by Rockwell Automation (Allen-Bradley) for CompactLogix PLC’s. HMI Touch Screen (Optional) Allen-Bradley PANELVIEW PLUS 7 Touch Screen 2711P-T9W21D8S-B (Firmware Version must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) Please note that items listed above will be selected as needed and based on the requirements of the specific application and not all components will be used for each location. For example, not all Lift Stations will require a local HMI Touch Screen. Page 3 of 7 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2.2 Network Connectivity The communications/networking devices selected for each location is dependent on the location and HMI Servers communicating with the PLC. Protocols allowed will be Modbus for PLCs connecting to Legacy HMI Server or Ethernet/IP for PLCs connecting to Rockwell HMI Servers. The following is the standard list of PLC components allowed for any system upgrade, replacement, or new installation. Protocol Converter (Required for PLCs using Modbus & connecting to Legacy SCADA HMI Servers) Red Lion Data Station Plus Part #: DSPLE000 SCADA Panel Switch Plant Facility - Moxa Managed Industrial Ethernet Switch Model EDS-508A-T Series (Fiber Port SC) Liftstations–Moxa Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Switch Model EDS-205A-T Series (Fiber Port-SC) Cellular Network Devices (Only for Ethernet/IP Protocol) If Cellular communication is required for new installation, the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Cellular Device on a case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on a case- by-case basis. Fiber If Fiber Connectivity is available, the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Fiber on a case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on a case-by-case basis. Radio Communications (For new installations and only for Ethernet/IP Protocol) If Radio is required for new installation, the I.T. Department will provide network connectivity via Radio on a case-by-case basis. Devices used will be determined on a case-by-case basis. Radio Communications (For existing WW Lift Stations connecting to Lookout System located at Greenwood WWTP using Modbus Protocol) MDS Transit NR-100 Radio (Re-use existing Radio’s currently installed at Lift Station) 2.3 PLC Programming Standards The SCADA PLC Programming Standards are as follows: PLC Programming Software Studio 5000 Logix Designer (Firmware Versions must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) PLC Programming Function Block Diagram Programming Ladder Logic Plant PAx for Process Objects (Firmware Versions must be compatible. Verify with I.T. Department at design time.) Page 4 of 7 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 2.4 Control Panel PLC Wiring All control panel PLC wiring shall be labeled and shall conform as follows: Wiring Color 24 VDC + Blue 24 VDC - Brown 120 VAC (H or L1) Yellow 120 VAC (N or L2) White Ground Green Digital Input Purple Digital Output Red Analog Input White (Loop) Black (Signal) Analog Output Grey HART White (Loop) Orange (Signal) Digital Input (120 VAC) Pink 2.5 Relays The following are acceptable relays for DI/DO Modules: Weidmuller, Cross Connectors, 1391600000, TERMSERIES, Cross-connector Weidmuller, Relay,1123580000, TRS 24-230VUC 2CO 2-pole Weidmuller, Relay,1984610000, TRS 24-230VUC 1CO C1D2 1-pole 2.6 PLC HMI Standards The local PLC HMI Screen Designs will use Plant PAx Graphics Library and follow standardized color schemes used by the Plant PAx. Page 5 of 7 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 3 Special Considerations 3.1 WW Treatment Plants and WW Lift Stations Currently, the majority of all Lift Station PLCs connect to one HMI Server located at Greenwood WWTP; all others connect to the OSO WWTP HMI Server that runs Rockwell Software and is designed for Liftstations upgraded to the new city standard PLC. All current Lift Station SCADA data is received by HMI Server at Greenwood via Radio communication using an isolated, dedicated network. This dedicated network is not connected to Corporate I.T. Network and will not be connected to Corporate I.T. Network. Please note that until all WW Lift Stations are upgraded, the current Lookout SCADA system running at Greenwood will continue to be used as required by the Utilities Treatment Department, which is currently administrating that particular Lookout SCADA System. If the PLC being replaced/upgraded corresponds to a WWTP HMI Server that has not been upgraded to the Rockwell System, then the new PLC must be able to communicate to the existing HMI Server at Greenwood WWTP using Modbus Protocol. However, the new PLC is still required to meet the I.T. SCADA PLC Standards. If the PLC being replaced/upgraded corresponds to a WWTP HMI Server that has been upgraded to the Rockwell System, then the new PLC must be able to communicate to the HMI Server running Rockwell SCADA Software via Ethernet/IP Protocol thru the Corporate Network and meet the I.T. SCADA PLC Standards. Network Connectivity devices will be determined by the I.T. Department on a case-by-case basis. Liftstations PLCs that are upgraded to the Rockwell System will need to communicate to the Server running Rockwell Software located at the OSO WWTP. 3.3 Additional WWTP Upgrades As other WWTP SCADA Systems are upgraded to Rockwell Solutions, corresponding PLCs at Lift Stations that feed into that WWTP will be configured to connect to the Rockwell HMI Server using Ethernet/IP Protocol and via Corporate I.T. Network. Page 6 of 7 SCADA WW Lift Station PLC Standards 4 Revision History Date Revised By Description of Changes 3/29/2021 Hector Leal, Document is created. IT SCADA Manager 04/20/2023 David Lopez Rev. 5 - PLC Compact Logix is Upgraded. IT SCADA Manager Page 7 of 7 Addendum No. 2 Q&A and Clarifications CIVCAST QUESTIONS A. It is stated that the bypass flow is to be designed for 2550gpm, but then it states that it is based on two pumps running at 1700gpm each so the math doesn’t add up. Also, is the stated flow for PWWF or ADF? Need clarification. Spec. 13C1.8.b states the pumping capacity to be 1.5 times the existing pump capacity. Control of flow capacity is calculated to be 2550 GPM (1.5 x 1700 GPM of existing pump capacity). The stated flow is for the station capacity, which is for peak flow. B. Please confirm the City is doing all the Top End/HMI Programming at the Greenwood WWTP and at the OSO WWTP Locations. City to provide the HMI programming. Supplier of panels shall provide PLC address information as required by City to update HMI. C. Please confirm the System Integrator will be responsible for the PLC Programming. Any panel (Pump control, SCADA, or Odor) provided with or without a PLC shall be wired, programmed, tested, and warranted by that supplier. Contractor shall provide to the City a separate electronic file copy of any programs used for this project. RFB 5504 Airline Lift Station Upgrades, Project 22130 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division / Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 01 Seals Page 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 23 10 Alternates and Allocation 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 33 01 Submittal Register 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls Part S Standard Specifications 02 20 20 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02 20 22 Trench Safety for Excavations 02 21 00 Select Material 02 56 20 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 02 62 02 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems 02 62 06 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and 02 62 10 Wastewater Force Mains) 02 64 02 Waterlines 02 64 09 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves 02 64 11 Gate Valves for Waterlines Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2022 Division / Title Section 02 66 02 Wastewater Force Main 02 76 04 Disposal of Waste from Wastewater Cleaning Operations 03 00 20 Portland Cement Concrete 03 20 20 Reinforcing Steel 03 80 00 Concrete Structures Wastewater Dept. PLC SCADA Standards Part T Technical Specifications 01011 Equipment Documentation Requirements 1E22 Windstorm Regulatory Requirements 2A2\[1\] Deviations Occasioned By Existing Obstructions 2A3\[1\] Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping 2B1\[1\] Site Grading 2B2\[1\] Structural Excavation and Backfill 2G13\[2\] Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly 2I1\[2\] Chain-Link Gate (Heavy-Duty) 2J1\[2\] Vegetative Treatment 4A2\[1\] Concrete Unit Masonry 9K1\[1\] Painting 11B5\[1\] Wet Pit Submersible Pumps (Wastewater) 11C10\[6\] Ultrasonic Flow Measuring Equipment 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System 11G3\[4\] Lift Station Identification Signs 13C1\[1\] General Requirements 15C3\[1\] Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings 15C12\[1\] Fiberglass Manholes 15C14\[1\] Pipe Hangers and Supports 15C15\[1\] PVC Duct and Fittings for Air Service 15D3\[1\] Plug Valves Part E Electrical 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2022 Division / Title Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical System 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical System 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Electrical Power System Studies 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator 26 36 00 Automatic Transfer Switches 26 64 19 Motor Control Centers 40 39 80 Pump Panel 40 69 80 Level Transmitter 40 94 30 SCADA Panel 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers Appendix A Geotechnical Report B TXDOT Details END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 3 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2022 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE 1 Title Sheet and Plan Index 2 Location Map and Testing Schedule 3 General Notes and Misc. Details 3A Standard Manhole Details 4 Existing Site Layout 5 Control of Flow Plan 6 Proposed Site Improvements 7 West Half Improvements 8 East Half Improvements 9 New Entrance Road Plan and Details 10 Existing Mechanical Demolition Plan 11 Proposed Mechanical Improvements 12 Proposed Odor Control Plan Layout 13 Proposed Odor Control Blower Sections and Details 14 Proposed Odor Control Biofilter Layout and Details 15 Proposed Generator Foundation – Structural 16 Existing Perimeter Fence – Demolition 17 Proposed Perimeter Fence Layout and Dimensions 18 Fence Pile Detail and Notes 19 Fence Structural Notes 20 Fence and Slide Gate Details 21 Fence Foundation Plan 21A Temporary Traffic Control Plan 22 Electrical Legends and Notes 23 Demolition – Electrical Plans 24 Demolition Photos 25 New Electrical Plan 1 of 2 26 New Electrical Plan 2 of 2 27 Electrical Building Plan and Elevations 28 Electrical One-Line Diagram 29 Electrical Schematics 30 Pump Control Panel Details 31 SCADA Panel Details 32 Electrical Details 33 Electrical Schedules List of Drawings 00 01 02 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project 22130 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on February 27, 2024, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Takne LLC (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Airline Lift Station Upgrades Project Number 22130 ARTICLE 2 – DESIGNER AND OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Urban Engineering 2725 Swantner Corpus Christi, TX 78404 mmaroney@urbaneng.com 2.02 The Owner’s Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson City of Corpus Christi - Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No. 5 Corpus Christi, TX 78411 Josephj2@cctexas.com 361-826-3691 ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times Agreement 00 52 23 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No.: 22130 Rev 12/2021 A.The Work is required to be substantially completed within 330 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 360 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B.Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C.Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A.Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1.Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2.Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3.Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4.Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5.The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B.Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No.: 22130 Rev 12/2021 Total Base Bid Price plus Additive Alternate 1 $ 2,075,000.00 ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A.The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B.Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1.The standard retainage is 5 percent. C.Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D.At the Owner’s option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A.The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 3 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No.: 22130 Rev 12/2021 B.The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C.The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D.The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1.Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2.Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3.Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4.Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5.Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E.The Contractor has considered the: 1.Information known to Contractor; 2.Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3.Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4.The Contract Documents. F.The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1.The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2.The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3.Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. G.Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H.The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I.The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J.The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. Agreement 00 52 23 - 4 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No.: 22130 Rev 12/2021 K.The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L.Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M.CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8 – ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor’s fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A.The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1.Solicitation documents. 2.Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3.Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4.Addenda. 5.Exhibits to this Agreement: a.Contractor’s Bid Form. 6.Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B.There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C.The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23 - 5 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No.: 22130 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services __________________________ AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL ___________________________ Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR Takne LLC (Seal Below) By: Title: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 4400 W. Highway 82 Financial Officer Address Gainesville, TX 74260 City State Zip (817)231-0124 Phone Fax Jeet.singh@takne.com Email END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23 - 6 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No.: 22130 Rev 12/2021 WASTEWATER CONSENT DECREE Special Conditions Special Project procedures are required from the CONTRACTOR as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall implement and maintain these procedures at the appropriate time, prior to and during performance of the work. The following special conditions and requirements shall apply to the Project: I. Consent Decree Notice Provision – The City of Corpus Christi (“City”), the United States of America and the State of Texas have entered into a Consent Decree in Civil Action No. 2:20-cv-00235, United States of America and State of Texas v. City of Corpus Christi in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Texas, Corpus Christi Division (the “Consent Decree”). A copy of the Consent Decree is available at https://www-cdn.cctexas.com/sites/default/files/CC-Consent-Decree.pdf By signature of the Contract, CONTRACTOR acknowledges receipt of the Consent Decree. II. Performance of work. CONTRACTOR agrees that any work under this Contract is conditioned upon CONTRACTOR’s performance of the Work in conformity with the terms of the Consent Decree. All Work shall be performed in accordance with the Design Criteria for Wastewater Systems under Title 30 Chapter 217 of the Texas Administrative Code, 30 Tex. Admin. Code Ch. 217, and using sound engineering practices to ensure that construction, management, operation and maintenance of the Sewer Collection System complies with the Clean Water Act. Work performed pursuant to this contract is work that the City is required to perform pursuant to the terms of the Consent Decree. In the event of any conflict between the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree and any other terms and provisions of this Contract or the Contract Documents, the terms and provisions of this Consent Decree shall prevail. III. Retention of documents – CONTRACTOR shall retain and preserve all non- identical copies of all documents, reports, research, analytical or other data, records or other information of any kind or character (including documents, records, or other information in electronic form) in its or its sub-contractors’ or agents’ possession or control, or that come into its or its sub-contractors’ or agents’ possession or control, and that relate in any manner to this contract, or the performance of any work described in this contract (the “Information”). This retention requirement shall apply regardless of any contrary city, corporate or institutional policy or procedure. CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR’s sub-contractors and agents shall retain and shall not destroy any of the Information until five years after the termination of the Consent Decree and with prior written authorization from the City Attorney. CONTRACTOR shall provide the City with copies of any documents, reports, analytical data, or other information required to be maintained at any time upon request from the City. IV. Liability for stipulated penalties – Article IX of the Consent Decree provides that the United States of America, the United States Environmental Protection Agency and the State of Texas may assess stipulated penalties including interest against the City upon the occurrence of certain events. To the extent that CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR’s agents or sub-contractors cause or contribute to, in whole or in part, the assessment of any stipulated penalty against the City, CONTRACTOR agrees that it shall pay to City the full amount of any stipulated penalty assessed against and paid by City that is caused or contributed to in whole or in part by any action, failure to act, or failure to act within the time required by any provision of this contract. CONTRACTOR shall also pay to City all costs, attorney fees, expert witness fees and all other fees and expenses incurred by City in connection with the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties, or in contesting the assessment or payment of any such stipulated penalties. In addition to any and all other remedies to which City may be entitled at law or in equity, CONTRACTOR expressly authorizes City to withhold all amounts assessed and paid as stipulated penalties, and all associated costs, fees, or expenses from any amount unpaid to CONTRACTOR under the terms of this contract, or from any retainage provided in the contract. DJWDBTUSGC!6615!Bjsmjof!Mjgu!Tubujpo!Vqhsbeft-!Qspkfdu!33241Sfqpsu!Dsfbufe!Po;!202103135!9;16;56!QN DJWDBTUSGC!6615!Bjsmjof!Mjgu!Tubujpo!Vqhsbeft-!Qspkfdu!33241Sfqpsu!Dsfbufe!Po;!202103135!9;16;56!QN DJWDBTUSGC!6615!Bjsmjof!Mjgu!Tubujpo!Vqhsbeft-!Qspkfdu!33241Sfqpsu!Dsfbufe!Po;!202103135!9;16;56!QN DJWDBTUSGC!6615!Bjsmjof!Mjgu!Tubujpo!Vqhsbeft-!Qspkfdu!33241Sfqpsu!Dsfbufe!Po;!202103135!9;16;56!QN 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1 Definitions and Terminology ..................................................................................................... 10 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 10 1.02 Terminology ................................................................................................................................ 15 Article 2 Preliminary Matters ................................................................................................................... 16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 16 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................. 16 2.03 Project Management System ...................................................................................................... 16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ...................................................................................................... 17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ................................ 17 Article 3 Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................. 17 3.01 Intent ........................................................................................................................................... 17 3.02 Reference Standards ................................................................................................................... 18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 20 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 20 Article 4 Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 20 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 20 4.03 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 21 4.04 .................................................................................................. 21 Article 5 Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................................................................... 22 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 24 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 26 Article 6 Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 28 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................ 29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage .................................................................................... 29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions ...................................................................................................... 29 6.05 ................................................................................................................ 30 6.06 Property Insurance ...................................................................................................................... 33 6.07 Waiver of Rights .......................................................................................................................... 34 6.08 .................................................................................................... 34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance .............................................................................................. 35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance ............................................................................................................... 35 6.11 Insurance Policies ........................................................................................................................ 35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage ............................................................................................... 35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ...................................................................................................... 35 6.14 ....................................................... 36 Article 7 ..................................................................................................... 38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 40 7.06 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 41 7.07 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 41 7.08 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 41 7.09 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 42 7.10 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................. 43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 43 7.12 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 43 7.13 ......................................................................... 43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION ...................................................................................................................... 44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 45 Article 8 Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 46 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 46 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 47 8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 47 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9 ........................................................................................... 48 9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 48 9.02 ...................................................................... 48 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 48 9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 48 9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 48 9.07 Modifications .............................................................................................................................. 48 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 48 9.09 ......................................................................................... 48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program ................................................................................................ 49 Article 10 .................................................................. 49 10.01 .......................................................................................................... 49 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives ........................................................................................... 49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................ 49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments......................................................................... 50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 50 10.07 ..................................... 50 Article 11 Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work .................................................... 50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents ....................................................... 50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 52 11.05 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 52 11.06 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................... 53 11.08 Notice to Surety ...................................................................................................................... 54 Article 12 Change Management .............................................................................................................. 54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal ................................................................................................ 54 12.02 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification ................................................................... 55 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions ........................................................................................................................... 55 Article 13 Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 56 13.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 56 13.02 Claims Process ......................................................................................................................... 57 Article 14 Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements ....................................................................................... 58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates ......................................................................................... 58 14.02 Records .................................................................................................................................... 58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense ......................................................................................... 59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates ............................................................................................................. 59 Article 15 Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 59 15.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 59 15.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 63 15.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 63 15.04 Contingencies .......................................................................................................................... 64 Article 16 Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 65 16.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals ............................................................................................ 65 16.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 66 16.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 67 Article 17 Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 67 17.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 67 17.02 Application for Payment ......................................................................................................... 69 17.03 Schedule of Values .................................................................................................................. 71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value ............................................................ 72 17.05 Basis for Payments .................................................................................................................. 73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment ....................................................................... 73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ........................................................................................................... 74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment ......................................................... 74 17.09 ........................................................... 75 17.10 ................................................................................................ 76 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 76 17.12 Partial Utilization ..................................................................................................................... 77 17.13 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 77 17.14 Final Application for Payment ................................................................................................. 77 17.15 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 78 17.16 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 78 17.17 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 78 Article 18 Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................ 80 Article 19 Project Management ............................................................................................................... 81 19.01 Work Included ......................................................................................................................... 81 19.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................... 81 19.03 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................... 81 19.04 Required Permits .................................................................................................................... 81 19.05 Safety Requirements ............................................................................................................... 82 19.06 Access to the Site .................................................................................................................... 82 19.07 .......................................................................................................... 82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities ........................................................................ 83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations.............................................................................. 83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations ........................................................................ 84 19.11 Field Measurements ............................................................................................................... 84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points ......................................................................................... 84 19.13 Delivery and Storage ............................................................................................................... 85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction ................................................................................................. 86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access ...................................................................... 86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control .............................................................................................. 87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires ....................................................................................................... 87 19.18 Blasting .................................................................................................................................... 87 19.19 Archeological Requirements ................................................................................................... 87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources ............................................................................................... 88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies .......................................................................................... 88 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20 Project Coordination ................................................................................................................ 88 20.01 Work Included ......................................................................................................................... 88 20.02 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................... 88 20.03 Communication During Project ............................................................................................... 89 20.04 Project Meetings ..................................................................................................................... 89 20.05 Requests for Information ........................................................................................................ 91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log.................................................................................................. 91 20.07 Notification By Contractor ...................................................................................................... 92 20.08 Record Documents .................................................................................................................. 92 Article 21 Quality Management ............................................................................................................... 94 21.01 .................................................................................................. 94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT .................................................................................. 95 21.03 .................................................................................. 96 21.04 Documentation ....................................................................................................................... 96 21.05 Standards ................................................................................................................................ 97 21.06 Delivery and Storage ............................................................................................................... 97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects.............................................................................. 97 21.08 Test Reports ............................................................................................................................ 97 21.09 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory ........................................................................ 98 21.11 Quality Control Plan ................................................................................................................ 98 21.12 ...................................................................... 100 Article 22 Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................. 101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations ..................................................................................................... 101 22.02 Mediation .............................................................................................................................. 101 Article 23 Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy ................................................................................ 102 23.01 Policy ..................................................................................................................................... 102 23.02 Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 102 23.03 Goals...................................................................................................................................... 103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................ 104 Article 24 Document Management ........................................................................................................ 104 24.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 104 24.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 104 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 ................................................................................................ 104 24.04 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 105 24.05 Document Numbering .......................................................................................................... 105 24.06 Document Requirements ...................................................................................................... 106 Article 25 Shop Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 107 25.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 107 25.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 107 25.03 ................................................................................................ 107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................ 109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports ........................................................................................ 109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees .................................................................................................. 110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures .................................................................................... 110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures .......................................................................... 112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products ............................................................................................... 113 25.10 Requests for Deviation .......................................................................................................... 113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements ................................................................................................. 116 Article 26 Record Data ........................................................................................................................... 117 26.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 117 26.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 117 26.03 ................................................................................................ 117 26.04 Record Data Requirements ................................................................................................... 118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports ........................................................................................ 118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees .................................................................................................. 119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures ....................................................................................... 119 26.08 .................................................................................................... 120 Article 27 Construction Progress Schedule ............................................................................................ 121 27.01 Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 121 27.02 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 121 27.03 Schedule Requirements ........................................................................................................ 121 27.04 Schedule Revisions ................................................................................................................ 123 27.05 Float Time.............................................................................................................................. 123 Article 28 Video and Photographic documentation .............................................................................. 124 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 124 28.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 124 28.03 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 124 28.04 Photographs .......................................................................................................................... 125 28.05 Video Recording .................................................................................................................... 125 Article 29 Execution and Closeout ......................................................................................................... 125 29.01 Substantial Completion ......................................................................................................... 125 29.02 Final Inspections.................................................................................................................... 126 29.03 Reinspection Fees ................................................................................................................. 126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................ 127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ............................................................................................................... 127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements......................................................................... 127 Article 30 Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................ 128 30.01 Computation of Times........................................................................................................... 128 30.02 ....................................................................... 128 30.03 Independent Contractor ....................................................................................................... 129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ........................................................................................................... 129 30.05 Limitation of Damages .......................................................................................................... 129 30.06 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................. 129 30.07 Severability ............................................................................................................................ 129 30.08 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................... 130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries ................................................................................................. 130 30.10 Assignment of Contract......................................................................................................... 130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity ........................................................................................ 130 30.12 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................... 130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue ................................................................................... 130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury........................................................................................................... 130 30.15 Attorney Fees ........................................................................................................................ 130 30.16 Compliance with Laws........................................................................................................... 131 30.17 Enforcement.......................................................................................................................... 131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation ....................................................................................................... 131 30.19 Contract Sum......................................................................................................................... 131 30.20 .................................................................... 131 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. ................................................................................................................................. 131 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01!Defined Terms A.!Terms with initial capital letters, including the terms singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1.!Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2.!Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3.!Alternative Dispute Resolution - The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4.!Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5.!Award Date The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City) authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6.!Bid The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7.!Bidding Documents The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8.!Bidder An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9.!Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10.!Change Order - A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11.!Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a.!Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b.!Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c.!Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d.!Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12.!City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13.!Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14.!Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a.!The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (CERCLA); b.!The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c.!The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (RCRA); d.!The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e.!The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f.!The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g.!Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15.!Contract - The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16.!Contract Amendment - A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a.!Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b.!Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17.!Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18.!Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications, and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any, that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19.!Contract Times - The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a.!Achieve specified Milestones; b.!Achieve Substantial Completion; and c.!Complete the Work. 20.!Contractor - The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21.!Contractors Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22.!Cost of the Work - The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23.!Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a.!Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b.!Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c.!Has been damaged or stolen prior to OARs recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24.!Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25.!Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26.!Effective Date of the Contract - The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27.!Field Order - A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28.!Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29.!Indemnified Costs - All costs, losses, damages, and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30.!Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations - Applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31.!Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32.!Milestone - A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33.!Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a.!Contract Amendment; b.!Change Order; c.!Field Order; or d.!Work Change Directive. 34.!Notice of Award - The notice of Owners intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35.!Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36.!Owner - The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the Citys officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37.!Owners Authorized Representative or OAR - The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38.!Owners Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owners Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39.!Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40.!Progress Schedule - A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractors plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41.!Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42.!Project Manual That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information, solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43.!Resident Project Representative or RPR - The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44.!Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45.!Schedule of Documents - A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46.!Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractors Applications for Payment. 47.!Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48.!Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49.!Specifications - The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50.!Subcontractor - An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51.!Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52.!Supplementary Conditions - The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53.!Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54.!Technical Data - Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a.!Subsurface conditions at the Site; b.!Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or c.!Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55.!Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56.!Unit Price Work - Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57.!Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58.!Work Change Directive - A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02!Terminology A.!The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B.!It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to at no additional cost to Owner, at Contractors expense, or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C.!endar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D.!The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1.!The terms as allowed, as approved, as ordered, as directed, or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2.!Adjectives including or similar to reasonable, suitable, acceptable, proper, satisfactory, or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3.!Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4.!The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E.!The use of the words furnish, install, perform, and provide have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1.!Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2.!Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3.!Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4.!Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words furnish, install, perform, or provide. F.!Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1.!Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word all is not stated. 2.!Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words furnish, install, perform, provide, or similar words include the meaning of the phrase The Contractor shall... before these words. 3.!Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G.!Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H.!Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPTs project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I.!Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01!Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A.!Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B.!Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02!Copies of Documents A.!OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03!Project Management System A.!Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B.!Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C.!Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor. 2.04!Before Starting Construction A.!Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1.!Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2.!Schedule of Documents; and 3.!Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05!Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A.!Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B.!Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C.!Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01!Intent A.!Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1.!The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2.!In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract, Contractor represents: a.!Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b.!Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c.!Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d.!Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3.!Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4.!Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5.!Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B.!Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C.!Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D.!Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E.!The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F.!The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G.!Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02!Reference Standards A.!Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1.!Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations, whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractors Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2.!No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3.!The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B.!Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1.!Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2.!Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3.!Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C.!Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03!Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A.!Reporting Discrepancies: 1.!Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2.!The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all g verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3.!Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a.!Applicable Laws or Regulations; b.!Actual field conditions; c.!Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d.!Instructions of Suppliers. 4.!Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00 - 19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5.!Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6.!Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04!Interpretation of the Contract Documents A.!Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B.!Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C.!OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designers or OARs interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05!Reuse of Documents A.!Contractors Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B.!Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4 COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01!Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A.!The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02!Starting the Work A.!Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03!Progress Schedule A.!Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.!Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2.!Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B.!Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04!Delays in Contractors Progress A.!No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work, except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. O exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the C performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays. Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B.!Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractors Team. C.!No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D.!Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractors performance or progress is delayed, disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contracto interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1.!Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2.!Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3.!Acts of war or terrorism; and 4.!Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1.!The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2.!An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3.!Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F.!Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G.!Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H.!Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I.!Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractors Team. ARTICLE 5 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01!Availability of Lands A.!Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B.!Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02!Use of Site and Other Areas A.!Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1.!Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00 - 22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractors Team, including: a.!Damage to the Site; b.!Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractors Teams operations; c.!Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d.!Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2.!Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractors Team: a.!Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b.!Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03!Subsurface and Physical Conditions A.!The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1.!Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2.!Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3.!Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B.!Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C.!Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1.!The c of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be 2.!Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3.! interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04!Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A.!Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1.!Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2.!Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3.!Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4.!Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B.!OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1.!Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2.! to the subsurface or physical condition; 3.!Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4.! connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5.!Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6.! C.!OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommen conclusions, and recommendations. D.!Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1.!Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2.!Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a.!Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b.!The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c.!Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3.! question. 4.!A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05!Underground Facilities A.!The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1.!Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2.!Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3.!Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4.!Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5.!Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6.!The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B.!Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.!The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1.!Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2.!Prepare recommendation connection with this Underground Facility; 3.!Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4.! revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D.!OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend act recommendations. E.!Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F.!Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1.!Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2.!The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3.!Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G.!Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after the Underground Facility. 5.06!Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A.!The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1.!Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2.!Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B.!Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00 - 26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims : 1.! aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2.!Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3.!Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C.!The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D.!Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E.!Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern br costs. 1.!Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set- creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2.! Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F.!Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals Team that was not created b: 1.!Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2.!Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3.!Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a.!Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b.!Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.!Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a.!Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b.!Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5.! others in accordance with Article 8. G.!Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H.!The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6 BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01!Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A.!Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractors obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B.!Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C.!Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1.!Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2.!Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3.!Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D.!Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E.!Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F.!Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G.!Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owners termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H.!OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02!Licensed Sureties A.!Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B.!Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03!Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A.!Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B.!Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04!General Insurance Provisions A.!Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B.!Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C.!Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D.!Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E.!The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F.! compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G.!Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00 - 29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H.! under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I.!Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract J.! indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K.!Provide for an endorsemen primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L.!Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the wor 6.05! A.! 1.!employee company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet al Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2.!Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death 3.! coverage (if applicable). 4.!Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B.!Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1.!Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person 2.!Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3.!By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.!Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C.! ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1.!Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a.!If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insura providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1)! a)!Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b)!Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c)!Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d)!Coverage for testing and startup; e)!Any loss to property while in transit; f)!Any loss at the Site; g)!Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h)!Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2)!Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2.! in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3.!Broad form property damage coverage. 4.!Severability of interest. 5.!Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.!Personal injury coverage. 7.!En- Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not D.!Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E.!For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds $5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella lity, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F.!Pro 1.!Are written on an occurrence basis; 2.!Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3.!Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4.!Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G.!Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H.!Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I.!The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1.!Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2.!Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3.!Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4.!Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J.!The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06!Property Insurance A.! the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1.!Include the OPT, Contractor, and all Subcontractors, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2.! loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3.!Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4.!Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5.!Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6.!Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7.!Allow fo 8.!Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9.!Not include a co-insurance clause. 10.!Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11.!Include testing and startup. 12.!Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C.!Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D.! insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E.!Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F.!Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07!Waiver of Rights A.!Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B.!All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C.!Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner, Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages created nd other property insurance. 6.08! A.!Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds, or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09!Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A.!Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1.!Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2.!Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3.!Policy limits and deductibles. B.! C.!Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D.!Provide evidence of requirements for 30 amount. 6.10!Certificate of Insurance A.!Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1.!Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2.!Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3.!No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B.!Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11!Insurance Policies A.!If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B.!Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12!Continuing Evidence of Coverage A.!Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B.!Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13!Notices Regarding Insurance A.!Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00 - 35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 B.!Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14! A.!Definitions: 1.!- A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC- project, for the duration of the Project. 2.!Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project by the governmental entity. 3.!- includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B.!The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C.!The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D.!If the c the duration of the Project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E.!The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1.!A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2.!No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F.!The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G.!The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H.!The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I.!The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1.!Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 2.!Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 3.!Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4.!Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a.!A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b.!A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5.!Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6.!Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7.!Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J.!By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00 - 37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self- Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K.! Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01!Supervision and Superintendence A.!Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B.!Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owners consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02!Labor; Working Hours A.!Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B.!Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C.!Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OARs consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Years Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00 - 38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D.!If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E.!Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.B 7.03!Services, Materials, and Equipment A.!Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B.!Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C.!Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04!Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A.!Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B.!Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C.!Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D.!Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E.!Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractors reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F.!Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owners notice to replace a Subcontractor, Supplier, or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G.!Owner of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H.!Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I.!Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J.!Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K.!Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L.!Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1.!All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers Compensation Insurance. 2.!Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M.!OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N.!Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1.!Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractors Team. 2.!Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractors Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05!Patent Fees and Royalties A.!Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B.!Contractors obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06!Permits A.!Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractors Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07!Taxes A.!Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B.!The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C.!Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D.!Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E.!Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owners exemption from such taxes. 7.08!Laws and Regulations A.!Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractors compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B.!Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.!Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1.!Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2.!Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractors Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D.!Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09!Safety and Protection A.!Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B.!Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1.!Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2.!Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C.!Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1.!Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2.!Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D.!Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractors Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1.!Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2.!Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3.!Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractors Team. E.!Contractors duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractors Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F.!Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owners safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owners safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10!Safety Representative A.!Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11!Hazard Communication Programs A.!Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12!Emergencies A.!Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13!Contractors General Warranty and Guarantee A.!Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractors warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B.!This Contractors warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C.!Contractors obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractors obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1.!Observations by OPT; 2.!Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3.!The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4.!Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5.!Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6.!Inspections, tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7.!Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D.!The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractors performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14!INDEMNIFICATION A.!To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractors Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owners defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B.!To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractors Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractors Team, (ii) Contractors Teams action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owners employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owners sole negligence. C.!To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractors Team. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D.!The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractors Team or other individuals or entities under workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractors Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released, waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E.!The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F.!Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1.!A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2.!The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3.!The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G.!Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1.!Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractors counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2.!Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owners consent and agreement unless it: a.!Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b.!Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c.!Would not result in Owners full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15!Delegation of Professional Design Services A.!Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00 - 45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractors responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B.!The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C.!OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractors design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D.!Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designers review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designers review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E.!Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8 OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01!Other Work A.!Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractors Work. This other work may be performed by Owners employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B.!OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C.!Provide other contractors: 1.!Proper and safe access to the Site; 2.!Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3.!Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D.!Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractors Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractors Work. Contractors failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractors Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F.!Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02!Coordination A.!Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03!Legal Relationships A.!Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1.!Damages the Work or property of Contractors Team; 2.!Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3.!Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B.!Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractors ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C.!Take prompt corrective action if Contractors Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owners employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D.!Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owners contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!Contractors obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays, disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9 OWNERS AND OPTS RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01!Communications to Contractor A.!OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02!Replacement of Owners Project Team Members A.!Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03!Furnish Data A.!OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04!Pay When Due A.!Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05!Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A.!Owners duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06!Insurance A.!Owners responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07!Modifications A.!Owners responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08!Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A.!OPTs responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09!Limitations on OPTs Responsibilities A.!The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractors means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractors failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10!Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A.!OPTs responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11!Compliance with Safety Program A.!Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10 OARS AND DESIGNERS STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01!Owners Representative A.!OAR is Owners representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owners representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02!Visits to Site A.!Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designers visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designers authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B.!OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owners quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owners representative as described in the Contract Documents. OARs visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OARs authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03!Resident Project Representatives A.!Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04!Rejecting Defective Work A.!OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05!Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A.!Designers authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B.!Designers authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C.!OAR and Designers authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D.!OARs authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06!Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A.!OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B.!Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C.!Contractor may appeal Designers decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designers decision. 10.07!Limitations on OARs and Designers Authority and Responsibilities A.!OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractors Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractors Team. ARTICLE 11 AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01!Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A.!The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1.!Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a.!Changes that do not involve: 1)!The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2)!The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3)!Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b.!Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2.!Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designers approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3.!Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4.!Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B.!Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02!Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A.!Owner may order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1.!Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2.!Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3.!Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B.!These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractors safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03!Unauthorized Changes in the Work A.!Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04!Change of Contract Price A.!The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B.!An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1.!By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2.!By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3.!Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractors fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C.!The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05!Change of Contract Times A.!The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B.!An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06!Change Proposals A.!Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1.!Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2.!Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3.!Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4.!Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07!Execution of Change Orders A.!Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1.!Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2.!Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3.!Changes in the Work which are: a.!Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b.!Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owners correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c.!Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4.!Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B.!Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractors agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C.!All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractors submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D.!If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08!Notice to Surety A.!Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents, or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12 CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01!Requests for Change Proposal A.!Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1.!Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2.!Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3.!Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02!Change Proposals A.!Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1.!Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2.!Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3.!Include with the Change Proposal: a.!A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or b.!The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c.!A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1)!List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2)!Man hours for classification; 3)!Equipment used in construction; 4)!Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5)!Royalties and patent fees; 6)!Bonds and insurance; 7)!Overhead and profit; 8)!Field office costs; and 9)!Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d.!Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e.!Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f.!Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B.!Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C.!A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D.!Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03!Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A.!OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1.!Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2.!Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a.!Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at b.!No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B.!The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04!Substitutions A.!The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B.!Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.! prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1.!Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2.!Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3.!The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D.!Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request, the Contractor: 1.!Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2.!Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3.!Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4.!Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E.!Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13 CLAIMS 13.01!Claims A.!Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1.!Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2.!Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3.!Appealing decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4.!Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5.!Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B.!Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00 - 56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which -compensatory. 13.02!Claims Process A.!Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B.!Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C.!Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, knowledge and belief, the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D.!Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E.!Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F.!The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1.!Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2.!Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G.!Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12, shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H.!Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1.!Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2.!Issue a recommendation; 3.!Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.!Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I.!If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J.!recommendation regarding a Claim, the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K.!If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L.!If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M.!Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N.!Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O.!Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14 PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01!Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A.!Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B.!Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C.!Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02!Records A.! shall keep a record showing: 1.!The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2.!The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03!Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A.! Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B.!3(b) Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258, shall pay to the Owner, on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C.!58 Criminal Offense: 1.!An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2.!Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or 3.!An offense is punishable by: a.!A fine not to exceed $500; b.!Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c.!Both a fine and confinement. 14.04!Prevailing Wage Rates A.!Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01!Cost of the Work A.!The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1.!To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2.!To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B.!Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.!Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1.!Payroll costs for Contractors employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a.!Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b.!Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1)!Social security contributions, 2)!Unemployment, 3)!Excise and payroll taxes, 4)!Workers compensation, 5)!Health and retirement benefits, 6)!Bonuses, and 7)!Paid time off for sick leave, vacations, and holidays; and c.!Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2.!Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3.!Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining, with the OPT, which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractors Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractors Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4.!Supplemental costs including the following: a.!The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractors employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b.!Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c.!Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d.!For Contractor- and Subcontractor-owned machinery, trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the wĻƓƷğƌ wğƷĻ .ƌǒĻ .ƚƚƉ and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1)!Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e.!Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1)!The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2)!If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f.!Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g.!Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractors Team; h.!Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i.!Cost of additional utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j.!Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k.!Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D.!The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1.!Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractors officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00 - 61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractors principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractors fee. 2.!Office expenses other than Contractors office at the Site. 3.!Any part of Contractors capital expenses, including interest on Contractors capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4.!Costs due to the actions of Contractors Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5.!Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractors fee. 6.!Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractors indemnification of Owner. 7.!Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E.!The Contractors fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1.!In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2.!A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3.!A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a.!5.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b.!5.01.C.3; c.!Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1)! 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2)! 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3)!The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d.!No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e.!Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4.! Paragraphs 15.05.B.1 through 15.05.B.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F.!Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02!Allowances A.!Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B.!Contractor agrees that: 1.!The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2.!Contractors costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3.!Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.B.1 and 15.02.B.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C.!OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03!Unit Price Work A.!The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B.!The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C.!Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractors overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D.!OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OARs decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OARs decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1.!The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2.!There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3.!Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04!Contingencies A.!Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B.!The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1.!Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2.!Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3.!Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractors selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4.!Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5.!Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6.!Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C.!OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D.!Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01!Access to Work A.!Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractors safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02!Tests, Inspections and Approvals A.!OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B.!Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C.!Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1.!By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2.!To attain OPTs acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3.!By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4.!For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5.!For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractors purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6.!For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7.!For retesting due to failed tests. D.!Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03!Defective Work A.!It is Contractors obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B.!OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C.!OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D.!Promptly correct Defective Work. E.!Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owners special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F.!Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1.!Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2.!Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3.!Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4.!Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04!Acceptance of Defective Work A.!Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1.!This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2.!Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3.!Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B.!Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPTs evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05!Uncovering Work A.!OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B.!Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPTs observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractors intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C.!Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1.!Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06!Owner May Stop the Work A.!Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1.!The Work is Defective; 2.!Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3.!Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owners right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractors Team or surety. 16.07!Owner May Correct Defective Work A.!Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days notice to Contractor if: 1.!Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2.!Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3.!Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B.!Owner may: 1.!Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2.!Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractors services related to the Work; and 3.!Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C.!Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D.!All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractors Defective Work. E.!Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owners rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01!Progress Payments A.!Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1.!Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2.!Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3.!Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B.!Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1.!Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a.!Claims made against Owner or costs, losses, or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1)!Contractors conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2)!Contractors failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b.!Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c.!Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractors Team, requiring correction or replacement; d.!Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e.!The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f.!Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g.!Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractors failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h.!Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i.!Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j.!Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k.!Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; l.!Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m.!Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n.!Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o.!OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p.!Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q.!Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2.!Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3.!OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C.!Delayed Payments: 1.!No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2.!No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D.!The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02!Application for Payment A.!Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1.!Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2.!Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3.!Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4.!Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5.! General Conditions 00 72 00 - 69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.!All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7.!Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8.!Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9.!Bonds and insurance; 10.!Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11.!Taxes; 12.!Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13.!Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a.!Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b.! equipment, including spare parts storage, c.!Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d.!Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e.!Temporary facilities for power and communications, f.!Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g.!Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14.!Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15.!Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16.!Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17.!Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18.!Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19.!Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20.!Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21.!Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22.!Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23.!Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24.!Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25.! 26.!Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27.!Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28.!Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29.!Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B.!Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C.!Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D.!OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1.!Record Documents per Article 20. 2.!Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3.!Project photographs per Article 28. 4.! Participation Policy. 5.!Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including 6.!Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03!Schedule of Values A.!Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B.!Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C.!Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D.!If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E.!Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1.!Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2.!Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3.!Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a.!The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b.!Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4.! the line item to the Contract Price. 5.!Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6.!These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7.!The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F.!Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G.!Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04!Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A.!Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B.!Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C.!Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05!Basis for Payments A.!Lump Sum Contracts: 1.!Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2.!Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3.!Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4.!Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B.!Unit Price Contracts: 1.!Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a.!Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b.!Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2.!Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06!Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A.!Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1.!Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2.!Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount, up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3.!Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4.!Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B.!Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00 - 73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C.!Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City, that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D.!Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arr E.!The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F.!Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07!Retainage and Set-Offs A.!Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B.!Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08!Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A.!Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1.!The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2.!The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3.!Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4.!Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B.!Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1.!Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2.!Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3.!Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4.!Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5.!Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6.!Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7.!Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C.!Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1.!Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2.!Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09! A.!OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B.!OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C.!OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of t necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D.! that based on their experience and the information available: 1.!The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2.!The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3.!Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!This representation is subject to: 1.!Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2.!The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3.!Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F.!OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1.!Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2.!Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G.! 1.!To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2.!For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3.! performance of the Work; 4.!To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5.!To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10!Contractors Warranty of Title A.!Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11!Substantial Completion A.!Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B.!OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractors notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.!The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owners use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1.!Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractors coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2.!Owners assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owners use or occupancy of the Work; 3.!Contractors obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4.!Contractors access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5.!Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12!Partial Utilization A.!Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractors performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B.!No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13!Final Inspection A.!OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14!Final Application for Payment A.!Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1.!Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2.!Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3.!Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4.!Penalties and bonuses, 5.!Deductions for liquidated damages, 6.!Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7.!Other adjustments if needed. B.!OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15!Final Payment A.!Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1.!Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2.!Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B.!OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractors other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPTs reasons for not recommending final payment. C.!The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OARs recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D.!The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16!Waiver of Claims A.!The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1.!Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2.!Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3.!Contractors failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4.!Contractors continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B.!Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17!Correction Period A.!Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B.!Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C.!Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.B corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OARs instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D.!Contractors obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E.!The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F.!Contractors obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01!Owner May Suspend Work A.!Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02!Owner May Terminate for Cause A.!The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1.!Contractors persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2.!Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3.!Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4.!Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a.!A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b.!Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c.!Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d.!A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractors creditors, or e.!A receiver is appointed on account of Contractors insolvency; 5.!Contractors disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6.!Contractors repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7.!ork with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8.! B.!Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OARs request for this information. C.!Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D.!Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause. E.!Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F.!Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G.!Termination does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H.!In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03!Owner May Terminate For Convenience A.!Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1.!Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2.!Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3.!Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01!Work Included A.!Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B.!Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C.!Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D.!Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E.!Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02!Quality Assurance A.!Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B.!Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03!Document Submittal A.!Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1.!nstructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2.!Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04!Required Permits A.!Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B.!Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C.!Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D.!Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E.!Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F.!Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G.!Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05!Safety Requirements A.!Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B.!Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C.!Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D.!Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E.!Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06!Access to the Site A.!Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B.!Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C.!Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07! A.!Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B.!Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C.!Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D.!Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E.! F.!Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the -of-way, or easements. G.!Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H.!Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I.!Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08!Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A.!Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B.!Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C.!Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D.!Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E.!Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1.!Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2.!Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3.!Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4.!Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09!Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A.!Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B.!Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.!Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D.!Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E.!Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10!Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A.!Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1.!Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2.!Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3.!Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B.!Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11!Field Measurements A.!Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B.!Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C.!Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D.!Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12!Reference Data and Control Points A.!The OPT will provide the following control points: 1.!Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2.!Benchmarks for vertical control. B.!Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C.!Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1.!Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 2.!Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3.!Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13!Delivery and Storage A.!Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B.!Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C.!Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D.!Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E.!Store products in a delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F.!Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G.!Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H.!Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1.!Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2.!Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3.!Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.!Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5.!Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6.!Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7.!Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I.!Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1.!Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2.! 3.!Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J.!Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K.!Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14!Cleaning During Construction A.!Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B.!Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C.!Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D.!Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1.!Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2.!Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3.!Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4.!Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15!Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A.!Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B.! shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00 - 86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1.!The reason for closing the street. 2.!How long the street will remain closed. 3.!Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C.!Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction, with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D.!Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16!Area Access and Traffic Control A.!Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B.!Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C.! required permits from the Owner 19.17!Overhead Electrical Wires A.!Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B.!Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18!Blasting A.!Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19!Archeological Requirements A.!Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B.!Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1.!Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2.!Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3.!Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4.!Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C.!Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1.!Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2.!Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a.!Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b.!Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D.!Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E.!Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20!Endangered Species Resources A.!Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B.!Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21!Cooperation with Public Agencies A.!Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B.!Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20 PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01!Work Included A.!Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02!Document Submittal A.!Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03!Communication During Project A.!The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B.!The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1.!Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2.!Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3.!Contract Modifications. 4.!Observation of Work and testing. 5.!Claims. C.!The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D.!Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1.!Name of the Owner. 2.!Project name. 3.!Contract title. 4.!Project number. 5.!Date. 6.!A reference statement. 20.04!Project Meetings A.!Pre-Construction Conference: 1.!Attend a pre-construction conference. 2.!The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3.!The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4.!epresentatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5.!Provide and be prepared to discuss: a.!Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b.!Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. c.!List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d.! e.!Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B.!Progress Meetings: 1.!Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a.!Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b.!Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c.! Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d.!Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2.!Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a.!Status of overall Project schedule. b.! c.!Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d.!Coordination with the Owner. e.!Status of documents. f.!Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g.!Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h.!Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i.!Maintenance of quality standards. 3.!OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C.!Pre- Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1.!Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2.!Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3.!Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.!Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05!Requests for Information A.!Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.!Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2.!Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3.!A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B.!Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C.!Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D.!Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E.!Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06!Decision and Action Item Log A.!OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1.!Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2.!Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B.!OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1.!Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2.!Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3.!Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C.!Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07!Notification By Contractor A.!Notify the OAR of: 1.!Need for testing. 2.!Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3.!Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4.!Proposed utility connections. 5.!Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6.!Training. B.!Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C.! 20.08!Record Documents A.!Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1.!Drawings. 2.!Specifications. 3.!Addenda. 4.!Modifications. 5.!Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6.!Construction photographs. 7.!Test Reports. 8.!Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9.!Reference standards. B.! 1.!Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2.!Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3.!Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4.!Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5.!Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C.!Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1.!Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2.!Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D.!Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1.!Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2.!Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3.!Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4.!Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a.!Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b.!Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. c.!Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1)!Piping. 2)!Ductwork. 3)!Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4)!Valves, unions, traps, and tanks. 5)!Services entrance. 6)!Feeders. 7)!Outlets. d.!Changes of dimension and detail. e.!Changes by Modifications. f.!Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g.!Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5.!Mark Drawings with the following colors: a.!Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b.!Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work (lines added) in yellow; c.!Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d.!Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.!Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E.!Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01! A.! Quality Control Plan. B.!Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1.!Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2.!Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3.!Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4.!Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a.!Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b.!Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; c.!Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d.!Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e.!Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f.!Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g.!Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h.!Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i.! inspections and testing; j.!Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k.!Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5.!Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be 6.!Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7.!Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8.!Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C.!Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D.!All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E.!Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F.!Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G.!Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or Program, or the Contract Documents. H.!Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I.!Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02!Quality Management Activities by OPT A.! Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B.!Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C.!Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00 - 95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1.!Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2.!Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3.!Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products 4.! 5.!ted Work. D.! which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03! A.! anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B.!Contractor will receive copies of all test report activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C.!Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D.!Contractor may subm Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04!Documentation A.!Provide documentation which includes: 1.! compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2.!A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3.!Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4.!Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05!Standards A.!Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratory B.!Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06!Delivery and Storage A.!Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07!Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A.!Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B.!Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C.!Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08!Test Reports A.!Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1.!Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a.!Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b.!Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; c.!Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d.!Description of the product being sampled or tested; e.!Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f.!Date the report was issued; g.!Description of the test performed; h.!Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i.!Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j.!Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k.!A description of the results of the test; l.!Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m.!Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2.!Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3.!OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B.!Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C.!Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09!Defective Work A.!Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B.!No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10!Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A.!The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B.!The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1.!Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2.!Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3.!Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4.!Direct or stop the Work. 21.11!Quality Control Plan A.!Article 25. d to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00 - 98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B.! the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Supp 1.!A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2.!Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3.!The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4.!Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5.!Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a.!Name of tests to be performed, b.!Specification paragraph requiring test, c.!Parameters of Work to be tested, d.!Test frequency, e.!Persons responsible for each test, and f.!Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6.! specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.B.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7.!Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8.!Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9.!Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10.!The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C.!The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the D.! personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!mitted and before approval. 21.12! A.!Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B.!Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1.!Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a.!Review the Contract Drawings. b.!Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c.!Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d.!Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e.!Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f.!Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g.!Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h.!Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i.!Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j.!Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2.!Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a.!Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b.!Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c.!Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d.!Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e.!Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3.!Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a.!Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b.!Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c.!Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C.!Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1.!The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2.!Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3.!Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4.!Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22 FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01!Senior Level Negotiations A.!Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B.!All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C.!Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02!Mediation A.!In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00 - 101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1.!The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2.!In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3.!Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-sts. Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County, Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.!Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23 MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01!Policy A.!It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy, the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02!Definitions A.!Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B.!Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C.!Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1.!Owned: a.!For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b.!For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00 - 102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c.!For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2.!Controlled: a.!The primary power, direct or indirect, to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3.!Share in Payments: a.!Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D.!Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E.!Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities. The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F.!Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman, a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G.!Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03!Goals A.!The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in Contract award shall be 1.!Minority participation goal is 45%. 2.!Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B.!These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00 - 103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from 23.04!Compliance A.!Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B.!Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project, the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24 DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01!Work Included A.!Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02!Quality Assurance A.!Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03! A.!Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B.!Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C.!Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1.!Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2.!Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3.!Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4.!Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04!Document Submittal A.!Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1.!Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2.!The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3.!Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a.!Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b.!Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c.!Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d.!Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e.!Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f.!Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g.! . h.!Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05!Document Numbering A.!Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1.!Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00 - 105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2.!Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3.!Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop document has been sent for review. 4.!Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5.!Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B.!Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06!Document Requirements A.!Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B.!Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Article 25 for approval of product Certified Test Report Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25 SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01!Work Included A.!Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B.!Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1.!Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2.!Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3.!Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C.! by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02!Quality Assurance A.!Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B.!Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C.!Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03! A.!Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B.!Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C.!Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1.!Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2.!Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00 - 107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3.!Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4.!Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D.!Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1.!Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2.!Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3.!Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4.! methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E.!Determine and verify: 1.!Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2.!Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3.!Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4.!Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5.!Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F.!Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G.!Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at H.!Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04!Shop Drawing Requirements A.!Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1.!Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures, or other aesthetic features. 2.!Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3.!Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4.!Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B.!Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1.!Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2.!Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3.!All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4.!Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5.!Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6.!Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C.!Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05!Special Certifications and Reports A.!Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1.!Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2.!Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3.!Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00 - 109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the 25.06!Warranties and Guarantees A.!Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B.!Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C.!Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07!Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A.!Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1.!Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2.!Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a.!Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b.!Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c.!Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d.!Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e.!Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f.!Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g.! h.!Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3.!Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4.!Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5.!Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a.!Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b.!Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c.!Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6.!Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a.!Related Specification Sections, b.!Drawing number and detail designation, c.!Product designation or name, d.!Schedule references, e.!System into which the product is incorporated, and f.!Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B.!Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1.!Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2.! drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3.!Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4.!Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5.!Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C.!Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D.!Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00 - 111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E.!Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08!Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A.!Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1.!Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2.!Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3.!Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4.!Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5.!Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6.!Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7.!Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8.!Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9.!Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal the Owner. B.!Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1.!Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2.!Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3.!Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4.!Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5.!Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6.!Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7.!Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09!Equal Non Specified Products A.! 1.!Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2.! is not equal. a.!Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b.! and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c.!The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3.!Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a.!Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b.!Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c.!Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d.!Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e.!Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10!Requests for Deviation A.!Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B.!Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C.!Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D.!Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11!Designer Responsibilities A.!Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1.!d in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2.! sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3.!ll not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B.!Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1.! Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2.!Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a.!Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b.!Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. c.!Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3.!Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a.!Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b.!Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c.!Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d.!Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e.! significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f.!Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g.!Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4.!Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5.!Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C.!Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D.!Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1.! unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2.!A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3.!A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F.!Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12!Resubmission Requirements A.!Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1.!Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2.!Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3.!Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4.!Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B.!Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1.!Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2.!Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3.!Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4.!A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.! of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26 RECORD DATA 26.01!Work Included A.!Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B.!Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1.!Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2.!Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3.!Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C.! by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D.!Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02!Quality Assurance A.!Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03! A.!Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B.!Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C.!Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1.!Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2.!Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3.!Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4.!ities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D.!Determine and verify: 1.!Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2.!Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3.!Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4.!Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5.!Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E.!Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04!Record Data Requirements A.!Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1.!Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components; 2.!Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3.!All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4.!Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5.!Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6.!Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05!Special Certifications and Reports A.!Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1.!Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06!Warranties and Guarantees A.!Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B.!Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C.!Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07!Record Data Submittal Procedures A.!Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1.!Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2.!Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a.!Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b.!Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c.!Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d.!Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e.!Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f.!Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g.!Use softwa h.!Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3.!Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4.!Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5.!Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a.!Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b.!Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. c.!Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6.!Mark Record Data to reference: a.!Related Specification Sections, b.!Drawing number and detail designation, c.!Product designation or name, d.!Schedule references, e.!System into which the product is incorporated, and f.!Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B.!Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C.!Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08! A.!Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1.!Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2.!Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3.! with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B.!Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1.!File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the statu further action is required on that Record Data. 2.!Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a.!The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b.!The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26 required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c.!The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data - , and the Record Data process will be closed. C.!Contractor is to res ARTICLE 27 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01!Requirements A.!Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B.!Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C.!Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D.!Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E.!Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02!Document Submittal A.!Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B.!Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C.!Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D.!Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03!Schedule Requirements A.!Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1.!Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2.!Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3.!Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.!Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B.! comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C.!Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1.!Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2.!Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3.!Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4.!Provide continuous current status information. 5.! 6.!Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7.!Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D.!Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1.!Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2.!Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3.!Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E.!Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1.!Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2.!Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3.!Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4.!The activity start and stop dates; 5.!The activity duration; 6.!Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7.!A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8.!Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F.!Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1.!Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2.!Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3.!Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4.!Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04!Schedule Revisions A.!Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1.!Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a.!Number of days behind schedule; b.!Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c.!Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2.!Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B.!Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1.!Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2.!OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C.!Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D.!Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule schedule. 27.05!Float Time A.!Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B.!Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C.!Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D.!Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E.!Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28 VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01!Work Included A.!Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1.!Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way) including but not limited to streets, curb and gutter, utilities, driveways, fencing, landscaping, etc. 2.!Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3.!Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B.!Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1.!Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2.!Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3.!Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4.!Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5.!Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6.!Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C.!All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02!Quality Assurance A.!Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03!Document Submittal A.!Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B.!Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04!Photographs A.!Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B.!Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C.!Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D.!Identify each print on back with: 1.!Project name. 2.!Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3.!Description of the subject of photograph. E.!Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F.!Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05!Video Recording A.!Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B.!Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C.!Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D.!Video resolution shall be 1080p. E.!The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F.!DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G.!The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H.!Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01!Substantial Completion A.!Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B.!OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C.!OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1.!OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2.!Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3.!Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the notice have been completed. 4.!OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5.!OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6.!Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02!Final Inspections A.!Notify the OAR when: 1.!Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2.!Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3.!Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4.!Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5.!Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B.!OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C.!Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D.!Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E.!Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03!Reinspection Fees A.!Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04!Closeout Documents Submittal A.!Record Documents per Article 20. B.!Warranties and bonds. C.!Equipment installation reports on equipment. D.!Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E.!Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F.!Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05!Transfer of Utilities A.!If applicable to the Project, transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B.!Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06!Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A.!Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B.!The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C.!Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.!Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2.!Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a.!A description of the product or Work item; b.!The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c.!Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d.!Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e.!Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f.!Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g.!Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h.!Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i.!Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D.!Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E.!Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30 MISCELLANEOUS 30.01!Computation of Times A.!Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B.!All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02! A.!By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee, which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four (4) years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract, then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to: accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B.!Owner agrees to exerci access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C.!Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03!Independent Contractor A.!Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractors Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractors Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04!Cumulative Remedies A.!The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of, the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1.!Laws or Regulations; 2.!Special warranties or guarantees; or 3.!Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B.!The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05!Limitation of Damages A.!Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractors Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B.!Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06!No Waiver A.!The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07!Severability A.!If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08!Survival of Obligations A.!Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09!No Third Party Beneficiaries A.!Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10!Assignment of Contract A.!This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11!No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A.!The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B.!This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12!Controlling Law A.!This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County, Texas. 30.13!Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A.!Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14!Waiver of Trial by Jury A.!Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15!Attorney Fees A.!The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for pay General Conditions 00 72 00 - 130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16!Compliance with Laws A.!Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B.!No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C.!Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D.!Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein, and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17!Enforcement A.!The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18!Subject to Appropriation A.!Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19! Contract Sum A.!The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated, this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20!Contractors Guarantee as Additional Remedy A.!The Contractors guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21!Notices. A.!Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22!Public Information A.!The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00 - 132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Urban Engineering, LLC Bath Engineering Corporation Wilkerson and Sanders Inc. Structural Engineering ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR’S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor’s progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 1 Airline Lift Station Improvements – Project No. 22130 Rev 3/2023 3. A total of 39 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 39 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Geotechnical Subsurface Investigation, Laboratory Testing Program, and Foundation Recommendations for the Proposed Airline Road Lift Station Improvements, Prepared by Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. (RETL), RETL Report Number G122346, July 14, 2022. SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: None B. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 2 Airline Lift Station Improvements – Project No. 22130 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises – Operations 3. Underground Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 4. Products / Completed Operations $2,000,000 Aggregate 5. Contractual Liability 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal & Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability - Owned, Non- $500,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers’ Compensation Statutory Employer’s Liability $500,000/ 500,000/ 500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price > $5,000,000 Contractor’s Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental X Required Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder’s Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges X Required Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- X Required Not Required owned property Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 3 Airline Lift Station Improvements – Project No. 22130 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS A. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunup to sundown Monday through Friday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. B. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR’s consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year’s Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Juneteenth June 19 Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: “The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14 – PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX21 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 4 Airline Lift Station Improvements – Project No. 22130 Rev 3/2023 "General Decision Number: TX20230021 01/06/2023 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20220021 State: Texas Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). ______________________________________________________________ |If the contract is entered |. Executive Order 14026 | |into on or after January 30, | generally applies to the | |2022, or the contract is | contract. | |renewed or extended (e.g., an |. The contractor must pay | |option is exercised) on or | all covered workers at | |after January 30, 2022: | least $16.20 per hour (or | | | the applicable wage rate | | | listed on this wage | | | determination, if it is | | | higher) for all hours | | | spent performing on the | | | contract in 2023. | |______________________________|_____________________________| |If the contract was awarded on|. Executive Order 13658 | |or between January 1, 2015 and| generally applies to the | |January 29, 2022, and the | contract. | |contract is not renewed or |. The contractor must pay all| |extended on or after January | covered workers at least | |30, 2022: | $12.15 per hour (or the | | | applicable wage rate listed| | | on this wage determination,| | | if it is higher) for all | | | hours spent performing on | | | that contract in 2023. | |______________________________|_____________________________| The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2023 SUTX1987-001 12/01/1987 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excluding Form Setting).........................$ 9.05 ** Concrete Finisher................$ 7.56 ** ELECTRICIAN......................$ 13.37 ** 2.58 Laborers: Common......................$ 7.25 ** Utility.....................$ 7.68 ** Power equipment operators: Backhoe.....................$ 9.21 ** Motor Grader................$ 8.72 ** ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($16.20) or 13658 ($12.15). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISIO" "General Decision Number: TX20230288 01/06/2023 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20220288 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). ______________________________________________________________ |If the contract is entered |. Executive Order 14026 | |into on or after January 30, | generally applies to the | |2022, or the contract is | contract. | |renewed or extended (e.g., an |. The contractor must pay | |option is exercised) on or | all covered workers at | |after January 30, 2022: | least $16.20 per hour (or | | | the applicable wage rate | | | listed on this wage | | | determination, if it is | | | higher) for all hours | | | spent performing on the | | | contract in 2023. | |______________________________|_____________________________| |If the contract was awarded on|. Executive Order 13658 | |or between January 1, 2015 and| generally applies to the | |January 29, 2022, and the | contract. | |contract is not renewed or |. The contractor must pay all| |extended on or after January | covered workers at least | |30, 2022: | $12.15 per hour (or the | | | applicable wage rate listed| | | on this wage determination,| | | if it is higher) for all | | | hours spent performing on | | | that contract in 2023. | |______________________________|_____________________________| The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2023 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2021 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 29.47 24.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0278-002 08/28/2022 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 27.00 8.76 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0084-011 06/01/2022 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 26.76 7.88 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($16.20) or 13658 ($12.15). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISIO" file:///C/Users/elsak/Desktop/Wage%20Determination/2023/tx288%20ARANSAS,%20NUECES%20-%20BUILDING.txt\[2/17/2023 10:21:16 AM\] ARTICLE 19 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. For the Contractor’s convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Urban Engineering 361-854-3101 Mark Maroney, P. E. 361-339-2089 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 Water/ Wastewater/ Stormwater (361-826-1818 after hours) 361-885-6900 Gas Department (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department (City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 361-881-2511 AT&T (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) CenturyLink 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 5 Airline Lift Station Improvements – Project No. 22130 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 25 – SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description 01 33 01 REFER TO SUBMITTAL REGISTER SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26 – RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description 00 72 00 – Art. 26 Record Drawing for Entire Project SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 6 Airline Lift Station Improvements – Project No. 22130 Rev 3/2023 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. This project consists of the removal of discharge piping, fittings, pump bases, pump guide rails, electrical gear, and existing precast concrete fence. This project also consists of the installation of submersible pumps, piping, fittings, pump bases, guide rails, electrical gear, odor control unit, electrical generator, CMU block perimeter fence, and miscellaneous items of work required to complete project in accordance with plans, specifications and Contract Documents. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES – N/A A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate, and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as “Allowances” have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner’s discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Bid Item D-1 – Alternate No. 1 – Additional Submersible Pump 1. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide one additional pump with cable and install as Pump No. 4 and as identified in the plans and specifications. Note that this does not include the pump bases, guide rail and other pump accessories that are to be provided and installed as a part of Bid Item B-1 Lift Station Improvements. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 5/2020 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Bid Item C-1 – Utility Unforeseen Allowance: 1. The AL bid item described as “Allowance for Unanticipated Work” has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allowance may be used at the OAR’s discretion should an unanticipated adjustment of a utility, unknown structure or similar situation warrant the use of the allowance funds. Sound the use of funds from the “Allowance for Unanticipated Work” become necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between the City and the Contractor. Payment shall be negotiated for each circumstance. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used throughout the course of the work. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 5/2020 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1 – Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 5/2020 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2 – Bonds and Insurance (Maximum Allocation of 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C. Bid Item B-1 – Lift Station Improvements (All work for the improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifically described in another bid item): 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Lift Station Improvements as identified in the plans and specifications. This item shall include all work required to complete the work that is not measured under another bid item, complete in place, as outlined in the plans and contract documents. Contractor shall provide a detailed breakdown of this item after contract award to use for monthly payment requests. D. Bid Item B-2 – Electrical Improvements: 1. Lump Sum 1. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Electrical portion of the project per plans and specifications and obtain electrical permit from City. E. Bid Item B-3 – Odor Control Unit: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Odor Control Unit portion of the project per plans and specifications. Odor control unit includes the complete biofilter with irrigation system, two blowers with concrete foundation. Does not include electrical, drain line from the biofilter or yard piping. F. Bid Item B-4 – CMU Block Perimeter Fence: 1. Lump Sum Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 5/2020 This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to locate existing buried utilities, provide the drilled piers, concrete foundation beam, and 8' Tall CMU Block Perimeter Fence as identified in the plans and specifications. Does not include the demolition of the existing fence and gate and does not include the two new gates, these are subsidiary to Bid Item B-1. G. Bid Item B-5 – Concrete Pavement: 1. Lump Sum This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to construct the new concrete pavement, including doweling into the existing concrete driveway and furnishing and placing curing compound. H. Bid Item B-6 – Control of Flow: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Control of Flow piping and pumping portion of the project, removal of existing 16”x16”x8” tee and provide new 16” tee, remove section of existing fence if necessary for station access, all as per plans and specifications, and as outline in Specification 13C1.8. I. Bid Item B-7 – Wet Well Cleaning: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to remove and cleanout out all solids, grit, debris, etc. as per the plans and specifications and haul off and properly dispose of the removed material as outline in Spec. 13C1.5 and Spec 027604 J. Bid Item B-8 – Temporary Traffic Control: 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Temporary Traffic Control in Airline Road to allow the new fence construction as identified in the plans and specifications. K. Bid Item B-9 – Pipeline Trench Safety: 1. Linear Foot 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the linear foot of trench over 5’ in depth and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor and equipment required to provide the Pipeline Trench Safety portion of the project as set out in Spec 02 20 22. L. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 3 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 5/2020 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 4 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 Rev 5/2020 01 33 01 Submittal Register Types of Submittals Required Specification Paragraph Specification Description Product Sample or Operations SectionNo. InformationMockupData 11B6\[6\]Pumps Electrical 40 94 30SCADA Generator 02 62 06Piping and Fittings 11G1\[3\]Odor Control Unit 03 80 00Concrete 03 20 20Reinforcing Steel Control of Flow Plan CMU Block Mortar 01 33 01-1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades - Project No. 22130 10/2018 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence suggested in Technical Specification 13C. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time Substantial Completion of Entire Project 330 Calendar Days Final Completion of Entire Project 360 Calendar Days Note that the Airline Lift Station provides a critical service for the City of Corpus Christi, TX. Work shall be performed in a manner that will not prevent the lift station from moving wastewater in the collection system. The Contractor shall bear the cost of penalties imposed on the Owner for water quality violations caused by actions of the Contractor. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the Wastewater Dept. staff, design engineer and the OAR throughout construction to maintain the pumping operations at all times. The Contractor shall provide the City and OAR a request for shutdown 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled temporary shutdowns or rerouting of flow. The City reserves the right to grant, delay, or deny such shutdowns or rerouting requests depending upon the anticipated weather conditions or other issues that would affect the ability to maintain pumping of the collected wastewater. In addition, the Contractor’s overall construction schedule shall clearly highlight the anticipated scheduled shutdown and rerouting dates and duration. The time of any shutdowns will be decided by the City and will likely occur during night time. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for shutdown work scheduled during night-time, Sundays or holidays to meet the Airline Lift Station pumping demands. C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 Rev 10/2018 B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in Technical Specifications 13C. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. Coordinate with the Owner for the operation of any valve, they shall not be opened or closed without a City operator being present. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the lift station and handle any leakage past closed valves, gates or adjacent structures. See also Technical Specification 13C for more detailed information. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 Rev 10/2018 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT’s field office and the Contractor’s field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT’s field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT’s field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2019 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES – FIELD OFFICE NOT REQUIRED A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor’s use, if necessary. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT’s field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor’s and the OPT’s field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi’s Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the “Plan”). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS - N/A A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 3 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2019 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT’s field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT’s field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 4 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No. 22130 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 1 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled “STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS” and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 2 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 8/2019 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, SWPPP, and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 3 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 8/2019 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner’s operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS – N/A A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than “well pointing” to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 4 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 8/2019 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream, the Nueces River. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a “no cost” permit from the Owner’s Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER – N/A A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor’s actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner’s requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine, which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 5 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 8/2019 disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner’s wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 6 Airline Lift Station Upgrades – Project No.: 22130 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 022020 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLFOR UTILITIES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for excavation and backfill for utilities required to complete the project. 2. CONSTRUCTION (1)Unless otherwise specified on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, all pipeand conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (refer to Section 022022 “Trench Safety for Excavations” of the City Standard Specifications). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall not have more than200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specifications. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit,after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable materialis encountered duringthe excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the drawings. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, the Contractor, prior to additional excavation, shall control it. After stable conditions have been achieved, unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height; and to a depth equal to the height of pipe, 6 inches minimum, for pipesless then 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. (2)Shaping of Trench Bottom.The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated on the plans and specifications. 133131 Qbhf!2pg!5 Sfw/!4.36.3126 (3)Dewatering Trench.Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit planing operation to insure a relatively dry (no standing water), firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping, or by installation of well-points, as conditions warrant. Removal of well- points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point).The Contractor shall prevent groundwater from trench or excavation dewatering operations from discharging directlyinto the storm water system. Groundwater from dewatering operations shall be sampled and tested, if applicable, and disposed of, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 022021 "Control of Ground Water". (4)Excavation in Streets.Excavation in streets, together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface, shall be in accordance with drawing detail or as required by other applicable specifications. (5)Removing Abandoned Structures.When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through utility lineswhich are known to be abandoned, these linesshall be cut flush with the sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. (6)Protection of Utilities.The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas lines. Such lines, if broken, shall be restored promptly by the Contractor. When active wastewaterlines are cut in the trenching operations,temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding line of the sewer so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay.The Contractorshall not hold theCity liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because ofutility adjustments orconflicts. (7)Excess Excavated Material.All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed by the Contractor from the jobsite promptly following the completion of work involved. 133131 Qbhf!3pg!5 Sfw/!4.36.3126 (8)Backfill A. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe(Initial Backfill) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipeas applicableshall begranular material as shown on the standard details or as described in the applicable specification section,and shall be free of large hard lumpsor other debris.If indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with cement-stabilized sand backfill as described below.The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench, in layers not to exceedten(10) inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to a density comparable to the adjacent undisturbed soil or as otherwise specified on the plans, but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density.A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12)inches above the top of the pipe. B. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe(Final Backfill) UNPAVED AREAS:The backfill for that portion of trench overone(1) foot above the pipe or conduit not located under pavements (including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains and reinforced concrete storm waterpipe) shall be imported select material or clean, excess material from the excavation meeting the following requirements: Free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, No clay lumps greater than 2" diameter Moisture Content: +/-3% Backfill material shall beplaced in layers not more thanten(10)inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction,and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density, unless otherwise indicated. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill may onlybe allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed10inchesand density shall not be less than 95% Standard Proctor density. A period of not less than twenty-four (24) hours shall elapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four (4) feet of backfill.If jetting is used, the top four (4) feet of backfill shall be placed in layers not more than 10 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density but not less than 95% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698). PAVED AREAS:At utility linecrossings under pavements(including waterlines, gravity wastewater lines, wastewater force mains,and reinforced concrete storm waterpipe), and where otherwise indicated on the drawings, trenches shall be backfilledas shown below: Fromtop of initial backfill (typically twelve (12) inches above top of the pipe)to three (3) feet below bottom ofroad base course, backfill shall be selectmaterialmeeting the requirementsof 022100“Select Material”. 133131 Qbhf!4pg!5 Sfw/!4.36.3126 Asphalt Roadways The upper three(3) feetof trench belowthe road base courseshall be backfilled to the bottom of theroad base course with cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of 2 sacks of Standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sandand compacted to not less than 95% Standard Proctor density. Concrete Roadways The Contractor may elect to backfill the upper three (3) feet of trench belowthe road base coursewith cement stabilized sand as noted above,orin the case of storm water pipe or box installation the Contractor may backfill and compact select material to 98% Standard Proctor density(ASTM D698)following City Standard Specification Section 022100. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, excavation and backfill for utilities, including select material or cement-stabilized sand backfill,shall not be measured and paid for separately. It shall be considered subsidiary to the items for which the excavation and backfill is required. 133131 Qbhf!5pg!5 Sfw/!4.36.3126 SECTION 022022 TRENCH SAFETY FOR EXCAVATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work for providing for worker safety in excavations and trenching operations required to complete the project. 2. REQUIREMENTS Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P - Excavations. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the City or Engineeror Consultant, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City and Engineerand Consultantfrom all damages and costs that may result from failure of methods or equipment used by the Contractor to provide for worker safety. Trenches, as used herein, shall apply to any excavation into which structures, utilities, or sewers are placed regardless of depth. Trench Safety Plan, as used herein, shall apply to all methods and materials used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement of Trench Safety shall be by the linear foot of trench, regardless of depth. Measurement shall be taken along the centerline of thetrench. Measurement for Excavation Safety for UtilityStructuresshall be per each excavation. Excavations include, but are not limited to, those formanholes, vaults, pits and other such structures that are incidental to utility work. Measurement for Excavation Safety for Special Structures shall be per each excavationor by the lump sum for each special structure identified in the Proposal. Paymentshall be at the unit price bid and shall fully compensate the Contractor for all work, equipment, materials, personnel, and incidentals as required to provide for worker safety in trenches and excavations for the project. Revision current for Texas CodeChapter 756 Subchapter C. Trench Safety. 133133 Qbhf!2pg!2 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 022100 SELECT MATERIAL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the use of Select Material to be used to treat designated sections of roadways, embankments, trenches, etc. Select material shall benon-expansive sandy clay (CL) or clayeysand (SC), in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487). Select Material shall meet the following requirements: Free of vegetation, hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris No clay lumps greater than 2” diameter Liquid Limit (L.L.): < 35 Plasticity Index (P.I.) Range: 8 to 20 Moisture Content: asspecifiedin the drawings 2. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers as indicated, not to exceed 10inches loose depth(or 12 inches maximum for sanitary sewer trench backfill per City Standard Detailsfor Sanitary Sewers).Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be compacted toa minimum of 95% Standard Proctor density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. The finished surface of the select material shall conform to the grade and section shown on the drawings. 3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, select material shall not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiary to the appropriate bid item. 133211 Qbhf!2pg!2 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter – TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement,expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural(beam)or compressive (cylinder)testsas required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placementof concrete pavementshall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each typeof cementwill be permitted in any one projectunless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 136731 Qbhf!2pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”, Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”, Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar (Grout) Mortar for repair of concretepavementsshall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deformed bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygenor electric furnace new billet steelin accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 “Reinforcing Steel”. Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cementand aggregateshall be storedand handledin accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 136731 Qbhf!3pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 5.CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements ofCity Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, andshall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be 136731 Qbhf!4pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction MethodDesired SlumpMinimum SlumpMaximum Slump Concrete Pavement (slipformed)1.5 inches1 inch3 inches Concrete Pavement(formed)4inches2.5inches6.5inches NOTE:No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, desiredslump, minimum slump,maximum slump,and the strength requirements of the classof concretefor concrete pavementshall conform to the requirements of Table 1and Table 2and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will casttest beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength (7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement ClassMinimumMinimumMaximum ofFlexural (Beam)CompressiveWater-CementCoarse ConcreteStrengthStrengthRatioAggregate P*450psi (7 days)3200 psi (7 days)5.6gal./sackNo. 2 (1½") 570psi (28 days)4000 psi (28 days)0.50 *5% entrained air 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard SpecificationSection 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. 136731 Qbhf!5pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements ofCity Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall conform to the requirements ofCity Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plantsshall beas specified inCity Standard Specification Section 030020 “Portland Cement Concrete”. 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures".For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s)in-place,will be measured by the square yardor square footfor the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing;furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steeldowels as shown on the plans;furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants,and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shownon the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 136731 Qbhf!6pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 SECTION 026202 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEMS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for hydrostatic testing the completed pressure system. The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, materials, labor, etc., as necessary, except as noted, and accomplish all testing under this specification. 2. MATERIALS Water for filling the line and making tests will be furnished by the Contractor through a standard meter connection. A meter and gauges for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor. A test pump with appropriate connector points as approved by the Water Superintendent for the installation of meter and gauge shall be furnished by the Contractor. The meter shall be directly connected to the main or pipe being tested by the use of copper tubing or an approved reinforced hose. The meter shall be protected against extreme pressures by the use of a one-inch (1") safety relief valve set at the test pressure plus ten pounds per square inch (psi) and furnished bythe Contractor. 3. TEST PROCEDURE Tests shall be made only after completion of backfill as specified, and not until at least thirty-six (36) hours after the last concrete thrust block has been cast.Contractor shall coordinate hydrostatic testing withthe proposed construction sequencing and phasing. Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied. During the filling of the pipe and before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipeline. During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints shall be carefully examined. If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material, the defective material shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material. All pipes shall be subjected to two hydrostatic tests. The first hydrostatic test shall be a two-hour test at a pressure of 150 psi. The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of the first hydrostatic test. The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressure for waterlines or at 50 psi for wastewaterforce mainsand effluent lines. 137313 Qbhf!2pg!3 Sfw/!21.41.3125 The maximum allowable leakage shall be as follows: Ductile Iron Pipe, AWWA C600 ½½ L =S D (P)orL =N D (P) 133,2007,400 Asbestos -Cement Pipe, AWWA C603 ½ L =N D (P) 4,000 PVC Pipe -Uni-bell equation 99 ½ L =N D (P) 7,400 WHERE: L = Maximum Allowable Leakage (gallons/hour) S = Length of Pipe Tested (feet) N = Number of Joints in Tested Line (pipe and fittings) D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (inches) P = Average Test Pressure (psi) If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements, the Contractor shall make the required repairs to the system and the system shall be retested. This procedure shall be repeated until the system complieswith leakage requirements. The cost of each retest shall be $100. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, hydrostatic testing of pressure systems will not be measured for pay, but shall be subsidiaryto the installation of the pressure system component. 137313 Qbhf!3pg!3 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 026206 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all ductile iron pipe and fittings required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151. The interior of pipe and fittings(excluding fittings for wastewater force mains) shall have a shop-applied cement-mortar lining(40 mils thick)in accordance with AWWA C104. The exterior of pipe and fittings shall have a coating of coal tar enamelof approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in AWWA C105. Ductile iron pipe shall be wrapped in two plys of 8-mil polyethylene in accordance with Section 026402"Waterlines" of the City Standard Specifications. 3. FITTINGS All fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with AWWA C153. Fittings shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi for sizes through 12" and 150 psi for 14" and larger sizes, unless shown differently on the drawings. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, Mechanical Joints shall be used. 4. JOINTS Joints for pipe shall be mechanical type or push-on type such as "Tyton Joint", or approved equal; joints for fittings shall be mechanical joints, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C153.Mechanical joints shall be furnished complete with joint material, Cor-ten nuts, Cor-ten bolts, glands and gaskets. When restrained joints are indicated on the drawings, restrained joints for pipe and fittings of 12" diameter and less shall be mechanical joint with retainer gland Series 1100 by EBAA Iron or approved equal, with a minimum of 250 psi rated working pressure. Restrained joints for pipe and fittings over 12" in diameter shall be push on type with a retainer ring as LOK-RING or FLEX-RING by American Ductile Iron Pipe, or TR FLEX by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal. Gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber. An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present shall be supplied. 137317 Qbhf!2pg!4 Sfw/!21.41.3125 5. PIPE Pressure class ductile iron pipe requirements: PressureWallRange of Maximum DiameterClass ThicknessAllowable Depth Cover (inches)(psi)(inches)(feet) -(feet) A-B* 4#3500.2560+ 63500.2530-65 83500.2520-50 10#3500.2615-45 123500.2815-44 14#3000.3013-42 163000.3213-39 183000.3413-36 203000.3613-35 242500.3711-29 24+xxx * Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A = Ground water, or unstable bottom, or quick condition. B =Ideal trench conditions, and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90% Standard Proctor density. # Pipe sizes not typically specified on City projects, but shown for reference. x Requires special evaluation. The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readily identified in the field. 6. CERTIFICATIONS A certification shall accompany each order of pipe and fittings furnished to job site. Certification shall include the following items: indicate that pipe complies with Part 3 of this specification; indicate that fittings and joints comply with Part 4 of this specification (it should be noted that the supplier shall furnish sufficient technical material for the Engineer to determine whether or not push- on joints can comply with the "or equal" clause); and a copy of a laboratory analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. 137317 Qbhf!3pg!4 Sfw/!21.41.3125 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, ductile iron pipe shall be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each sizeof pipe installed.Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Ductile iron fittings shall be measured per each by the type and size, as indicated in the Bid Form. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation and testing of the waterline, together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe and fittings complete in place. 137317 Qbhf!4pg!4 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 026210 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (AWWA C900 and C905 Pressure Pipe for Municipal Water Mains and WastewaterForce Mains) 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all PVC pipe (AWWA C900 and C905) required to complete the project. 2. MATERIAL PVC pipe shall be made of Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with an established hydrostatic-design-basis of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F. 3. DIMENSIONS Pipe shall be manufactured to ductile iron pipe equivalent outside diameters. 4. JOINT Pipe shall have a gasket bell end with a thickened wall section integral with the pipe barrel. The use of solvent weld pipe shall not be allowed. 5. GASKETS Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477 (High Head). 6. PIPE PRESSURE CLASS AND DIMENSION RATIO Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 18 and in accordance with: Pipe SizeDesignation 4" to 12"AWWA C900 Over 12"AWWA C905 7. CAUSE FOR REJECTION Pipe shall be clearly marked in accordance with AWWA Requirements. Unmarked or scratched pipe shall be rejected. 137321 Qbhf!2pg!3 Sfw/!4.36.3126 8. CERTIFICATION The contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification, to include gaskets. Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form, PVC pipe (AWWA C900 or C905) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation, backfillingand testing of the PVC pipe,together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe complete in place, per linear foot. 137321 Qbhf!3pg!3 Sfw/!4.36.3126 SECTION 026402 WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification, in conjunction with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Distribution System Standards, shall govern all work necessary for the installation of all waterline facilities required to complete theproject. 2. MATERIALS Concrete:Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Bedding Sand for Encasement:Bedding sand and initial backfill around the pipe shall be granular materialof low plasticity as indicated on the drawings. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings:See City Standard Specification Section 026206. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe:See City Standard Specification Section 026210. Tapping Sleeves and Valves:See City Standard Specification Section 026409. Gate Valves for Waterlines:See City Standard Specification Section 026411. Fire Hydrants:See City Standard Specification Section 026416. 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS (1)HANDLING MATERIALS a)General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all materials furnished to, or by him, and accepted by him, until it has been incorporated into the completed project. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the siteof the work. b)Unloading and Distribution of Materials at Work Site: Pipe and other materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the job site by the Contractor. Materials shall at all times be handled with care and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken not to scratch PVC pipe. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of PVC pipe. Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place whereit is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the work within 10 days. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. 137513 Qbhf!2pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 c)Storing Materials: Materials that are not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on platforms. The interior of pipes and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. (2)ALIGNMENT AND GRADE a)General: All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. Fittings, valves and hydrants shall be at the required locations with joints centered, spigots home and all valve and hydrant stems plumb. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, in cooperation with the owners of such utility structures. One (1) 20-ft. section of waterline pipe shall be centered over/under gravity wastewater line at all gravity wastewater line crossings. Waterline shall be ductile iron pipe with mechanical joint fittings, in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 026206, wherever new waterline crosses under new gravity wastewater line. Maintain a minimum of six inches (2 feet usual) vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses over a new wastewater line. Maintain a minimum oftwelve inches vertical clearance between outsides of pipes where a new waterline crosses under a new wastewater line. Alternatively, at gravity wastewater line crossings, the proposed PVC waterline may be encased in a 20-ft. joint of ductile iron pipewith a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi that isat leasttwo nominal sizes larger than the carrier pipe. The carrier pipe shall be supported in the casing at five foot (5') intervals with spacers, or shall be filled to the spring line with clean washed sand, graded as shown in the City Standard Water Details. The casing pipe shall be centered under the gravity wastewater lineas indicated on the drawings,and both ends of the casing shall be sealed with cement grout or manufactured seal. b)Deviation from Drawings: No deviation from the line and grade shown on the plans may be made without the written consent of the Engineer. c)Depth of Cover: Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanent improvement, or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be 36 inches.Waterlines 12" and larger located under streets shall have 48inches of cover at all points. 137513 Qbhf!3pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 (3)TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL SeeCity Standard Specification Section 022020, “Excavation and Backfill for Utilities”and applicable City Standard Details for Water. (4)POLYETHYLENE WRAPPING All ductile iron pipe, valves and fittings, except pipe or valves which are laid in encasement pipe or in concrete valve boxes, shall be wrapped in polyethylene. The polyethylene material shall have a thickness of 8 mils and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such manner that all surfaces of pipe, valves and fittings, including joints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. If a single longitudinal lap is made using a double thickness of polyethylene, it shall be lapped a minimum of 18 inches and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap. The polyethylene shall be secured in place with binder twine at not more than 6-foot intervals. If wrapping is applied before the pipe is placed in the trench, then special care shall be taken in handling the pipe so that the wrapping will not be damaged. Care shall also be exercised in backfilling around thepipe and fittings and in blocking fittings so as not to damage the wrapping. Any wrapping that may be damaged shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and so as to form the best protection to the pipes. (5)SAND ENCASEMENT All pipe and fittings that are not enclosed in concrete valve boxes or laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely encased with a minimum of eight inches (8") of sand on the bottom and sides of waterlines smaller than 16 inches in diameter,and twelve inches (12") over the top of the waterline, unlessotherwise indicated on the drawings.This encasement includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased with sand to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. Thesand shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% Standard Proctor density. Provide twelve inches (12") of sand encasement all around the pipe for 16-inch diameter and larger waterlines. Sand shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shall be compacted under, around the side, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to a minimum and as approved by the Engineer. In order to reduce the amount of sand required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of eight inches of sand between the excavation and the pipe (twelve inches for 16-inch diameter and larger waterlines), unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. (6)LOWERING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES IN THE TRENCH a)General: The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe center line with a minimum clearance of eight inches below the pipe bottom and with a like clearance 137513 Qbhf!4pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of the bell hole. The trench shall then be refilled to the proper grade with sand as specified. The placing of the encasing material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil rock or other foreign matter. After final grading in the trench of the encasing material, bell holes shall be excavated at each joint. Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes or other suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. b)Inspection of Pipe and Accessories: The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be replaced. c)Clean Pipe: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean both in andout of the trench at all times during the laying. (7)JOINTING PIPES All pipes shall be made up in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 75% of the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. (8)CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS Temporary thrust blocks or other means of carrying thrust loads generated by hydrostatic testing shall be provided at all ends of lines to be tested. Details of the end connections and method of temporary blocking shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. After satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic testing, this temporary blocking shall be removed so that connections may be made with existing lines. This work is subsidiary to waterline installation and no separate payment will be made for it. Temporary thrust blocks are not allowed for long term use. (9)METAL HARNESS Metal harness, tie rods and clamps, or swivel fittings shall be usedto prevent pipe movement. Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized or otherwise rust proofed, or coated with hot coal tar enamel, then wrapped with two layers of polyethylene wrapping. 137513 Qbhf!5pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 (10)STERILIZATION a)Fittings: Valves, hydrants and fittings shall be stored on timbers and kept clean. Where soil or other substance has come in contact with the water surfaces of the fittings, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with 2% solution of calcium hypochlorite. b)Pipe: As each joint of pipe is laid, the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, shall throw powdered calcium hypochlorite (70%) through the length of the joint (one pound for each 1,680 gallons ofwater to give 50 ppm). When the waterline is complete, and before testing, the waterline shall be slowly filled with water between valves and allowed to stand for 48 hours. After the sterilization period is completed, lines shall be flushed by the Contractor under the direct supervision of a representative of the City Water Department. The Engineer will take sample for testing two hours after refilling. If the sample does not pass State Health Department purification standards, the procedure shall be repeated. The entire procedure shall be coordinated under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer. During the sterilization process, valves shall be operated only under the supervision of the Water Division Superintendent/Engineer.There shall be a base fee of $100 paid by the Contractor to the City for each retest that is required. (11)HYDROSTATIC TESTING WATER SYSTEM See City Standard Specification Section 026202, “Hydrostatic Testingof Pressure Systems”. (12)WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS See Standard Specification Section 026404, “Water Service Lines”. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, waterlines will be measured by the linear foot for each size installed. Payment for waterlines will be made under the appropriate pipe material item and shall include, but not be limited to, trenching, dewatering, bedding, pipe (except for fittings), restraints, temporary thrust blocking, backfill,sterilization,and hydrostatic testing. Payment shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals required to complete the work. 137513 Qbhf!6pg!6 Sfw/!4.36.3126 SECTION 026409 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING VALVES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work and materials required for furnishing and installing tapping sleeves, sleeves and valves required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Tappingsleeves shall have a Class 125 ANSI B16.1 outlet flange of cast iron, ductile iron or stainless steel. Sleeves shall be of ductile iron or 304 or 316 stainless steel. Lugs, bolts, washers and nuts shall be of 304 or 316 stainless steel. Iron sleeves shall be of the mechanical joint or caulked joint type as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, or approved equal. Stainless steel sleeves shall be of the compression gasket type capable of providing full support of the tapped pipe, as manufactured by Ford, Smith Blair, Romac, or approved equal. Gasket materials shall be of material suitable for potable water systems. Tapping sleeves shall be sized for the type and size of pipe to be tapped. The class of asbestos cement pipe that will most likely be encountered in the water will be Class 200 for pipes 6 inches in diameter and smaller, and Class 150 for larger pipes. It should be understood that existing pipes to be tapped may not be of the type of material and/or size that is shown on the drawings. The proper size and type of tapping sleeve shall be provided and installed regardless of what is encountered. Tapping valves shall conform to AWWA Standards and City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". Valve boxes shall be as described in City Standard Specification Section 026411, "Gate Valves for Waterlines". 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Construction methods shall adhere to those set out in City Standard Specification Section 026402 "Waterlines", and City StandardSpecificationSection 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities". 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall be measured on a per each basisfor each size installed.Payment for tapping sleeves and tapping valves shall include, but not be limited to,furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement-stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting;and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentalsrequired to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 13751: Qbhf!2pg!2 Sfw/!4.36.3126 SECTION 026411 GATE VALVES FOR WATERLINES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary to provide and install all gate valves and valve boxes required to complete the project. 2. MATERIALS Gate Valves All valves shall meet the following requirements. Gate valves shall conform to AWWA Standard C515. 1)The gate valves shall be ductile iron resilient wedge (C515)withnon-rising stems. 2)Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for bell ends and flanges. 3)Valves 16 inches and larger shall be furnished for horizontal installation–lay over. 4)Stem seals shall be the O-ring type on valves through 12-inch size. Valves 16 inches and larger may be equipped with stuffing boxes. 5)Valves shall open left (counter clockwise). Valves over 18 inches shall have the main valve stem furnished with a combination hand wheel and operating nut. 6)Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one end mechanical joint. 7)No position indicator will be required. 8)Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit in triplicate, for approval, the following: a)Certified drawings of each size and type of valve 16 inches and larger showing principal dimensions, construction details, and materials used. b)On all size valves, the composition of bronze to be offered for various parts of the valve, complete with minimum tensile strength in psi, the minimum yield strength in psi, and the minimum elongation in 2" per cent. 137522 Qbhf!2pg!3 Sfw/!4.36.3126 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS Gate Valves Gate valves shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. Cast Iron Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. When valves are in the street right-of- way, the top of box shall be set flush with the pavement or surrounding ground. In cultivated areas, the top of box shall be set twelve inches (12") below natural ground and long enough to be raised to natural ground at a future date. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, gate valves for waterlines will be measured as a unit for each gate valve and valve box installed. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing the valves complete in-place including joint materials, cast iron valve box, box extension, cover, concrete collar, and all other related items such as bolting, wrapping, cement- stabilized sand encasing, backfilling and compacting;and shall be full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment and incidentalsrequired to properly install the valves as indicated and specified. 137522 Qbhf!3pg!3 Sfw/!4.36.3126 SECTION 026602 WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work required for the installation of all wastewater force mains required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 2.Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit, for approval, certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Engineer from the pipe and fittings manufacturer(s) that said materials supplied havebeen inspected at the plant and meettherequirements of this specification. 3.It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep on hand extra fittings and pipe, as he may deem necessary to make adjustments due to unknown obstructions, or to replace defective materials without delay to the project. When defective materials are discovered, they shall be immediately marked and removed from job site. 4.All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with trademark of manufacturer, batch number, location of plant, ASTM/ANSI/AWWA designation, size, pressure rating, class/SDR, and pressure rating. 5.Wastewater marking tape shall be continuously applied along the top of the force main, except at joints. The tape shall be greenand 2incheswide and state "Sewer". 3. MATERIALS A.Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings:See City Standard Specification Section 026206. B.PVC Pipe (AWWA C900 or C905):See City Standard Specification Section 026210. C.Concrete:Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000PSIat 28 days. 137713 Qbhf!2pg!8 Sfw/!21.41.3125 Bedding Sand for Encasement:Sand shall beas indicated on the drawings. Non-Standard Fittings:Fittings having non-standard dimensions orfabricatedespecially for this project shall have a minimum pressure rating of250 psi anddurability comparable to that of the system. Drawings andspecificationsfornon-standard fittings shall be submittedforapprovalof the Engineer prior to construction. Couplings and adapters for DIP and PVC connections shall be considered non-standard fittings. Ceramic EpoxyLining for Ductile Iron PipeFittings:When indicated in the drawings or Special Provisions, the interior of DI pipe and fittings shall befurnishedwithafactory applied ceramic epoxylining. Lining material shall beProtecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy Lining, of40 mils nominaldrythickness.Theepoxyshall be fused to the interior of the pipe by heat, forming a securely bonded lining. Operating Limits:Thelining shall have the capability of withstanding operating temperaturesfrom0º F to 170º F and withstanding sewage with a minimum pH of 4.0. Application:The interior surface of each pipeshallbeblast-cleaned toremove high temperature oxide film and to form an anchor pattern over the entiresurface prior to heating and lining.Epoxylining is to cover the inner surface of the pipe, extending from the plain or beveled end to the rear of the gasket socket. Adhesion:Pipe shall be checked at the point of manufacture to assurebondofthe lining tothepipe. Any indication of separation of lining from pipe is cause for rejection. Entrapped Material:Any sizeable protrusion in the lining,obviouslycausedby lining over foreign materials, shall be cause for rejection. Separations:Liningswhich have separations caused during the lining operation shall be rejected. Damages to Lining:Injurious mechanical damage,suchas chuck marks and gouges,extending to bare metal are not acceptable. The pipe having sucha defect shall be rejected. Lining Thickness:Linings of nominal40mil thickness shall generally equal or exceed 40 mil throughout thepipe. At pipe ends, lining thickness may taper for a distanceof4 inchesfromtheends, to a minimum of20 mil thickness. However, the lining shall not deviate by more than 5 mil from the 40milnominalthicknessas required through the pipe. The lining thickness of each pipe and fitting shall be taken at the point of manufacture usinga general electric magnetic dry film thicknessdevice,digitalcoating thickness gauge, Positector2000, or approved 137713 Qbhf!3!pg!8! Sfw/!21.41.3125 equal. Pipe and/or fittings with a lining thickness less than the minimum specified shall be rejected. 8.Bell and Plain End Overcoat:The bell socket and the last 2inchesof the plain end of each pipe shall be coated on the inside and outside with a factory applied mastic or epoxy coating. This coating shall be a minimum of 10 mil thickness and shall be Koppers 300M, Industrial Ruff Stuff, Roskote Mastic A-938, or equal. 9.Pinholes and/or Holidays:The inside surface of each pipe or fitting shall be free of pinholes, holiday discontinuities and any blister type surface imperfections. The manufacturer shall check each pipe andfitting for holidays at the point of manufacture with a high voltage holiday detection device. Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, or approved equal. Testing shall be conducted at the voltage as calculated in Section 3: Testing and Voltages of the "Recommended Practice for High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation" as published by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) Technical Practices Committee. All actual holiday testing procedures shall conform to NACE standard RP-02-74 and American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Designation: G62- (latest)"Standard Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings." No holidays, misses or skips larger than a pinhole will be accepted for repair. A maximum of 6 holidays, as defined in ASTM Standard G62 and as determined by the detection test described above, on any one standard pipe length, fitting or special may be repaired with epoxy. 10.Independent Testing Laboratory Representation:All testing as specified herein including the lining thickness test and the holiday test shall be witnessed by a representative from an approved independent testing laboratory. The independent laboratory shall be a member of the American Council of Independent Laboratories. Manufacturer must submit for approval by the City the name of the testing laboratory and actual qualifications of actual representative that will witness the testing. The manufacturer shall furnish three (3) copies of report by independent testing laboratory depicting results of all testing witnessed by the independent laboratory. 11.Field Testing:Each pipe and fitting issubject to inspection in the field by the City for conformance to these specifications prior to installation. Any defects as specified herein with any pipe or fittings shall be grounds for rejection. 12.Sealing Cut Ends and Repairing Field Damaged Areas:Remove burrs from field cut ends and smooth out edge of epoxy lining. Remove all traces of oil or lubricant used during field cutting operation. All areas of loose lining associated with the cutting operation shall be removed and the exposed metal cleaned by sanding or scraping. For larger areas, roughen the bare pipe surface with a small chisel to provide an anchor pattern for the epoxy. The epoxy lining shall be "stripped" back by chiseling, cutting or scraping about 1" to 2" into well adhered 137713 Qbhf!4pg!8 Sfw/!21.41.3125 lined area before patching. After removal of loose lining and dirt, the area to be patched shall be "scratched" or "gouged" to offer an anchor pattern for the epoxy. Include an overlap of 1" to 2" of roughened epoxy lining in the area to be epoxy coated. The roughening shall be done with a rough grade emery paper (40 grit), rasp, or small chisel. Avoid honing, buffing, or wire brushing since these tend to make surface to be repaired too smooth. With the area to be sealed or repaired absolutely clean and suitably "roughened," apply a thick coat of two-part coal tar epoxy. The detailed mixing and application procedure for the epoxy shall follow the epoxy manufacturer's instructions. This heavy coat of epoxy shall be "worked" into the scratched surface by brushing. The Contractor shall maintain a supply of epoxy on the job site as required to seal cut ends and repair damaged pipe when encountered. Epoxy shall be of the type recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 13.Warranty:A five year warranty shall be furnished by the manufacturer on the serviceability of the lining. This warranty shall include, but not be limited to the statement, at any time up to the end of the fifth year from the date of pipe shipment: a.The lining shall not have disbound. b.The lining shall not have suffered any appreciable underfilm migration. c.The interior pipe metal, at points of pinholes or holidays, shall not have suffered detrimental deterioration. d.The lining shall have maintained its smooth surface characteristics. Contractor and/or manufacturer shall not make any exemption or exception to the above stated conditions or warranty within the limits as stated in this specification section. 14.Certification:The manufacturer shall furnish notarized certificates of compliance stating that the lining conforms to all requirements of these specifications. 4. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 4.1 HANDLINGAND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A.General:The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe storage of all materials furnished to or by him and accepted by him until the materials havebeen incorporated in the completed project. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will be rejected, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. 137713 Qbhf!5pg!8 Sfw/!21.41.3125 B.Unloading and Distribution of Materials at Work Site:Pipe and other materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery, hauled to, and distributed at the job site by the Contractor. Materials shall at all times be handled with care and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken not to scratch PVC pipe. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of PVC pipe. Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it is to be incorporated into the work within ten days. The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience to the public. C.Storing Materials:Materials that are not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on platforms. The interior of pipes and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. 4.2 INSTALLATION A.Alignment and Grade:All pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structures encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, in cooperation with the owners of such utility structures. Force Mains shall be laid with no less than 36 inches ofcover, unless indicated otherwise in the drawings. Greater depths will be permitted when required to avoid conflicts with existing structures. Lines shall be laid to grade which permit entrapped air to flow to a high point for release through an air release valve as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall investigate well in advance of pipe laying for conflicts which may necessitate the readjustment of planned line and grade. B.Trench Excavation and Backfill:See City StandardSpecification Section 022020 "Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers",and drawings. C.Force Main Connection to Existing Manhole:Where new force main is connected to existing manhole, the manhole shall be prepared to receive the proposed force main and restored after connection. Manhole inverts shall be repaved as necessary to provide a smooth flowing system. D.Polyethylene Encasement:All metallic pipe,valves and fittings, except those 137713 Qbhf!6pg!8 Sfw/!21.41.3125 which occur in encasement pipe or in concrete valve boxes, shall be wrapped in polyethylene. The polyethylene material shall have a thickness of 8 mils and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such amanner that all surfaces of pipe valves and fittings, including joints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene. If a single longitudinal lap is madeusing a double thickness of polyethylene, it shall be lapped a minimum of 18 inches and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap. The polyethylene shall be secured in place with binder twine at not more than 6-foot intervals. If wrapping is applied before the pipe is placed in the trench, then special care shall be taken in handling the pipe so that the wrapping will not be damaged. Care shall also be exercised in backfilling around the pipe and fittings and in blocking fittings so as not to damage the wrapping. Any wrapping that may be damaged shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and so as to form the best protection to the pipes. E.Sand Encasement:Sand shall be granular soil of low plasticity such that30% minimumpassesa #4 sieve and no more than 20 % passesa #200 sieve, and the plasticity index (PI) shall not exceed 10. Soils with a Unified Classification of SW and SP, or AASHTO Classification of A3 and some A2 soil shall be required. F.Pre-PlacementInspection:Prior to lowering into trench, all pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipeprior to lowering into trench. Pipe shall be kept clean at all times during the laying. G.Jointing Pipe and Fittings:All pipes and fittings shall be made up in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 75% of the maximum amount recommended by the manufacturer. H.Concrete Thrust Blocks: Temporary thrust blocks or other means of carrying thrust loads generated by hydrostatic testing shall be provided at all ends of lines to be tested. Details of the end connections and method of temporary blocking shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. After satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic test, this temporary blocking shall be removed so that connections may be made with existing lines. This work is subsidiary and no separate payment will be made for it. I.Restrained Joints and Fittings:Metal harness, tie rods and clamps or restrained fittings shall be used to prevent movement when soil conditions will not withstand thrust blocking. Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized or otherwise rust-proofed or coated with hot coal tar enamel then wrapped with two layers of polyethylene wrapping. 137713 Qbhf!7!pg!8! Sfw/!21.41.3125 SeeCityStandard Specification Section 026202, Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Systems. 5.MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified in the Bid Form,wastewater force mains will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline of pipe. Payment shall include, but not be limited to, trenching, dewatering, pipe, bedding,thrust blocks, fittings,restraints and backfill, and shall be full compensation for all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals required to complete the work at the unit price bid. 137713 Qbhf!8!pg!8! Sfw/!21.41.3125 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 027604 DISPOSAL OF WASTE FROM WASTEWATER CLEANING OPERATIONS 1. SCOPE: This specification governs all work required for disposal of waste from wastewatercleaning operations required to complete the project. 2. METHODS: Grit, rubble, dislodged bricks and other such inorganic waste that is removed during cleaning shall not be allowed to continue down stream of the operation. Organic solids that remain in suspension would be allowed to continue downstream through the wastewatersystem. A weir or other suitable trap shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor for the collection of such waste. This material shall be de-watered and delivered by the Contractor to a facility that is authorized to receive it. If this material is free of organic sludge and is sufficiently de-watered to pass the paint filter test, it would be acceptable for disposal at the Elliott Sanitary Landfill subject to prior approval of the facility and the associated disposal fees. The Contractor has the option of using the City’s de-watering facilities. The City has six drying beds, each with a 1-foot high containment wall each with an area of about 2,300 square feet. These drying beds are at the Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant, 1541 Saratoga. The Contractor would be required to haul and handle the material to, at and from the facility as well as the restoration of drying beds. Restoration of the drying beds includes the removal of all the de- watered material and the replacement of the existing sand bed with new sand. All work required within the treatment plant, including the replacement of sand shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Plant Supervisor. The use of the drying beds would be subject to prior approval of the facility and theassociated de-watering fees. If the City’s facilities are used for de-watering or disposal of waste, the Contractor shall be responsible for making contact with the appropriate Solid Waste or Wastewater Officials or both, making all arrangements for the use of City facilities, scheduling of delivery and pickup, etc. Materials and handling operations shall meet the requirements set forth by said Officials. Failure to meet these requirements shall be cause for rejection of the materials by either the landfill or the treatment plant operations. Proper disposal of this waste shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written documentation of the proper disposal of this waste. 3. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT: Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, this work shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 138715 Qbhf!2!pg!2 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 030020 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the materials used; for the storing and handling of materials; and for the proportioning and mixing of concrete for culverts, manholes, inlets, curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways, curb ramps, headwalls and wingwalls, riprap, and incidental concrete construction. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water, proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, II or III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type Iand II cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram (Wagner Turbidimeter – TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). For concrete piling, the above limit on specific surface area is waived for Type II cement only. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer, with each shipment, a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement expressed in square centimeters per gram. For cement strength requirements, either the flexural or compressive test may be used. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. Different types of cement may be used in the same structure, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brandof each type will be permitted in any one structure unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 141131 Qbhf!2pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as SO 4. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. Tests shall be made in accordance with the "Method of Test for Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete" (AASHTO Method T26), except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. (3) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more than 1.0 percent by weight of shale, nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-413-A. It shall havea wear of not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, coarse aggregate will be subjected to five cycles of the soundness test in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-411-A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent when sodium sulfate is used, or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used. Permissible sizes of aggregate shall be governed by Table 4 and Table 1, except that when exposed aggregate surfaces are required, coarse aggregate gradation will be as specified on the plans. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. 141131 Qbhf!3pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 TABLE 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal2-½21-½13/41/23/8 Grade No.SizeIn.In.In.In.In.In.In.No. 4No. 8 15 12 in.00 to60 to95 to to 2080100 50 070 2 (467)*1-½ in.030 to95 to toto 65100 590 040 4 (57)*1 in.090 to95 to toto 100100 575 83/8 in.00 to35 to90 to 580100 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. The aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TxDOT Test Method Tex-406-A) plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed one percent, or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities (TxDOT Test Method Tex-408-A), it shall not show a color darker than standard. The fine aggregate shall produce a mortar having a tensile strength equal to or greater than that of Ottawa sand mortar when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-317-D. Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand for slab concrete subject to direct traffic, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 28 percent by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-612-J. When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate or combination of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. 141131 Qbhf!4pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 TABLE 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No.3/8 In.No. 4No. 8No. 16No. 30No. 50No. 100No. 200 100 to 50 to 2015 to 5035 to 7570 to 9090 to 10097 to 100 NOTE 1:Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2:Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Test Method Tex-203-F). The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the plans, whichever is greater. For concrete Classes ‘A’ and ‘C’, the fineness modulus as defined below for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10. The fineness modulus will be determined by addingthe percentages by weight retained on the following sieves, and dividing by 100; Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar (Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required bythe Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the following requirements: A "water-reducing, retarding admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and will retard the initial set of the concrete. A "water-reducing admixture" is defined as a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a 141131 Qbhf!5pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 given consistency. (a)Retarding and Water-Reducing Admixtures. The admixture shall meet the requirements for Type A and Type D admixture as specified in ASTM Designation: C494, modified as follows: (1)The water-reducing retarder shall retard the initial set of the concrete a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of 4 hours, at a specified dosage rate, at a temperature of 90°F. (2)The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (3)Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced and test concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. (b)Air-Entraining Admixture. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C260, modified as follows: (1)The cement used in any series of tests shall be either the cement proposed for specific work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill. (2)Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the minimum relative durability factor shall be 80. The air-entraining admixture used in the referenced concrete shall be neutralized Vinsol resin. 3. STORAGE OF CEMENT All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. The Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering. 4. STORAGE OF AGGREGATE The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 141131 Qbhf!6pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 When conditions require the use of two or more sizesof aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least 24 hours to reduce the free moisture content. 5. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS The measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall beby weight. The fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and mineral filler shall be weighed separately. Where bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed separately, but batch weighing of sacked cement will not be required. Where sacked cement is used, the quantities of material per batch shall be based upon using full bags of cement. Batches involving the use of fractional bags will not be permitted. Allowance shall be made for the water content in the aggregates. Bags of cement varying more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds may be rejected, and when the average weight per bag in any shipment, as determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random, is less than the net weight specified, the entire shipment may be rejected. If the shipment is accepted, the Engineer will adjust the concrete mix to a net weight per bag fixed by an average of all individual weights which are less than the average weight determined from the total number weighed. 6. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, using a coarse aggregate factor acceptable to the Engineer, for the class(es) of concrete specified. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with the THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that 141131 Qbhf!7pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregates. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 4, the Contractor may use an approved water-reducing or retarding admixture, or he shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until the redesign is checked. Water-reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. When water-reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. Entrained air will be required in accordance with Table 4. The concrete shall be designed to entrain 5 percent air when Grade 2 coarse aggregate is used and 6 percent whenGrade 3 coarse aggregate is used. Concrete as placed in the structure shall contain the proper amount as required above with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percentage points. Occasional variations beyond this tolerance will not be cause for rejection.When the quantity of entrained air is found to be above 7 percent with Grade 2 coarse aggregate or above 8 percent for Grade 3 coarse aggregate, additional test beams or cylinders will be made. If these beams or cylinders pass the minimum flexural or compressive requirements, the concrete will not be rejected because of the variation in air content. 7. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor mayuse, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements will be as specified in Table 3. 141131 Qbhf!8pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 TABLE 3 Slump Requirements Concrete DesignationDesired SlumpMax. Slump Structural Concrete: (1)Thin-Walled Sections (9" or less)4 inches5 inches (2)Slabs, Caps, Columns, Piers, Wall Sections over 9", etc.3 inches4 inches Underwater or Seal Concrete5 inches6 inches Riprap, Curb, Gutter and Other Miscellaneous Concrete2.5 inches4 inches NOTE:No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 8. QUALITY OF CONCRETE General The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements of Table 3 and Table 4 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer or his designated representative will cast test cylinders or beams as a check on the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete actually placed.Test cylinders must be picked up by the testing labwithin 24 hours. A test shall be defined as the average of the breaking strength of two cylinders or two beams, as the case may be. Specimens will be tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex-418-A or Tex-420-A. Test beams or cylinders will be required as specified in the contract documents. For small placements on structures such as manholes, inlets, culverts, wingwalls, etc., the Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of one for each 25 cubic yards placed over a several day period. All test specimens, beams or cylinders, representing tests for removal of forms and/or falsework shall be cured using the same methods, and under the same conditions as the concrete represented. "Design Strength" beams and cylinders shall be cured in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in THD Bulletin C-11 for the purpose of curing test specimens. Provision shall be made to maintain the water in the curing tank at temperatures between 70°F and 90°F. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight-day compressive tests, job control will be by seven-day compressive tests which are shown to provide the required twenty-eight-day strength, based on results from trial batches. If the required seven-day strength is not secured with the 141131 Qbhf!9pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 cement specified in Table 4, changes in the batch design will be made. TABLE 4 Classes of Concrete Minimum Class CompressiveMin. BeamMaximumCoarse ofSacks CementStrength (f'c)StrengthWater-CementAggregate Concreteper C.Y. (min.)28-Day(psi)7-Day (psi)Ratio (gal/sack)No. A*5.03000500***6.52-4-8**** B*4.525004178.02-4-8**** C*6.03600600***6.01-2-4** D6.030005007.02-4 S6.540005705.02-4 *Entrained Air (slabs, piers and bent concrete). **Grade 1 Coarse Aggregate may be used in foundation only (except cased drilled shafts). ***When Type II Cement is used with Class C Concrete, the 7-day beam break requirement will be 550 psi; with Class A Concrete, the minimum 7-day beam break requirement will be 460 psi. ****Permission to use Grade 8 Aggregate must have prior approval of the Engineer. 9. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Retamping of concrete will not be permitted. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed, the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. 10. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work underway without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. The mixing shall be done in a batchmixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform 141131 Qbhf!:pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 distribution of the material throughout the mass. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than 1 minute for mixers of one cubic yard or less capacity plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. The absolute volume of the concretebatch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. The concrete mixer shall be equipped with an automatic timing device which is put into operation when the skip is raised to its full height and dumping. This device shall lock the discharging mechanism and prevent emptying of the mixer until all the materials have been mixed together for the minimum time required, and it shall ring a bell after the specified time of mixing has elapsed. The water tank shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately, and when the tank starts to discharge, the inlet supply shall cut off automatically. Whenever a concrete mixer is not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Engineer and a suitable mixer provided by the Contractor. Pick-up and thro-over blades in the drum of the mixerwhich are worn down more than 10 percent in depth shall be repaired or replaced withnew blades. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements stated above, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site in non-agitating equipment. 11. READY-MIX PLANTS A. General. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirement of the governing specification sections, and concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification sections shall not 141131 Qbhf!21pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 be placed in the structure or pavement. Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. (1)Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at truck agitator or truck mixer agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2)Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the following provisions: (a)Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters which will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revolutions. (b)Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mixthe concrete at the plant not less than 50 nor more than 70 revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. (3)Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non-agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. B. Equipment. (1)Batching Plant. The batching plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper entirely free and independent of that used for weighing the aggregates. (2)Mixers and Agitators. (a)General: Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. Mixers and agitators shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades, and any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced with new in 141131 Qbhf!22pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 accordance with the manufacturer's design and arrangement for that particular unit when any part or section is worn as much as 10 percent below the original height of the manufacturer's design. (b)Stationary Mixers: These shall conform to the requirements of Article "Mixing and Mixing Equipment". Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered as a stationary mixer. (c)Truck Mixers: In addition, truck mixers shall comply with the following requirements: An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately gauging the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum.Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified revolutions per minute (rpm) will not require a separate engine. All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum, as specified in Article 11. A. above, may be readily verified. The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. Each until shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. (d)Agitators: Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. C. Operation of Plant and Equipment. Delivery of ready-mixed concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Engineer for continuous placement. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute plus 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. 141131 Qbhf!23pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one- fourth of the specified mixing time. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted inthis Article, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed 63 percent of the total volume of the drum. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed 80 percent of the drum volume. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one sack cement, three parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck, and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix plants. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Engineer and under his supervision. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed as specified below for water added at the job site. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed except that when water is added at the job site, 25 revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. 12. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete of the various classifications which will constitute the completed and accepted structure(s) in-place will be measured by the cubic yard, per each, square foot, square yard or linear foot, as the case may be. Measurement will be as shown on the drawings and/or in the Bid Form. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 141131 Qbhf!24pg!24 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 032020 REINFORCING STEEL 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size and quantity designated on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 2. MATERIALS Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grades 60 or75, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace new billet steel. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for straight bars only. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grade 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicableASTM Specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the plans, and shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric furnace. Bars shall be rolled from billets reduced from ingots and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 306, Grade 65 minimum (references to ASTM Designation: A 29is voided). Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 615, or ASTM Designation: A 615, Grade 60, except for deformations. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM Designation: A 185. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded. 143131 Qbhf!2pg!7 Sfw/!21.41.3125 The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification are as follows: NominalWeight per Bar SizeDiameter,Nominal Area,Linear Foot, NumberIn.Sq. In.Pounds 20.2500.050.167 30.3750.110.376 40.5000.200.668 50.6250.311.043 60.7500.441.502 70.8750.602.044 81.0000.792.670 91.1281.003.400 101.2701.274.303 111.4101.565.313 141.6932.257.6 182.2574.0013.60 Smooth round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars larger thanNo. 4 shall be designated by diameter in inches. When wire is ordered by gauge numbers, the following relation between gauge number and diameter, in inches, shall apply unless otherwise specified: EquivalentEquivalent GaugeDiameter,GaugeDiameter, NumberInchesNumberInches 00.306580.1620 10.283090.1483 20.2625100.1350 30.2437110.1205 40.2253120.1055 50.2070130.0915 60.1920140.0800 70.1770 143131 Qbhf!3pg!7 Sfw/!21.41.3125 3. BENDING The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the plans. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter (d), shall be as follows: Bends of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend: Grade 60 #3, #4, #54d #6, #7, #85d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above: Grade 60Grade 75 #3 thru #86d-- #9, #108d-- #118d8d #14, #1810d-- 143131 Qbhf!4pg!7 Sfw/!21.41.3125 4. TOLERANCES Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be within 3 percent of specifiedor as follows: 5. STORING Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports, and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross- sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 6. SPLICES No splicing of bars, except when provided on the plans or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Engineer. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars shallbe staggered a minimum of two splice lengths. 143131 Qbhf!5pg!7 Sfw/!21.41.3125 TABLE 1 Minimum Lap Requirements LapUncoatedCoated Lap in inches>40d60d Where: d = bar diameter in inches Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the plans or as permitted herein. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the drawings andindustrystandards.All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. For box culvert extensions with less than one foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a 20-diameter lap with the new bars. For box culvert extensions with more than one foot of fill, a minimum of 6 inches lap will be required. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of 12 inches. 7. PLACING Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-twelfth of the spacing between bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than one-quarter inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inchor as otherwise shown on the plans. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensionmembers and be attached securely thereto. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on the project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, alternate intersections only need be tied. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Precast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Engineer and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or 143131 Qbhf!6pg!7 Sfw/!21.41.3125 cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. Reinforcement shall be supported and tied in such mannerthat a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with the first paragraph of Article 7 of this specification. Mats of wire fabric shall overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be fastened securely at the ends and edges. No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, reinforcing steel is considered subsidiary to the various items shown in the Bid Formand shall not be measured and paid for as a separate item. 143131 Qbhf!7pg!7 Sfw/!21.41.3125 SECTION 038000 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for construction of all types of structures involving the use of structural concrete, except where the requirements are waived or revised by other governing specifications. All concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with the design requirements and details shown on the plans; in conformity with the pertinent provisions of the items contracted for; the incidental specifications referred to; and in conformity with the requirements herein. 2. MATERIALS (1)Concrete. All concrete shall conform to the provisions of City Standard Specification Section 030020"Portland Cement Concrete". The class of concrete for each type of structure or unit shall be as specified on the plans or by pertinent governing specifications. (2)Expansion Joint Material. (a)Preformed Fiber Material. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the plans. The material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the plans: 1.Preformed Bituminous Fiber Materialsshall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)". 2.Preformed Non-Bituminous Fiber Materialshall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1751 "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)", except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density and water absorption shall be voided. 3.Redwood. (b)Joint Sealing Materials. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements. The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when exposedto low temperatures. 149111 Qbhf!2pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 1.Class 1-a.(Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Extruded Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 24 hours. For performance requirements see under 2.(2)(b)2. below. 2.Class 1-b.(Two-Component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold-Pourable, Self-Leveling Type). Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 degrees F ± 3 degrees F in a maximum of 3 hours. Performance Requirements: Class 1-a and Class 1-b joint materials, when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and the following requirements: It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60 degrees F. Penetration, 77º F.: 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max.,cm..................0.90 Bond and Extension 75%, Oº F, 5 cycles: Dry Concrete Blocks............................Pass WetConcrete Blocks............................Pass Steel Blocks...(Primed if specified by manuf.).Pass Flow at 200º F.................................None Water Content % by weight, max.................5.0 Resilience: Original sample min. % (cured).................50 Oven aged at 158º F min. % ....................50 For Class 1-a Material Only: Cold Flow (10 min.)............................None (c)Asphalt Board. Asphalt Board shall consist of two liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper, filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. Boards shall be smooth, flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-524-C, the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch in three and one-half inches (1" in 3½"). (d)Rebonded Neoprene Filler. Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed- cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness, of the dimensions shown on plans. Filler material shall have the following physical properties and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: D1752 “Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction”, Type 1, where applicable: 149111 Qbhf!3pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 PROPERTYMETHODREQUIREMENT ColorASTM D1752, Type 1Black 3 DensityASTM D1752, Type 140 lb./ftMin. RecoveryASTM D1752, Type 190% Min. CompressionASTM D1752, Type 150 to 500 psi ExtrusionASTM D1752, Type 10.25 inch Max. Tensile StrengthASTM D1752, Type 120 psi Min. Elongation75% Min. The manufacturers shall furnish the Engineer with certified test results as to compliance with the above requirements and a 12 inch x 12 inch x 1 inch sample from the shipment for approval. (3)Curing Materials. (a)Membrane curing materials shall comply with ASTM Designation: C 309 "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", Type 1 clear or translucent, or Type 2 white-pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash-point of 80 degrees F when tested by the "Pensky-Martin Closed Cup Method". It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 degrees F. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the rate of coverage specified herein, be dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours, and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples maybe correlated. The water retention test shall be in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-219-F. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the 149111 Qbhf!4pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 following: 24 hours after application............2 percent 72 hours after application............4 percent Type 1 (Resin Base Only) curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. (b)Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 1 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. EXPANSION JOINTS Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the plans. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. Where preformed fiber joint material is used, it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out.The top one inch (1”) of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 4. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. The term “monolithic placement” shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Engineer, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similar locations. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the plans. The 149111 Qbhf!5pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 material will be specified on the plans without referenced to joint type. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material, and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 5. FORMS (1)General. Except where otherwise specified, formsmay be of either timber or metal. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Engineer. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as specified.Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. For job fabricated forms, an additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used by the Texas Department of Transportation for the design of structures. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. The maximum working load shall include a live load of 35 pounds per square foot of horizontal form surface, and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight, rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports, and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Forms shall be maintained in a manner that will prevent warping and shrinkage. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth of an inch (1/16”). Deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram shall be taken into account in the setting of slab forms. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such work is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 149111 Qbhf!6pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 (2)Timber Forms. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one side and two edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch in thickness, with no form lining required. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the spanbetween the supporting studs or joists. Plywood used for forming surfaces that remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior, of the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards and Technology, latest edition. Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. Any lumber which is split, warped, bulged, marred, or has defects that will produce inferior work, shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. Wales shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least 4 feet on each side of joints to provide continuity. A row of wales shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical, i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of agrade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-quarter inch (3/4”) on the sides. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 149111 Qbhf!7pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the concrete surface. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the face of the concrete. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. Prior to placing concrete, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. Care shall be exercised to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. (3)Metal Forms. The foregoing requirements for timber forms regarding design, mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse and wetting shall also apply tometal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall becountersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 6. PLACING REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be placed carefully and accurately and rigidly supported as provided in the City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Reinforcing steel supports shall not be welded to I-beams or girders. 7. PLACING CONCRETE-GENERAL The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50 degrees F. 149111 Qbhf!8pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for finishing, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum amount. Fog spray for this purpose may be applied with hand operated fogging equipment. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete TemperatureMaximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete: Above 80 degrees F15 minutes Up to 80 degrees F30 minutes Agitated Concrete: Above 90 degrees F45 minutes 75 degrees F to 90 degrees F60 minutes 35 degrees F to 74 degrees F90 minutes The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the above temperature-time maximums by 30 minutes for direct traffic culverts, and one hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed 30 minutes for non-agitated concrete. Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approvalof the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement, and other preparations. Concrete shall not be placed inany unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done duringdaylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finished work. If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started, the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. In case of drop in temperature, the provisions set forth in Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. The placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. 149111 Qbhf!9pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than 5 feet, except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Engineer. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. Chutes, troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clear of the concrete. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. Thecoarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. Concreteshall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than 36 inches in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. Not more than one hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete. Unauthorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one continuous operation. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. Openings in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. At least one stand-by vibrator shall be 149111 Qbhf!:pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 provided for emergency use in addition to thoserequired for placement. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at points 18 to 30 inches apart, and slowly withdrawn. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation, and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced, but not long enough to cause segregation. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary, to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a plant located off the structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four (4) full curing days. If carts are used, timber planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. After concrete has attained its initial set, at least one (1) curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, when permitted, shall be limited to quantities and distribution that will not induce excessive stresses. 8. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER (1)Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 35 degrees F. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32 degrees F. Aggregates shall be free from ice, frost and frozen lumps. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature, the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: The water temperature shall not exceed 180 degrees F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50 degrees F and 85 degrees F before introduction of the cement. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: (a)The temperature of slab concrete of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50degreesF or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40degreesF for an additional 72 hours. 149111 Qbhf!21pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 (b)The temperature at the surface of all concrete in piers, culverts walls, retaining walls, parapets, wingwalls, bottoms of slabs, and other similar formed concrete shall be maintained at 40 degrees F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. (c)The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 32degreesF for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. Curing as specified under Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. Whenimpending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before permission is granted to begin placement. Sufficient extra test specimenswill be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed, prior to form removal and acceptance. (2)Precast Concrete. A fabricating plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities, may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: (a)The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one hour after the concrete is placed. This shall not be construed to be one hour after the last concrete is placed, but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one hour. (b)Steam heat shall keep the air surrounding the concrete between 50degreesF and 85 degreesF for a minimum of three hours prior to beginning the temperature rise which is required for steam curing. (c)For fabricating plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products, the requirements of the Article "Curing Concrete" of this specification shall apply. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission given by the Engineer for placing concrete during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 149111 Qbhf!22pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 9. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the plans or with written permission by the Engineer. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie,closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. The concrete surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. The tremie shall consist of a water-tight tube 14 inches or less in diameter. It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. 10. PLACING CONCRETE IN BOX CULVERTS In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the plans. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 feet in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more thantwo (2) hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finishedas specified for roadway slabs in Article "Finish of Roadway Slabs". Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonably smooth float finish. 11. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS AND SUBSTRUCTURE Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal concrete course cleaned. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 149111 Qbhf!23pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing; in which case, measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions shown on the plans. 12.TREATMENT AND FINISHING OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES EXCEPT ROADWAY SLABS All unformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float.Sidewalks shall be given a wood float or broom finish, or may be striped with a brush, as specified by the Engineer. Other surfaces shall be wood float finished and striped with a fine brush leaving a fine- grained texture. 13. FINISH OF ROADWAY SLABS As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working, the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screeded, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of alllow spots. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. The screeds shall be provided with a metal edge. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. The surface of the concrete shall be screeded a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. If necessary, the screeded surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled 10-foot straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. All high spots shall be removed and all depressions over one-sixteenth inch (1/16”) in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. Surface Texturing. Perform surfacetexturing using a eithercarpet drag ormetal tiningas indicated on the drawings. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag 149111 Qbhf!24pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal-tine texture finish is required using a tining machine unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal-tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal-tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depthof 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab andjoints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a broom or burlap drag finish. The grooves of these finishes shall be parallel to the structure centerline. It is the intent that the average texture depth resulting from the number of tests directed by the Engineer be not less than 0.035 inch with a minimum texture depth of 0.030 inch for any one test when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex-436-A. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. After the concrete has attained its final set, the roadway surface shall be tested with a standard 10- foot straightedge. The straightedge shall be placed parallel to the centerline of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch high spots. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch (1/8”), making proper allowances for camber, vertical curvature and surface texture. Occasional variations, not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16”) will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Engineer it will not affect the riding qualities. When directed by the Engineer, irregularities exceeding the above requirements shall be corrected. In all roadway slab finishing operations, camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 14. CURING CONCRETE The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts; and shall have the proposed methods, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. Inadequate curing and/or facilities, therefore, shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken.All concrete shall be cured for a period of four (4) curing days except as noted herein. 149111 Qbhf!25pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 EXCEPTIONS TO 4-DAY CURING DescriptionRequired Curing Upper Surfaces of Bridge Slabs and8 curing days (Type I or III) cement Top Slabs of Direct Traffic Culverts10 curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed)6 curing days When the air temperature is expected to drop below 35degreesF, the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above 50degreesF for at least 19 hours (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete above 40degreesF for the entire 24 hours). The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 1 and the following requirements for each method of curing. (1)Form Curing. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. (2)Water Curing. All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. The water used for curing shall meet the requirements for concrete mixing water as specified in the specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". Seawater will not be permitted. Water which stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. (a)Wet Mat. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. (See Article, "Placing Concrete" of this specification.) Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock may be placed on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection prior to the application of the cotton mats which may be placed dry and wetted down after placement. The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats and anchored positively to the forms or to the ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. (b)Water Spray. This curing method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keep all unformed surfaces continuously wet. (c)Ponding. This curing method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two inches (2”) of clean granular material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch 149111 Qbhf!26pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 (1”) depth of water. Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. (3)Membrane Curing. This consists of curing concrete pavement, concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement-stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the plans by impervious membrane method. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the plans, either Type 1-D or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1-D (Resin Base Only) will be required for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. TABLE 1 REQUIREDPERMITTED MEMBRANEMEMBRANE STRUCTURE UNITWATERFORWATER FOR DESCRIPTIONFORINTERIMFORINTERIM CURINGCURINGCURINGCURING 1Top slabs of direct traffic culvertsXX 2Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.). X Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) 3Concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians,X*X* islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. 4All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, X*X* manholes, retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to wateror membrane curing for items 3 and 4. 149111 Qbhf!27pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 Membrane curing shall not be applied to dry surfaces, but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the plans, the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. Only one type of curing compound will be permitted on any one structure. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed, and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of application of the compound. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface. If the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities, pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. To insure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental 149111 Qbhf!28pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 to the work, the Contractor, when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. 15. REMOVAL OF FORMS Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one day(24 hours)when Type I and Type II cement is used, and not less than one-half day (12 hours) when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. 16. FINISHING EXPOSED SURFACES Concrete shall be finished as required in the specification Section for the respective item or as otherwise specified on the plans. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: After form removal, all porous or honey-combed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. Feather edges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. If judged repairable by the Engineer, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Engineer. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch(1/2")and the surface repaired. All fins, runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces which remain exposed. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashingof asphalt, paint or other similar material shall be removed. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces which remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. 149111 Qbhf!29pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, no direct measurement or payment will be made for the work to be done or the equipment to be furnished under this specification, but it shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans and the contract documents. 149111 Qbhf!2:pg!2: Sfw/!4.36.3126 ¸ ¸ ¸ SECTION 01011 EQUIPMENT DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL A. INTENT The intent of this specification is to provide definite requirements for the format of operating and maintenance documentation for all purchased equipment to be transmitted by the Contractor to the Owner. This includes all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment. B. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Work shall be in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following organizations: INSTRUMENT SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ISA) NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC) NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT OF 1970, AS AMENDED (OSHA) PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. PLC PROGRAMS Contractor shall provide to the Engineer an electronic file copy of any programs used for PLCs in equipment control panels. Electronic copy of the program shall be provided on a hard drive or USB stick. B. DOCUMENTATION FORM - HARDCOPY Two printed copies of each maintenance and operating manual shall be submitted. C. DOCUMENTATION - ELECTRONIC FORMAT 1. One electronic copy of each maintenance and operating manual shall be submitted: Contractor shall submit 2 hardbound copies for review as indicated below, prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable covers. Engineer shall review, provide comments, and return to contractor. After final approval, contractor shall submit final copies within 14 days after final review. a. The Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be in a “multimedia format” suitable for viewing with Microsoft’s Internet Explorer, version 4.0. As a minimum the Introduction, Table of Contents, and Index shall be in HTML (HyperText Markup Language) format, with hypertext links to the other parts of the manual. The remainder of the manual can be scanned images or a mixture of scanned images and text. The electronic manual shall contain a “run-execute” file to automatically start and open the manuals Table of Contents or Main Page. b. The common formats for scanned images - GIF, TIFF, JPEG, etc. - shall be used. If software in addition to the Internet Explorer web browser (e.g. a web browser “plug-in”) is required for viewing images or other portions of the documentation, the Contractor shall provide this software on the CD-ROM with the documentation. 01011 Equipment Documentation Requirements Page 1 of 2 c. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. d. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. e. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on white paper. f. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. g. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1) List of equipment. 2) Parts list for each component. 3) Operating instructions. 4) Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 5) Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. h. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1) Shop drawings and product data. 2) Certificates. 3) Photocopies of warranties. i. The manuals shall be delivered on a CD-ROM, not on floppy disks. The CD-ROM disk shall be provided in a square case with an end label to include “Project Year – Project Name – Equipment (Example: 2003 – N. Navigation Pump Sta. – Bridge Crane). Disk shall have a cover label to include “Year – Project Full Name - City Project Number – title “Operation and Maintenance Manual” – Type of Equipment - Manufacturer – Manufacturer’s Telephone Number”. j. The Contractor (or Subcontractor) is encouraged to view the electronic Operating and Maintenance Manual at the O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant prior to beginning work on the manuals for this project. 2. The electronic copy must contain all the information present in the printed version of the manual. D. SPARES LIST AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting a list of recommended spare parts and a recommended maintenance schedule for all instrumentation and electrical equipment provided as part of this project. PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not used) END OF SECTION 01011 Equipment Documentation Requirements Page 2 of 2 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 1E - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1E22 WINDSTORM REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1E22.1 GENERAL: 1E22.1.1 The Contractor shall employ the services of and coordinate with a Texas Registered Professional Engineer to inspect the work and submit necessary documents and information to the Texas Department of Insurance (TDI) and shall furnish the Owner a certificate of compliance for this project with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Code for the following structure; 1. New 8’ Tall CMU Fence Engineer shall be a TDI appointed and qualified inspector for ongoing construction or a registered engineer for completed construction. All affected material incorporated into the project shall comply with TDI requirements to meet windstorm design conditions as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). A final WPI-8 or WPI-8E shall be provided by the Contractor with the project Closeout Documents. There shall be no separate payment made to the Contractor for this item, as it shall be considered subsidiary to the project. 1E22 Windstorm Requirements Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2A - CLEARING OF SITE 2A2\[1\] DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS 2A2.1 SCOPE: The drawings show the locations of all known surface and subsurface structures. In the case of underground obstructions such as existing water, sewer, storm sewer, gas or electrical lines that are not shown on the drawings, their location is not guaranteed. The Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all these structures on the drawings or to show them in their exact location. Failure to show will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work in any manner whatsoever unless the obstruction encountered necessitates substantial changes in the lines or grades or requires the building of special work for which no provision is made in the drawings and which is not essentially subsidiary to some item of work for which provision is made. It is assumed, that as elsewhere provided, the Contractor has thoroughly inspected the site, is informed as to the correct location of surface structures, and has included the cost of such incidental work in the price bid, and has considered and allowed for all foreseeable incidental work due to variable sub-surface conditions, whether such conditions and such work are fully and properly described on the drawings or not. Minor changes and variations of the work specified and shown on the drawings shall be expected by the Contractor and allowed for as incidental to the satisfactory completion of a whole and functioning work or improvement. 2A2.2 ABANDONED LINES: When a line is uncovered that is not necessary for the proper operation of the plant, the line shall be cut and plugged with concrete. Owner’s representative shall be notified prior to authorizing the cutting and plugging. No claim for additional compensation for extra work will be considered for this. 2A2.3 SERVICE LINES When an unshown line is uncovered that must remain in service for the proper operation of the plant, the line shall be rerouted. In this instance, consideration of a claim for additional compensation for extra work will be handled on an individual basis. 2A2.4 TRENCHING AHEAD: 2A2.4.1 General: The Contractor is required to conduct trenching operations in a manner which will allow conflicts to be anticipated thereby allowing measures to be taken in certain cases to circumvent the conflict. Specifically the Contractor shall do the following: a. Trenching shall be performed a minimum of 100 feet (or the total length of the trench) ahead of pipe laying operations. Pilot Trenches may be used at the Contractor's option. b. If unshown buried lines are discovered which may cause conflict, Contractor shall stop pipe laying operations and notify Engineer of discovery. 2A2.4.2 Grade Alignment: If conflict can be avoided by adjusting grades by a maximum of two feet up or down and no additional fittings are required, no claim for additional compensation for extra work will be considered. Lines requiring adjustments greater than 2 feet, additional fittings or the soil being trenched significantly different will be considered for extra compensation on an individual basis. 2A2.4.3 Avoidable Conflicts: Conflicts occurring because of the Contractor's failure to comply with 2A2.4.1 and which could have been avoided by grade adjustment in accordance with 2A2.4.2 will not be considered for extra compensation. 2A2.5 EXTRA WORK No work for which extra compensation is to be received shall be performed until approved by the Engineer and the Owner. 2A2 Deviations Occasioned by Exist. Obstructions Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2A - CLEARING OF SITE 2A3\[1\] CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING 2A3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the clearing, grubbing and stripping as indicated by the drawings and as specified herein and shall include removing and disposing of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project area. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2A3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2A3.2.1 Clearing: Clear the project site of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish, and objectionable material. 2A3.2.2 Grubbing: Grub all stumps and roots to a depth of two and one half feet below natural ground. 2A3.2.3 Stripping: Stripping all area, which underlie compacted fill, of all humus, vegetation or other unsuitable materials encountered within the top 6 inches of soil. 2A3.2.4 Disposal: Remove all materials from the clearing, grubbing, and stripping operation from the site when no disposal area is shown on the drawings. Burning will be allowed when not in violation with local ordinances; however, Contractor shall be held responsible for any fires or accidents resulting from this operation. 2A3 Clearing, Grubbing & Stripping Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2B - EARTHWORK 2B1\[1\] SITE GRADING 2B1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish shaping and grading indicated on the drawings and specified herein and shall include maintaining surface drainage during construction, finish grading and all phases of the cleanup operation. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2B1.2 GENERAL: The Contractor shall uniformly grade the entire project site to provide a pleasing appearance. 2B1.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2B1.3.1 Finishing Slopes and Surfaces: The Contractor shall shape and grade the project site to conform to the proposed grade and/or sections shown on the drawings, and as directed by the Engineer. In any case, the Contractor shall grade the site to provide positive drainage away from buildings and towards roads and drainage facilities. The finished appearance shall be reasonably smooth and even (abrupt changes in slope shall not be used). The degree of finish for grading slopes shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader operations, or by hand-shovel operations, as the Contractor may elect, subject to the approval of the Engineer. Adjust any existing or new valve boxes, manhole rims, etc. to new final grades and pour concrete pads as shown in details provided in drawings. 2B1.3.2 Clean-Up: The Contractor shall keep the site and structures free from accumulations of waste materials, debris, etc. caused by the work or his employees. All material, debris, rocks, concrete spoil, etc. exposed at grade or lying on top of the ground shall be picked up and disposed of by the Contractor. Upon completion of the project and before requesting final inspection, the site and his work shall be "broom clean" or its equivalent. 2B1 Site Grading Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2B - EARTHWORK 2B2\[1\] STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 2B2.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the structural excavation required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2B2.2 MATERIAL: Structural excavation shall include all material encountered including earth, asphalt, base material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps, and roots. 2B2.3 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH: 2B2.3.1 Excavation Safety: The Contractor's excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) on excavation, trenching and shoring. 2B2.3.2 Responsibility: Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench excavation safety systems utilized. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety protection. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this Agreement. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, damage, loss, claims, demands, and actions. 2B2.4 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH: 2B2.4.1 General: The limit of excavation shall be such to allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. 2B2.4.2 Vertical Sides: When necessary to protect existing or proposed structures or other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the excavation. The limit shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, trees, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. 2B2 Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 1 of 3 2B2.4.3 Sloping Sides: Where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope shall be such that the excavation shall be safe from caving. The type of material being excavated shall govern the back slope used. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the back slope used, but in any case the back slope shall be no steeper than 1 foot horizontal to 1 foot vertical. 2B2.5 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2B2.5.1 Dewatering: The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams, bailing, pumping, well point, or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. All dewatering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a dewatered condition a sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure, but in no case shall dewatering be terminated sooner than 7 days after placing concrete. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The excavation shall be protected from excessive rainfall and drying. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor provide a relatively smooth, firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the judge as to whether these conditions have been met. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work. 2B2.5.2 Unauthorized Overexcavation: Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that bear on earth shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of at least 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days (See Subsection 3C1). 2B2.5.3 Backfill Material: a. General: Suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. This material will be subject to approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Excavated materials which are to be used for fill or backfill may be stockpiled on the site. Location of stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. Top soil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around structure. b. Fiberglass Manholes and Wet Wells: Sand shall be used for backfill around manholes and/or wet wells for a distance of 2 feet from the outside surface and extending from the bottom of the excavation to the bottom of the top slab. Suitable material (as set out above) chosen from the excavation may be used for the remainder of the backfill. Location of stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. 2B2.5.4 Schedule Of Backfilling: a. Concrete and Masonry Structures: The Contractor shall begin backfilling of concrete structures no sooner than 7 days but no later than 14 days, after they are cast. The Contractor shall backfill brick and mortar structures after they have been in place at least 3 days. b. Fiberglass Manholes and Wet Wells: The Contractor may begin backfilling of manholes and/or wet wells as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and any forms are removed. 2B2 Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 2 of 3 2B2.5.5 Backfill: a. General: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 9 inches (loose measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density - A.S.T.M. Specification D-698. Flooding will not be permitted. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. b. Fiberglass Manholes and Wet Wells: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 inches (loose measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density. Flooding will not be permitted. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. 2B2.5.6 Excess and Unsuitable Material: All unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled from the project site by the Contractor. All excess suitable excavated material should be stockpiled on the plant site at a location identified by Owner’s representative. 2B2 Structural Excavation and Backfill Page 3 of 3 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2G - SITE UTILITIES 2G13\[2\] REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY 2G13.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the reduced pressure zone backflow preventers as required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection "Supplemental General Conditions", Art. SC-1 Definitions. 2G13.2 GENERAL: The backflow prevention assembly shall be lead free and feature two in-line, independent check valves, captured springs and replacement check seats with an intermediate relief valve and shall be designed for a minimum of 175 p.s.i. water working pressure service. It shall also include a drip cup mounted below the valve to catch water dripping from the unit during valve operation, drip cup shall be piped with PVC pipe to a suitable discharge location. 2G13.3 MATERIAL: 2G13.3.1 Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly: a. Valve: Lead free cast copper silicon alloy body construction, silicone rubber disc material, replaceable polymer check seats and removable stainless steel relief valve seat. Cover bolts, springs and internal parts shall be stainless steel. All internals accessible from top entry. b. Accessories: Assembly shall include two resilient seated lead free cast copper silicon alloy isolation valves, four resilient seated test cocks (screw driver slotted) and an air gap drain cup fitting. c. Pressure Drop: Backflow preventer unit shall cause a maximum of 13 p.s.i. pressure drop at a flow rate of 35 GPM. d. Backflow preventer unit shall meet latest editions of ASSE 1013 and AWWA C506. 2G13.4 INSTALLATION AND TESTING: Backflow device shall be installed by a licensed plumber. Testing shall be performed by a TCEQ licensed tester, meet TCEQ requirements and the TCEQ’s Backflow Prevention Assembly Test and Maintenance Report form shall be completed and provided to the Owner. The form shall be completed on-site while the testing is occurring. Form must be printed and signed by the Licensed Tester that performed the work. 2G13 Backflow Preventer Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2I - SITE IMPROVEMENTS 2I1\[2\] CHAIN-LINK GATE (HEAVY-DUTY) 2I1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing and installing the 8' chain-link gates required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection "Supplemental General Conditions", Art. SC-1 Definitions. 2I1.2 MATERIALS: 2I1.2.1 General: All materials used for fencing shall be new and shall be First Class. The use of re-rolled, open seam tubing, or any used material will not be allowed. Posts, gate frames, braces, rails, stretcher bars, and truss rods shall be of steel; reinforcing wires shall be of high carbon steel; and gate hinges, post caps, stretcher bar bands, and other parts shall be of steel, malleable iron, ductile iron or equal except that ties and clips may be of aluminum. 2I1.2.2 Posts, Gate Frames, Rails and Braces: Posts, gate frames, rails, and braces shall conform to the dimensions and weights shown in the following table. Outside Diameter Weight Use and Section or Dimensions, Per Foot, Nominal Nominal Inches Inches End, corner, and pull posts (tubular): Round 2.875 5.79 Square 2.50 5.70 Gate posts for nominal width of gate, single, or one leaf of double 6 feet and less: Round 2.875 5.79 Square 2.50 5.70 Gate width 13 feet and less: Round 4.00 9.10 Square 3.00 9.10 Gate width over 13 feet to 18 feet, incl.: Round 6.625 18.97 Gate width over 18 feet: Round 6.625 24.70 Gates: exterior frames: Round 1.90 2.72 Square 1.50 2.10 Internal gate bracing: Round 1.66 1.806 Square 2.00 1.90 Rails and post braces(tubular): Round 1.660 1.806 Intermediate posts: Tubular, Round 2.375 3.65 H-Section 2.25 x1.95 x 1.43 4.10 2I1 Chain-Link Fence (Heavy Duty) Page 1 of 3 All steel and iron parts shall be zinc-coated after fabrication, using zinc grade "E" in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-351. The weight of the zinc coating per square foot of actual surface area shall average not less than 1.2 ounces and no individual specimen shall show less than 1.0 ounces. 2I1.2.3 Fabric: a. Definitions: (1) Chain link fence fabric: Chain link fence fabric is a fencing material made from wire helically wound and interwoven in such a manner as to provide a continuous mesh without knots or ties except in the form of knuckling or of twisting and barbing the ends of the wires to form the selvage of the fabric. (2) Knuckling: Knuckling is the term used to describe the type of selvage obtained by interlocking adjacent pairs of wire ends and binding the wire ends back into a closed loop. b. Base Metal: The base metal of the fabric shall be a good commercial quality of steel wire. The wire shall withstand a breaking load of 1,290 lbs. c. Zinc-coating: The fabric shall be zinc-coated by the hot-dip process after fabrication, or shall be fabricated from wire zinc-coating by the electrolytic or hot dip process. The weight of zinc-coating shall be not less than 1.2 ounces per square foot of actual surface covered. The zinc used for the coating shall conform to the grades specified in ASTM Designation B6 Standard Specifications for Slab Zinc. d. Fabric Sizes: (1) General: The height, size of mesh, and wire diameters of chain link fence shall be 96-inch high by 2- inch mesh by 0.1483-inch diameter (No. 9 gauge). (2) Height of fabric: The height of fabric shall be the overall dimension from ends of barbs or knuckles. The tolerance on the nominal height shall be plus or minus one inch. (3) Mesh sizes: The size of mesh shall be determined by measuring the minimum clear distance between the wires forming the parallel sides of the mesh, measured in either direction. The tolerance in the size of 1-3/4 and 2-inch mesh shall be plus or minus 1/8 inch; for 1-inch mesh, plus of minus 1/16-inch. (4) Wire diameter: The diameter of the coated wire shall be determined as the average of two readings measured to the nearest 0.001-inch taken at right angles to each other on the straight portion of the parallel sides of the mesh. The tolerance in the diameter of the coated wire shall be plus or minus 0.005-inch. e. Selvage: Fabric shall be furnished with twisting and barbing on both selvages. f. Workmanship: The chain link fence fabric shall be made of high-grade materials and with good workmanship. The zinc-coating shall be applied in a continuous process and shall not be applied to the fabric in roll form. Excessive roughness, blisters, salammoniac spots, bruises and flaking shall be noted. These and other obvious defects, if present to any considerable extent, may provide a basis for rejection. 2I1.2.4 Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Section 03 00 20 - "Concrete". 2I1 Chain-Link Fence (Heavy-Duty) Page 2 of 3 2I1.3 FEATURES: 2I1.3.1 Gates: Gates shall be swing type complete with latches, stops, keepers, hinges, and provisions for padlocking. a. Gate Frames: Gate frames shall be constructed of tubular members (round or square) welded at all corners or assembled with fittings. On steel, welds shall be painted with aluminum based or zinc based paint. Where corner fittings are used gates shall have truss rods of 3/8-inch nominal diameter to prevent sag or twist. Gate leaves shall have vertical intermediate bracing as required, spaced so that no members are more than 8 feet apart. Gate leaves 10 feet or over shall have a horizontal brace or one 3/8-inch, diagonal truss rod. Dimensions and weights of gate frames shall be as shown in Table above. Gate filler shall be of the same fabric as specified for fence and shall be attached securely to gate frame at intervals of 15 inches. b. Fabric: Fabric shall be the same type as used in the fence construction. The fabric shall be attached securely to the gate frame at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. c. Hinges: Hinges shall be of adequate strength for gate, and with large bearing surfaces for clamping in position. The hinges shall not twist or turn under the action of the gate. The gates shall be capable of being opened and closed easily by one person. d. Latches, Stops, and Keepers: Latches, stops, and keepers shall be provided for all gates. Latches shall have a plunger-bar arranged to engage the centerstop, except that for single gates of openings less than 10 feet wide a forked latch may be provided. Latches shall be arranged for locking. Center stops shall consist of a device arranged to be set in concrete and to engage a plunger bar of the latch of double gates. No stop is required for single gates. Keepers shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate when in the full open position. 2I1.3.6 Stretcher Bars: Stretcher bars shall not be less than 3/16 by 3/4 inch and not be less than 2" shorter than the full height of the fabric with which they are to be used. The stretcher bars shall be arranged for attaching the fabric to all terminal posts by threading through the fabric, by hand, or by other positive mechanical means. One stretcher bar shall be provided for each gate. 2I1.3.7 Ties or Clips: Ties or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric to all gate frames at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. 2I1.3.8 Bands or Clips: Bands or clips of adequate strength shall be provided in sufficient number for attaching the fabric and stretcher bars to all terminal posts at intervals not exceeding 15-inches. Tension bands and brace bands shall be formed from flat or beveled steel and shall have a minimum thickness of ± .115" after galvanizing with a minimum width of 7/8 of an inch ±.015". 2I1.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 2I1.4.1 General: All materials and workmanship shall be of first class in every respect, shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner. 2I1 Chain-Link Fence (Heavy Duty) Page 3 of 3 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 2J - LAWNS AND PLANTINGS 2J1\[2\] VEGETATIVE TREATMENT 2J1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the vegetative treatment required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 2J1.2 GENERAL: The area inside the boundary of the new CMU fence in the City’s new property east of the existing ECR and any disturbed soil areas outside the new CMU fence shall receive vegetative treatment. NOTE: For any St. Augustine grass disturbed in the residence’s property along the north side, as a result of the new CMU fence construction, shall be fine graded and re-sod with St. Augustine grass squares to return to pre-construction conditions. 2J1.3 TOP SOIL: Before any construction on the site is started, the entire site shall be cleared as set out in Subsection 2A3. In addition to clearing, the entire site shall be stripped. Stripping shall be done in two stages as follows: a. Strip and dispose of the top 2-inches to 4-inches that contains roots, vegetation and other objectionable matter. b. Strip and stockpile 5-inches of clean top soil. 2J1.4 SURFACE PREPARATION: 2J1.4.1 General: The entire site (not occupied by structure or pavement) shall be shaped and graded in accordance with Subsection 2B1 - Site Grading with the stockpiled top soil being used for final layer. 2J1.4.2 Tilling: The entire site shall be tilled with an approved motorized tiller to a depth of 4-inches. The soil shall be thoroughly broken and well pulverized. 2J1.4.3 Fertilizing: As part of the surface preparation, commercial fertilizer shall be uniformly mixed in with the top 4- inches of soil at the following rates: a. N: ................................................ 60 - 90 lb./Acre b. P205: ............................................ 20 - 40 lb./Acre c. K20: ........................................... None 2J1.5 INITIAL IRRIGATION: After the surface to be planted has been prepared as set out above, it shall be irrigated at the rate of 1800 gallons per acre. Treated wastewater effluent may be used for this purpose. Irrigation shall be accomplished in such a manner that the slopes shall not be damaged or eroded. 2J1.6 PLANTING: After the irrigation has been completed, the area shall be sprigged with Coastal Bermuda Grass at the rate of 24 bushels/acre. 2J1 Vegetative Treat. Page 1 of 2 2J1.7 WEED CONTROL: After the grass has become established, the area shall be sprayed with a herbicide (24D) at the rate of 1 lb. diluted in 20 gallons of water per acre. This spraying shall be done at a time of no wind and in such a manner that the spray does not drift onto trees, shrubs, buildings, structures, treatment facilities or adjacent property. The methods used in spraying shall be approved by the Engineer. 2J1.8 SUBSEQUENT IRRIGATIONS: The planted area shall be irrigated (at the same rate as set out above) at least once each month until the project is accepted by the Owner, but in any case the planted area shall be irrigated at least 3 consecutive months (including significant rainfall). 2J1.9 MOWING: The area to be planted shall be mowed twice as follows: a. The site shall be mowed the day before the final inspection. b. The site shall be mowed just prior to the final irrigation. 2J1 Vegetative Treat. Page 2 of 2 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 4A - MORTAR AND UNIT MASONRY 4A2\[1\] CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4A2.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to construct all concrete unit masonry required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection Supplemental General Conditions", Art. SC-1 Definitions. 4A2.2 GENERAL: This specification shall govern for two classifications of concrete unit masonry construction, which are as follows: a. Concrete Block Units b. Split Face Masonry Units (provide only when required by the drawings) 4A2.3 MATERIAL: 4A2.3.1 Concrete Block Units: All block shall be steam cured at 180° F. Size shall be as shown on the drawings. Concrete block shall conform to the requirements of the local Building Code and the current specification of the American Society for Testing Materials - ASTM C-90. 4A2.3.2 Split Face Masonry Units: Split face masonry units shall comply with ASTM C-33 and meet the requirements of ASTM C-90 for hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units Grade N-1. Split face units shall be normal weight steam cured from crushed limestone and shall have a minimum (gross area) strength of 800 p.s.i. Coloring agents shall be natural or synthetic oxides that are pure, inert and non-fading. All split face masonry units shall be an integral water-repellent admix as specified hereinafter. Variations in concrete block materials and admixtures can cause inconsistent coloration of masonry units. Should the manufacturer supply the Contractor with such inconsistent units, it is the Contractor's responsibility to "blend together" these units to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 4A2.3.2 Integral Water Repellent: Split face masonry units and mortar for same shall contain an approved integral water repellent admix. As a minimum requirement, the water repellent system shall allow no moisture penetration for a 5 - inch rainstorm with 60 mph winds. Test results confirming this requirement, along with a list of other projects where the system has been successfully used, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Use of admix shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4A2.3.4 Horizontal Wall Reinforcing: Continuous wall reinforcing shall be hot dipped galvanized Standard 9 gauge Truss type. It shall be provided at 16 inch centers vertically in all interior and exterior walls. 4A2.3.5 Mortar Materials: a. Sand: Sand shall be clean, sharp and suitable for masonry mortar and shall meet the requirements as specified for concrete sand, screened so as to exclude any materials larger than those passing a No. 10 screen. b. Cement: Cement shall be Type I Portland Cement. c. Water: Water shall be potable. 4A2 Concrete Unit Masonry Page 1 of 2 4A2.3.6 Concrete (For Grouting Cells): Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall meet the requirements of Section 03 00 20 "Concrete". Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/8”. 4A2.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 4A2.4.1 Mortar Mix: Mortar shall be Type S. Mortar used for split face units shall contain an integral water repellent admix following manufacturer's recommendations and shall match the color of the split face units. 4A2.4.2 Block Insulation: All exterior walls, where noted, shall be filled with vermiculite, ANSI/ASTM C549, Perlite type water repellent fire resistant or Korfil inserts. Verify spaces are free of mortar and that holes and openings are sealed to prevent escape of insulation. Install vermiculite prior to covering cores with lintels or bond beam. Completely fill spaces. All spaces in block walls of climate controlled rooms shall be insulated, whether noted on the plans or not. 4A2.4.3 Laying Block: All concrete block shall be laid in full beds of mortar. Blocks shall have joints filled at inner and outer vertical webs. All bee holes shall be filled as the work progresses. Blocks shall be laid with horizontal joints true and the wall shall be plumb. Block shall be laid in common running bond except when shown otherwise. 4A2.4.4 Vertical Wall Reinforcing: Vertical wall reinforcing shall be provided at the locations shown on the drawings. The cell shall be rodded completely full of mortar from the floor to the bond beam at those locations. The anchor bolt for the door jamb shall be installed at the same time vertical wall reinforcement is installed. 4A2.4.5 Horizontal Wall Reinforcing: Horizontal wall reinforcing shall be installed in every other joint (16" O.C. vertically) and lapped 6 inches unless shown otherwise. Reinforcing shall begin after the first course of block. 4A2.4.6 Joints: All joints shall be struck with 3/4" diameter jointing tool. 4A2.4.7 Rejection of Block: Any blocks with chipped or broken edges or damaged in any other manner will be rejected by the Engineer. 4A2.4.8 Cleaning: As the work progresses the exposed surface of the block shall have excess mortar removed by brushing the surface with a soft dry brush. When the work is complete, clean all concrete block by washing with clean water. Where necessary to remove mortar stains, the block shall be washed with a weak solution of muriatic acid. The Masonry Contractor shall use such precaution in the erection of masonry work that the use of acid will be, in the opinion of the Engineer, unnecessary. However, if the work is not so laid up, it shall be properly cleaned. 4A2.5 SAMPLES AND COLORS: The color of split face masonry units shall be selected by the Owner and/or the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit, for color selection, one sample for each color available in split face masonry units. Size of each sample to be 4" x 8" x 12". 4A2 Concrete Unit Masonry Page 2 of 2 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 9K - PAINTING 9K\[1\] GENERAL 9K1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide all painting required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 9K1.2 WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be done using "first class workmanship". The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what constitutes "first class workmanship" and shall have the right to immediately stop the work covered under this section, if said work is not being done to his satisfaction. The painting operation shall not resume until the methods have been corrected to the Engineer's satisfaction. 9K1.3 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR UNDERGROUND PIPE: See pipe specification. 9K1.4 COLORS: All colors shall be selected by the Engineer and/or City based on color charts and color cards provided by the manufacturer (see also Spec 9K4.1.4). The Contractor shall prepare samples of colors, if requested, for approval by the Engineer and/or City. 9K1.5 SAMPLES: The Contractor shall submit for approval, if requested, samples of paint materials proposed for use, in three displays of each kind of color of paint to be applied. The Contractor shall make panels used for displays, representative of respective types of surfaces to which several kinds and colors are to be applied in actual work. The Contractor shall not order paint materials until color selections have been made and samples approved. 9K1.6 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: 9K1.6.1 General: Not less than 30 minutes, nor more than 8 hours prior to application of paint, completely clean surfaces to be painted. 9K1.6.2 Metal: a. General: All metal surface to be painted shall be cleaned by abrasive blasting, except items that are shop coated. Cleaning shall be to "Near White Metal" SP-10 or NACE #2, b. "Near White Metal" (Abrasive blast cleaning SP-10 or NACE #2.): (1) Definition: "Near White Metal" is a method of preparing the metal surfaces for the application of protective coatings by removing mill scale, rust, old paint and any foreign matter by propelling blasting media through a nozzle with compressed air. This is defined as a surface, gray white in appearance, being almost a completely uniform metallic color, with very light shadows allowed over less than 10% of the surface area. (2) Procedure: (a) Before blasting, grind smooth any rough welds and sharp edges. (b) Remove heavy deposits of oil and grease by detergent cleaning using one pound Sodium Meta Silicate per five gallons of water. (c) The blasting media used shall be 16-35 mesh, or 20-60 sharp angular grained silica blasting media that is fresh water washed, dried, properly graded and delivered to the job site in moisture proof bags (bulk blasting media of equal quality and size is acceptable). Blasting media shall not be re-used. 9K Painting Page 1 of 12 (d) Compressed air shall be delivered at a minimum nozzle pressure of 90 p.s.i., not to exceed 110 p.s.i. This shall be free of detrimental amounts of condensed water and oil. (e) All blast products shall be swept or blown from the surface before priming commences. (f) Blast cleaning will not be conducted on surfaces that may become wet after blasting and before priming is complete, or when surfaces are less than 5° F above dew point, or when relative humidity is above 85%. (g) The blasted surface shall be primed within 8 hours. c. Removal of Oil and Grease: Remove oil and grease with approved solvents such as naphtha, or by steam combined with approved detergent. USE OF GASOLINE OR KEROSENE NOT PERMITTED. d. Scraping, Grinding and Chipping: Scrapers or other suitable grinding and chipping tools may be used for removal of existing paint coating prior to repainting, or for cleaning before application of secondary coats only when approved by the Engineer. e. Abrasive blasting: Clean such surfaces by "Near White" abrasive blasting and leave clean, dry and ready to receive prime coat. Remove all dust and blasting media from surfaces before painting. Take care to remove all blasting media and grit around and between joints of connecting members. Schedule operations to avoid settling of dust or grit on freshly painted surfaces and adequately protect machinery or other equipment in vicinity of abrasive blasting work. 9K1.6.3 Concrete and Masonry: The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all existing and new concrete and masonry with methods subject to the approval of the Engineer. The last step in the cleaning operation shall be to wash the surface to be painted with a 20 percent solution of muriatic acid and then the surface shall be rinsed with fresh water. The surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before applying paint. 9K1.7 STORING AND MIXING OF PAINT: The Contractor shall use one convenient location for storing and mixing of paint materials, and keep an approved type fire extinguisher available in this area. The Contractor shall protect all areas where paint is stored or painting is done and he shall remove oily rags and waste from buildings at close of each day. 9K1.8 WEATHER AND SITE CONDITIONS: 9K1.8.1 Temperature: Painting shall not be accomplished when either the surface or ambient temperatures are less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit; or when temperature drop of 20 degrees, or below 50 degrees Fahrenheit is forecast. Material shall be stored in area where the extreme cold or heat will not greatly affect viscosity. Coatings apply much better when product temperature is held within 60° F - 90° F range (77° F is optimum). 9K1.8.2 Humidity: Painting shall not be accomplished during misty or rainy weather, or on surfaces that have any frost or moisture. Painting shall not be permitted at temperatures less than 5° F above the dew point. 9K1.8.3 Wind and Dust: Painting shall not be accomplished in dusty rooms or on the exterior during excessive wind. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what constitutes excessive wind. 9K1.9 APPLICATION PROCEDURES: 9K1.9.1 General: Paint shall be applied by skilled workmen. Paint may be applied with brush or spray equipment. Paint shall be applied in even and thorough coats, without runs, sags or other blemishes. Contractor shall properly sand painted surfaces between coats of enamel, paint or shellac when applied to any surface other than masonry. Apply paints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply finish field painting to machinery, equipment or piping until operational testing has been completed. 9K Painting Page 2 of 12 9K1.9.2 Drying Time: Allow thorough drying of each coat before succeeding coat is applied, except when manufacturer recommends otherwise, or as specified herein. 9K1.9.3 Coverage: Shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 9K1.9.4 Delivery of Paint: Contractor shall deliver paint to the site in original, unbroken, sealed containers, with manufacturer's label attached. 9K1.9.5 Thinners and Solvents: Contractor shall use only those thinners and solvents specified in paint formulas of paint being used and mix in proportions as recommended by paint manufacturer. 9K1.9.6 Brush Application: Contractor shall apply paint in uniform thickness consistent with specified coverage and with sufficient cross brushing to insure filling of surface irregularities. He shall exercise particular care in painting around rivet heads, bolt heads and nuts, in corners, restricted spaces, and on irregular concrete surfaces. 9K1.9.7 Spray Application: Contractor shall apply paint with adjustable air gun equipped with suitable water trap to remove moisture from compressed air, and with paint pot having hand or air driven agitator. Application of paint by suitable airless spray equipment is acceptable. Paint shall be applied with the width of spray not less than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches, and with suitable pressure for particular type of paint being used. Contractor shall make frequent checks to insure correct spreading rate and coating, and apply without sags, runs or "orange peel" effect. Correct all such imperfections. The Contractor shall take special care to cover edges, corners and rivet head without bridging over of paint film. 9K1.9.8 Application of Protective Coating: When applying coats designed to prevent corrosion due to liquids and gases, the coating must be complete and absolutely free of the slightest pinhole, air pocket or other defect which would allow the entrance of either liquid or gas. 9K1.9.9 Painting Shop Coated Metal Surfaces: a. Prior to Installation: After delivery to site of work, and prior to installation, keep all shop coated metal work clean and free from corrosion. When directed, clean and retouch damaged areas with additional primer. b. After Installation: After erection or installation of shop coated metal work, clean and retouch all rust spots, all places where paint has been rubbed or scraped off, and all field rivet and bolt heads nuts. After previously applied paint has hardened, and when surfaces to receive succeeding coats of paint have been perfectly cleaned and dried, apply paint as set out elsewhere in these specifications. Allow interval of not less than 48 hours, or as recommended by manufacturer, between coats, and if surface is to be submerged in water, allow 5 days or more for hardening of final coat before placing in water. c. Machinery and Electrical Equipment: After installation of machinery and electrical equipment, check base coats carefully and retouch all damaged surfaces. Do not paint nameplates, serial number bases, chrome or bronze trim, or any rotating parts. Clean off any excess paint that impairs convenient removal of covers or gauges, instrumentation or other equipment fitted with doors or covers. d. Bolted and Embedded Surfaces: All surfaces to be bolted together, to concrete, or to be embedded in concrete or grouted, to have prime and complete finish coats applied and dried before erecting in place. 9K Painting Page 3 of 12 9K1.10 CLEANING: Upon completion of painting operations, the Contractor shall clean off all paint spots, oil and stain from all surfaces and leave entire project in perfect condition as far as painting work is concerned. Remove from premises all containers and debris resulting from painting operations. 9K2 SURFACES TO RECEIVE PAINT 9K2.1 INTENT: It is the intent of this specification that all ferrous metal or unfinished material furnished on this project be furnished with a protective coating, but stainless steel, aluminum, bronze, copper, lead and galvanized surfaces are not to be painted unless noted otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings. Any factory painted item that is damaged or shows any sign of corrosion prior to the date of Substantial Completion shall be repainted by the Contractor. Concrete or concrete block is to be painted only when shown on the drawings to be painted. 9K2.2 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED: The painting Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing all of the drawings and specifications to determine all painting requirements. which may or may not be listed in the following: The following schedule of surfaces to be painted is general and does not change the intent of this section as stated above: GENERAL 1. Paint all new ductile iron pipe, valves, and fittings in the wet well and in the valve vault. 2. Paint exposed metal piping at odor control fans. 3. Paint the interior of the Electrical Control Room after demolitions of existing gear conduit, etc., cleaning the walls and preparing the walls. 9K Painting Page 4 of 12 9K3 PAINTING EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY AND METAL WORK 9K3.1 INTERIOR - METAL DOORS, FRAMES, WINDOWS, & MISC. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation - SP-10, or PT-4 "Hot Phosphate Treat") 9K3.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Multiprime 4160– Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy - Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.1.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 2 DMT*., or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400- Epoxy Finish - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.1.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400- Epoxy Finish - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.2 EXTERIOR - METAL DOORS, FRAMES WINDOWS, & MISC. ARCHITECTURAL METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation - SP-10, or PT-4 "Hot Phosphate Treat") 9K3.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 3 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Multiprime 4160 – Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime - 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 3 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 3 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min 4 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 4 DMT* 9K3.2.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812 - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield - Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane– Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.3 INTERIOR-STRUCTURAL STEEL, HANDRAILS, WALKWAYS & OTHER MISC. METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE # 2) 9K3.3.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 3 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.3.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 3 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 3 DMT* 9K Painting Page 5 of 12 9K3.3.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 84-Ceramlon II - Min 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 3 DMT* 9K3.4 EXTERIOR-STRUCTURAL STEEL, HANDRAILS, WALKWAYS & OTHER MISC. METAL WORK: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, NACE # 2) 9K3.4.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 3 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2.5 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime - 2.5 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.4.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 3 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 3 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 4 DMT*, d. 1 coat – Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy- Min. 4 DMT* 9K3.4.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG – Min. 2.5 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812 - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield - Min. 2.5 DMT*, d. 1 coat – Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane - Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS METAL SUBMERGED IN WASTE WATER: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE # 2) 9K3.5.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 2.5 - 3 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Copoxy Primer – Min. 3 DMT* 9K3.5.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M - Min. 8 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy – Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar - Min. 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams TarGuard – Min. 8 DMT* 9K3.5.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Bitumastic 300M – Min. 8 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy – Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar - Min. 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams TarGuard – Min. 8 DMT* * Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K Painting Page 6 of 12 9K3.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS METAL SUBMERGED IN POTABLE WATER: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE # 2) 9K3.6.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-1255 "Beige" Pota-Pox Primer - Min 3 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW Min. 3 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 3 mils DMT* 9K3.6.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-11W "White" Pota-Pox - Min. 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K3.6.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-15BL "White" Pota-Pox - Min. 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW– Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K3.7 INTERIOR - SHOP PAINTED PUMPS, MACHINERY AND MOTORS: 9K3.7.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 150 UP – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Multiprime 4160 – Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime - Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Kem Kromik Universal – Min 2.5 DMT* 9K3.7.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 150 UP - Min. 2 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308– Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tneme-Glass - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel B54 series – Min 2 DMT* 9K3.7.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 – Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308– Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tneme-Glass - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel B54 series – Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.8 EXTERIOR - SHOP PAINTED PUMPS, MACHINERY AND MOTORS: 9K3.8.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 3 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 27 FC - Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 4 DMT* 9K3.8.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 4 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 – Min. 4 DMT* * Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K Painting Page 7 of 12 9K3.8.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HB – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812 - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield - Min. 2.5 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Acolon Ultra Polyurethane – Min 2.5 DMT* 9K3.9 ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT: 9K3.9.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 27 FC - Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K3.9.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 2 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build - Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2 DMT* 9K3.9.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min.2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build - Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 – Min. 2 DMT* 9K Painting Page 8 of 12 9K4 PAINTING EXPOSED AND SUBMERGED METAL PIPING 9K4.1 EXPOSED VALVES, FITTINGS AND PIPES: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE # 2) 9K4.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2.5 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2.5 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime - 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 2.5 DMT* 9K4.1.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 4 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 4 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline - Min. 4 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy – Min. 4 DMT* 9K4.1.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812 - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield - Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane – Min 2.5 DMT* 9K4.1.4 Color Coding: Piping shall be color coded as shown on the drawings. When coding is not shown on the drawings, the following shall apply: Sludge Line .......................... Brown Chlorine Line ......................... Yellow Gas Line ............................... Red Sewage Line .......................... Gray Potable Water ...................... Blue Compressed Air Line ............. Green Non-Potable Water ............... White stenciled "Unsafe Water" Valve Bodies ........................ OSHA Orange Pumps And Blowers .............. OSHA Orange Electric Motors ..................... OSHA Orange Belt/Shaft Guards .................. OSHA Orange Effluent Reuse ...................... Purple * Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K4.2 VALVES, FITTINGS AND PIPES SUBMERGED IN WASTEWATER: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE # 2) 9K4.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline, 2.5 - 3 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Copoxy Primer – 2.5 – 3 DMT* 9K4.2.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Bitumastic 300M – Min. 8 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy – Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar - Min 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams TarGuard – Min. 8 DMT* 9K4.2.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Bitumastic 300M – Min. 8 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy – Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar - Min 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams TarGuard – Min. 8 DMT * 9K Painting Page 9 of 12 9K4.3 VALVES, FITTINGS AND PIPES SUBMERGED IN POTABLE WATER: (Surface Preparation - Abrasive blast "Near White Metal" SP-10, or NACE # 2) 9K4.3.1 Prime Coat: a. Carboline Carboguard 61 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-1255 "Beige" Pota-Pox Primer - Min. 3 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW– Min. 3 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 3 mils DMT* 9K4.3.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-11WH "White" Pota-Pox - Min. 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW– Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K4.3.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied within 48 hours of Intermediate Coat) a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 61 Series – Min. 4 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - Tnemec 20-15BL "White" Pota-Pox - Minimum 4 DMT*. c. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 PW– Min. 4 DMT* d. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 4 mils DMT* 9K5 PAINTING CONCRETE AND MASONRY 9K5.1 INTERIOR OF CONCRETE WASTEWATER WET WELLS: - N/A 9K5.2 INTERIOR - CONCRETE AND CONCRETE BLOCK: 9K5.2.1 Prime Coat: (Applied as necessary to fill surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer) a. 1 coat - Carboline Santile 600 b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 400 BF c. 1 coat - Tnemec 54-130 Modified Epoxy Masonry Filler. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler 9K5.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 – Min 2 DMT* 9K5.2.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 – Min. 2 DMT* 9K5.3 EXTERIOR - CONCRETE AND CONCRETE BLOCK: 9K5.3.1 Prime Coat: (Applied as necessary to fill surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer) a. 1 coat - Carboline Santile 600, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 400 BF, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 54-130 Modified Epoxy Masonry Filler. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler 9K5.3.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy - Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 – Min. 2 DMT* 9K Painting Page 10 of 12 9K5.3.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812 - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield - Min. 2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane – Min 2.5 DMT* 9K6 PAINTING WOOD SURFACES 9K6.1 INTERIOR WOODWORK: 9K6.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 - thinned 20%DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Seal-Grip Universal Primer 17-941XI– Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 10-1009 Undercoater - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel – Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.1.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308 – Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tnemec Gloss - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En. B54 series – Min. 2 DMT* * Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K6.1.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG HPC Industrial Alkyd 4308 – Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 2 coats - Tnemec Series 2H Hi-Build Tnemec Gloss - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En. B54 series – Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.2 EXTERIOR WOODWORK: 9K6.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 - thinned 20% DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Seal-Grip Universal Primer 17-921XI – Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 10-1009 Undercoater - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En. B54 series – Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4216 HP – Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 6 Enduratone - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En. B54 series – Min. 2 DMT* 9K6.2.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbocoat 45 - Min. 2 DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4216 HP – Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 2 coats - Tnemec Series 6 Enduratone - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Industrial En. B54 series Min. 2 DMT* 9K7 PAINTING GYPSUM BOARD 9K7.1 GENERAL INTERIOR - GYPSUM BOARD 9K7.1.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Sanitile 120 – Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Speedhide 6-2 Latex Sealer - Min. 2 DMT*, or c. 1 coat - Tnemec 51-12.4 PVA Sealer - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Ltx. Wall Primer. – Min. 2 DMT* 9K Painting Page 11 of 12 9K7.1.2 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Sanitile 255 – Min. 2 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Glaze WB1 Int. Pre-Cat. Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-310– Min. 2 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tnemec-Tufcoat - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams ProIndustrial Water Based Epoxy – Min. 2 DMT* 9K7.2 WASHROOM, SHOWER ROOM, LOCKER ROOM INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD: 9K7.2.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Sanitile 120 - Min. 2 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Speedhide 6-2 Latex Sealer - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 151-1050 PVA Sealer - Min. 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Latex Primer – Min. 2 DMT* 9K7.2.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series – Min. 2 mils b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Glaze WB1 Interior Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-310- Epoxy Finish - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build - Min. 2 DMT*, d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Water Based Epoxy – Min. 2 DMT* * Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K7.2.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series - Min. 2 mils DMT*, or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitt-Glaze WB1 Interior Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic Epoxy 16-310- Epoxy Finish - Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build - Minimum 2 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Water Based Epoxy Min. 2 DMT* * Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K8 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PAINT SYSTEMS 9K8.1 INTENT: It is the intent of this specification to provide the Contractor with several manufacturers' paint systems on which to base his bid. The manufacturers' list was furnished to the Engineer by each manufacturer with the product designations listed herein and was represented to list materials to be suitable for their intended use and that they were comparable to other systems listed. The Contractor is responsible for verifying with the paint manufacturer before he purchases any material, that the paint system is suitable for use on this project and that application rates, etc., are in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 9K Painting Page 12 of 12 Airline LS 2023 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11B - PUMPS 11B5\[1\] WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS (Wastewater) 11B5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 11B5.1.1 Scope: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing, installing and placing into initial operation the submersible pumps at: a. Airline Lift Station (Existing) 11B5.1.2 Specification Type: This is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11B5.1.3 General Description: The pumps shall be designed for handling a raw unscreened wastewater. The equipment shall be designed such that the pump unit can be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge piping when lowered into place on a mating discharge connection permanently installed in the wet pit. The pump shall be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other fastening to be disconnected. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet pit for inspection or maintenance of the pump. Pumps, motors and accessories shall be designed for watertight operation with continuous submergence under 65 feet of water with a maximum temperature of 100° F and for continuous operation at full load with the motor totally exposed to atmospheric air 100° F. 11B5.1.4 List of Equipment To Be Furnished Equipment to be furnished under this specification for the Airline Lift Station shall include but not be limited to the following: a. One new Flygt NP 3153 – 435 Impellor (Base Bid) b. One new Flygt NP 3153 – 435 Impellor (as Additive Alternative No. 1, may or may not be awarded) c. Two pump bases and accessories for NP 3153 – 435 Impellor (both to be installed whether or not Add. Alt. No 1 awarded) d. Two pump bases and accessories for two existing CP 3152 – 434 submersible pumps (pumps to be reinstalled). e. Accessories include guide rails, intermediate guide rail brackets (if necessary), upper guide rail brackets, Kellum’s grips, chain lifting assembly. f. Floats g. MiniCas Control Devices Submersible Pumps And Motors a. Number of Pumps Base Bid ........................................................................................... 1 pump Additive Alternative No. 1 ............................................................... 1 pump b. Discharge Connection Flange Size .................................................. 6" c. Pump Discharge Size ....................................................................... 6" d. Minimum Motor Horsepower: The pump shall not overload the motor at any point on the pump curve but in any case it shall be not less than 20 HP. 11B5.1.5 Operating Conditions: a. Flygt Model NP 3153 – 433 Impellor: (1) Minimum Head Conditions ........................ 1400 GPM @ 28' T.D.H. (2) Design Head Conditions ............................ 937 GPM @ 44' T.D.H. (3) Shut-Off Head ............................................ 74.5 (4) Maximum R.P.M. ...................................... 1755 (5) Motor Full Load Current at 460 Volts ....... 26 amps (6) Motor Efficiency (Minimum) .................... Full load 87.5%, 3/4 load 89.0%, 1/2 load 89.0% (7) Motor Power Factor (Minimum) ................... Full load 83%, 3/4 load 77%, 1/2 load 66% 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 1 of 9 11B5.1.6 Quality Assurance: a. Qualifications: The pumps shall be furnished by a manufacturer engaged in the production of the specific type of pump for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall have furnished similar pumps for at least 5 other installations in Texas performing similar duty. Each previous installation shall have performed satisfactorily for at least 5 years and are still in operation. b. Workmanship And Design: All manufacturer parts and components shall be engineered for long, continuous and uninterrupted service. Provisions shall be made for easy lubrication, adjustment, or replacement of all parts. c. Equipment Uniformity: Where like items are incorporated into equipment systems (i.e. motors, push buttons, etc.) such items must be identical to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and service. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be interchangeable. d. Manufacturer’s Quality Control: All stages of the manufacturing process shall be carefully inspected at the factor by factory inspectors who shall use whatever means necessary to assure the proper fit of all field connections and compliance with all material and fabrication requirements of the specifications. e. Factory Assembly: (1) Control Panel: The Control Panel shall be factory wired and assembled. Assembly and wiring shall be to the point where the only field interconnections to numbered terminal blocks are required. 11B5.1.7 \[NOT USED\] 11B5.1.8 Factory Testing: The pump manufacturer shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of testing pumping units of identical design, size, horsepower and power supply as those being furnished. 11B5.1.9 Manufacturer's Representative: See Article TS-5 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11B5.1.10 Field Service: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for two 8-hour working days at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the City's personnel on the operation and maintenance of the pumping units. 11B5.1.11 Start Up And Field Testing: a. Installation Inspection: After the pumps have been completely installed and wired, the Contractor shall remove the pumps to the wet pit top deck and the pump manufacturer shall: (1) Megger stator and power cables (2) Measure and record combined resistance of motor windings and power cable. (3) Check seal lubrication (4) Check for proper rotation (5) Check power supply voltage (6) Measure motor no load current (7) Check level control operation, and sequence During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the City's personnel. b. Initial Operation: After initial inspection, the Contractor shall lower the pumps into place in the wet pit and provide water for an initial operation check. The manufacture's service representative shall supervise the lowering and connection of the pumps to the discharge connection confirming proper guide bar and discharge connection alignment. The service representative shall then perform an initial operation check of each pump, including: (1) Motor current at “Pumps Off” level (2) Motor current at “Lag Pump On” level 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 2 of 9 Airline LS 2023 (3) Power supply voltage with one, two, three, etc., pumps running (4) Vibration c. Operating Test: All of the pumps shall be subjected to the following test as proof of design. When directed by the Engineer the following tests shall be performed by the Contractor and supervised by an authorized engineer of the pump manufacturer. (1) Snore Test: "Snore" is defined as the state when the liquid level has been pumped down to a point of exposing the pump inlet causing air and water to alternately enter the impeller. Liquid level shall be maintained to allow "snore". Motor exterior shall be kept dry. No forced or circulated air will be allowed. Test period shall be one hour, as directed by the Engineer. (2) Run Dry: Discharge piping shall be disconnected to allow circulation of water through the pump and back to the wet well. Liquid level shall be maintained at the pump volute top with the motor totally dry. Test period shall be up to 24 hours, as directed by the Engineer. d. Report: On completion of initial inspection and operation checks the pump manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer with a written report of findings and data determined, with regard to the pumps, motors, accessories, level control and electrical protection devices. This report shall bear the stamp of a Registered Professional Engineer employed or retained by the pump manufacturer to indicate engineering review of field test data. A copy of the report shall also be included in the operation and maintenance manuals to be provided. 11B5.1.12 Submittal Data: a. General: All equipment and materials shall be new and shall be specially designed or selected for the function and service specified. No equipment or materials may be used in the project that has not been approved by the Engineer. Submittals shall be complete and shall contain data to confirm compliance or exception to all sections of these specifications. Any exceptions must be clearly indicated. Absence of data will be considered as noncompliance and basis for disapproval. Approval for incorporation into the project will be made only after the review of shop drawings, specifications and data. Before manufacture, the Contractor shall furnish for the Engineer's review and approval as the data as required hereinafter. b. Number Of Copies: Submit six (6) copies of all submittal data. c. Quality and Format: Photocopied information must be of high resolution and letter quality. Submittal sheets are to be 8 1/2 x 11 inches so that the title block is clearly visible without unfolding. Drawings are to be similarly folded and inserted in pockets as appropriate. d. General Arrangement Drawings: All mechanical and electrical components specified herein must be included to be considered a complete submittal. Drawings shall be complete with all dimensions, anchor locations and location of any required electrical connections. e. Wiring Diagrams: For each electrical component include wiring diagrams showing integration with other components of the equipment package. All terminals and wires shall be numbered on the drawings. f. Specifications: Specifications for all mechanical and electrical components. g. Operating Instructions: Complete operating instructions and sequences for all components, electrical and mechanical, shall be included. h. Manufacture’s Instructions: Manufacturer's recommended procedures for Project Site storage of equipment, handling and erection. i. Pump Curves: In addition to published catalog curves, the pump manufacturer shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of testing pumping units of identical design, size, horsepower and power supply 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 3 of 9 as those to be furnished. Pump curves shall include flow, hydraulic HP input KW and wire to water efficiency plotted against T.D.H. Curves shall be drawn to a large scale. Additional data on the curve shall include the model, serial number, impeller size, motor rated HP, power supply voltage and frequency, customer for whom the tests were conducted, date and place of testing and name of the individual supervising testing. All data must be indicated in U.S. units (gallons, feet, etc.). j. Suitability Certification: As part of the submittal data, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the pumping units furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting these pumps, and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. 11B5.1.13 Operation And Maintenance Manuals: Prior to delivery of the equipment and within 45 days following receipt of submittal data the manufacturer shall furnish six (6) sets of complete and detailed operation and maintenance manuals which shall include the following information as a minimum requirement: a. Name, address and phone number of a competent service organization located within 60 miles of the project site who can supply parts and service. If this is not the manufacturer's own service department, then furnish letters confirming that the named organization has been factory authorized to represent the manufacturer of the pumps furnished. b. Complete descriptive literature and drawings of all material furnished. This is to include "as-built" wiring diagrams of all electrical equipment, "as-built" erection drawings providing up-to-date information on the actual construction of the equipment furnished and any field modifications made during installation, startup and testing. c. Installation, operation and maintenance brochures from the original manufacturers of all mechanical components incorporated into the completed installation. d. A complete parts list with a list of recommended spare parts. e. Guide to "trouble shooting". f. All required alignment, adjustment and checking instructions. g. All required operating instructions. h. All required maintenance instructions, including schedules of routine maintenance and lubrication checks. i. Copies of the pump curves submitted as part of the approved submittal data 11B5.1.14 Warranty: a. Guarantee By the Contractor: The equipment in this specification is subject to the guarantee provisions set out in paragraph 6.30 of Subsection 1D1.1 “Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract” and paragraph 6.10 of Subsection 1D1.2 “Supplemental General Conditions”. b. Guarantee By the Pump Manufacturer: In addition to the general guarantee required elsewhere in these specifications, the pump manufacturer shall furnish the City a written guarantee to warrant the pumps and motors against defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5) years or 10,000 hours under normal use, operation and service. The pump manufacturer will pay the following share of the cost of all replacement parts and labor from the date of full operation of each pump unit. Pumps repaired under warranty will be returned to the City freight prepaid. Months: 0 - 18 19 - 39 40 - 60 Hours: 0 - 3000 3000 - 6500 6500 - 10,000 Warranty: l00% 50% 25% The warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the manufacturer's standard warranty for all similar units manufactured. The Contractor shall provide storage and maintenance during construction as instructed by the manufacturer in order to assure full warranty to the City. 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 4 of 9 Airline LS 2023 c. Accelerated Implementation of Date of Guarantee: Under certain circumstances, the date the warranty period begins on this equipment may be before the entire project is completed. See paragraph 6.11 of Subsection 1D1.2 “Supplemental General Conditions”. 11B5.2 PRODUCTS/MATERIAL 11B5.2.1 Submersible Pump Construction: a. General: Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35, with smooth surfaces devoid of blowholes and other irregularities. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of AISI type 304 stainless steel or brass construction. All surfaces, coming into contact with wastewater, other than stainless steel, shall be factory sprayed with alkyd primer and synthetic resin enamel rubber paint finish. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Fittings shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces which will result in controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes and O-ring contact on four sides without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Rectangular cross- sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered as adequate or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical O-rings, grease or other devices shall be used. Tolerances of all parts shall allow replacement of any part without additional sealing required to insure sealing as described above. b. Volute: Pump volutes shall be single-piece gray cast iron, Class 35, non-concentric design with smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as indicated herein. c. Impeller: All impellers shall be gray cast iron, Class 35, dynamically balanced, double shrouded, long trulet with no acute turns and capable of handling solids, fibrous material, heavy sludge and other matter normally found in raw domestic wastewater and settled activated sludge. Mass moment of inertia calculations shall be provided by the manufacturer on request. Impellers for pumps 7.5 HP and larger shall be single or multivane with keyed and Allen head bolt locking fit to the motor shaft. Impellers for 5.0 HP and smaller pumps shall be single vane with conical sleeve interference and Allen head bolt locking fit to the shaft. Minimum impeller openings dimension shall be 4-inch for pumps 20 HP and larger, and 3-inch for 15 HP and smaller. All impellers shall be coated with acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer. d. Wear Rings: Pumps 10 HP and smaller shall be equipped with nitrile rubber coated steel volute wear rings. Pumps larger than 10 HP shall be equipped with nitrile rubber coated steel, or bronze volute wear rings and 304 stainless steel impeller wear rings. Wear rings shall be designed to prevent deterioration of the machined castings and shall be easily replaceable. e. Shaft: Pump shafts shall be single piece extending through the pump and motor. Extension couplings shall not be acceptable. For pump designed such that the shaft is not exposed to pumped liquid shaft material shall be C1034 carbon steel. If any portion of the shaft is exposed to pumped liquid the entire shaft material shall be 431 stainless steel. Shaft sleeves of dissimilar metals shall not be used. f. Mechanical Seals: Pumps shall be provided with a mechanical seal system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies operating and in oil chamber between the pump volute and motor chamber for seal lubrication and cooling. The oil shall be a white paraffin based oil meeting the standards of FDA 172.87B. The lower seal shall act, as the primary unit to prevent entry of pumped liquid to the oil chamber. The upper seal shall act as a secondary unit to prevent pumped liquid or oil from entering the motor stator. The seal system shall allow continuous pump operation with the motor exterior totally dry. Each seal unit shall consist of a positive driven rotating ring; a stationary ring and an independent spring to maintain interface contact. The seal assemblies shall not require maintenance 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 5 of 9 or adjustment, shall be easily inspected, shall be separately replaceable, and shall not be dependent on operating pressure differential for proper sealing. Conventional or cartridge type double mechanical seals utilizing a common spring system shall not be acceptable. The lower seal for all pumps shall have tungsten carbide rotating and stationary rings. The upper seal for pumps 7.5 HP and larger shall also have tungsten carbide rotating and stationary rings. For pumps 5 HP and smaller the upper seal may be furnished with a tungsten carbide stationary ring and a carbon rotating ring. The pump motor shall be designed to allow simple access for seal inspection. Pumps 20 HP and larger shall be equipped with tapped plugs to allow inspection for leakage in the oil housing and motor stator housing without pump disassembly. Separate oil chamber drain plugs shall also be provided. g. Bearings: Pumps shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings with a system B-10 life of 40,000 hours. Upper bearings shall be single row ball or roller. Lower bearings for pumps 60 HP and smaller shall be double row angular contact. Pumps larger than 60 HP shall be equipped with both a double row angular contact and a roller lower bearing. h. Guide Bracket: A sliding guide bracket shall be provided as an integral part of the pump unit and shall be bolted to a machined surface on the volute. Bracket design shall allow raising and lowering the pump without binding of the bracket and guide bars. When lowered into place the guide bracket shall connect to a machined lip on the discharge connection to automatically align pump and discharge connections and support the total pump weight. No adjustments shall be necessary for assuring proper alignment and no supplemental fasteners, clamps, spool pieces, gaskets or devices of any kind other than bolting to the pump volute shall be required. The guide bracket shall be Class 35 cast iron with the same protective coating as the pump. i. Discharge Connection: A discharge connection shall be provided as an integral part of the pump assembly and shall be Class 35 gray cast iron with the same protective coating as the pump. The discharge connection shall be permanently anchored to the wet well floor. An ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flange shall be provided for connection to discharge piping. Minimum discharge flange diameter shall be as indicated below and on the drawings. The connection inlet shall be tapered and machined to receive, and provide a metal-to-metal seal with the pump volute discharge flange. Sealing shall be accomplished by a simple cantilever utilizing the pump weight. Systems dependent on mechanical wedging to accomplish horizontal force will not be acceptable. O-rings, diaphragms or seat rings of dissimilar metal shall not be required and will not be acceptable as equal to a machined, cast iron, metal fit. Integrally cast bosses shall be provided on the discharge connection to receive, support and permanently align the guide bars. Discharge connection design shall allow total support of the pump, guide bars and discharge piping, and no more than one 90° turn shall be allowed between the connection inlet and discharge. j. Pump Connection to Discharge Piping: Installation of the pump unit to the discharge connection shall be the result of a simple linear downward motion of the pump unit guided by no less than two guide bars. No other motion of the pump unit, such as tilting or rotating shall be required. No portion of the pump unit, including legs or supplemental attachments, shall bear directly on the floor of the wet pit. 11B5.2.2 Submersible Pump Motor And Cable: a. Motor: The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. Motors 40 Hp and smaller shall be dual voltage suitable for operation with 230 or 460 volt, three-phase power. The stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180ºC (356ºF). The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at least 95%. The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is not acceptable. The use of pins, bolts, screws or other fastening devices used to locate or hold the stator and that penetrate the stator housing are not acceptable. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 6 of 9 Airline LS 2023 while handling pumped media of up to 40ºC. The motor shall be capable of withstanding at least 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. Each unit shall be provided with an integral motor cooling system. Pumps 15 Hp and larger shall have a motor cooling jacket encircling the stator housing, providing for dissipation of motor heat regardless of the type of pump installation. The cooling system shall have one fill port and one drain port integral to the cooling jacket. The cooling system shall provide for continuous pump operation in liquid or ambient temperatures of up to 104ºF (40ºC). Operational restrictions at temperatures below 104ºF are not acceptable. Cooling systems requiring separate source cooling water will not be acceptable. A leakage sensor shall be provided in the bottom of the motor housing to detect the presence of liquid in the stator chamber. When activated, the sensor shall energize a control and status relay in the control panel, which shall shut the pump down and activate the alarm light. The motor service factor (combined effect for voltage, frequency and specific gravity) shall be 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of ± 10%. The motor shall be designed for a continuous operation in up to a 40ºC ambient and shall be have a NEMA Class B maximum operating temperature rise of 80ºC. A motor performance chart shall be provided exhibiting curves for motor torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. The chart shall also include data on motor starting and no-load characteristics. Motor horsepower shall be sufficient so that the pump in non-overloading throughout its entire performance curve, from shut-off to run-out. Thermal switches embedded in the stator windings shall be used to monitor stator temperature. The switches shall be normally closed and set up to open at 125ºC. Automatic reclosing shall occur when a stator temperature cools to 95ºC. b. Power Cable Entry & Connection: The power cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight seal and shall allow simple, field changing of power cables without affecting pump or motor warranty. The cable entry assembly shall consist of a seal flange designed and machined to provide precise compressions of a single, cylindrical, elastomer grommet flanked by stainless steel washers all having a close tolerance fit against the outside diameter of the cable and the inside diameter of the entry body. The sealing flange shall bolt to a machined surface on the pump and the compression washer shall bear against a machined shoulder in the entry body. Compression by the entry body shall provide a strain relief function separate from the cable sealing function. A separate junction chamber shall be provided inside the pump for connection of power cable to stator leads. The junction chamber shall be sealed by a nonmetallic plate, or terminal board, bolted to a machined surface and utilizing an O-ring to obtain a watertight seal. Penetrations of the sealing plate or terminal board for stator leads shall be separately sealed to prevent moisture or contamination that might enter through the cable, cable entry or during field change of cables from entering the motor stator housing. Pumps 10 HP and larger shall be furnished with threaded, compression type binding posts mounted in a terminal board. Pumps 10 HP and smaller shall have screwed compression type terminal strips. All pumps 40 HP and less shall be capable of field reconnection for operation with 230 or 460 volt three-phase power. c. Power Cable: All pump power cables shall be multi-conductor externally jacketed with oil resistant chloroprene rubber. Internal tinned copper conductors insulation shall be ethylene propylene rubber (DuPont Nordel) and shall be color-coded to identify each power and control lead. Conductor sizing shall comply with NEC requirements and cables for pumps 40 HP and smaller shall be suitably sized for operation with 230 or 460 volt power. Power cables shall comply with NEC requirements for portable power use. The cable shall be specifically designed for submersible pump service and shall be identified as such by external marking as type SUBCAB (Submersible Cable). 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 7 of 9 11B5.2.3 Accessories And Hardware: a. General: The pump manufacturer shall furnish and be responsible for coordinating proper fit and suitability of, all station hardware and accessories for use with the pumps furnished or for any future requirements or revisions as may be indicated on the Drawings or other section of the Contract Specifications. All items furnished shall be guaranteed suitable for the intended use and shall be warranted against defective workmanship, materials and excessive corrosion for a period of one year after final acceptance by the City. All fabricated items inside the wet well shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, stainless steel or aluminum as indicated below. In no case shall any steel other than 300 Series stainless be used for any fabricated item installed below the normal operating water level. b. Access Covers: Not Applicable c. Guide Bars: The guide system shall consist of no less than 2 bars. Each bar shall be standard Schedule 40-wall thickness pipe to assure future availability for replacement. Guide bars shall be 2-inch for pumps 20 HP and smaller, and 3-inch for pumps larger than 20 HP unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. The guide system design shall be adequate to withstand thrust and to support the pump for short-term operation with the pump submerged and suspended above the discharge connection (open discharge). Guide bars spanning 20 feet or less between upper and lower supports shall not require intermediate bracing. Guide bar material shall be schedule 40 304 stainless steel. d. Guide Bar Supports and Brackets: Lower guide bar supports shall be male bosses integrally cast as part of the discharge connection to assure permanent and non-adjustable alignment of the pump and guide bars. Upper guide bar support shall be bolted to the access opening concrete or cover frame as required. Intermediate supports, when required, shall be bolted to the station discharge pipe at a point no less than half the distance between the station floor and top deck. The guide bar support system shall allow removal and replacement of guide bars without intermediate supports and the upper section of bars with intermediate supports without need to enter the wet well. All guide bar supports shall utilize male bosses and not sockets which might fill with debris. Upper and intermediate brackets shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel. In addition to provisions for guide bar support, upper brackets shall be furnished with welded hooks for hanging the pump lifting device and power cable support. e. Float Cable Racks: Level sensor floats shall be suspended in the wet well from a cable rack bolted to the access opening or cover frame. Each rack shall be provided with six, 3/16-inch diameter hooks over which the level sensor cables shall be looped. The cable rack shall be 316 stainless steel. f. Power Cable Supports: A stainless steel or non-metallic cable grip shall be provided for each pump power and pilot cable. The grip shall have a loop on one end, which will hang from a hook provided on the upper guide bar bracket. g. Lifting Assembly: A stainless steel chain shall be provided for each pump. Each chain shall have a minimum working load limit of 50% greater than the pump weight. Chains and attachment hardware intended to be continuously exposed in the wet well shall be 316 stainless steel. h. Hardware: All nuts, bolts, washers, anchor bolts or any attachment hardware used inside the wet well shall be 316 stainless steel. 11B5.2.4 Controls: See Section 40 39 80 Pump Controls for control panel and controls. 11B5.2.5 Floats Controls: Float controls shall be furnished by the pump supplier and shall consist of the float switch, cable and hardware necessary to secure a neat permanent installation. Float switches shall be the non-floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switches shall be non-metallic with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise, except high level float shall be a normally closed contact. The switch shall consist of polypropylene float housing; mercury switch and neoprene 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 8 of 9 Airline LS 2023 jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leakproof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased, shock resistant, with 10 amp, 120-volt contact, N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific, Inc. or Flygt or an approved equal. All float control circuits to operate at 24 VAC. Brackets and clamps shall be of the same manufacturer as the float control provided. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection (provide excess cable to allow float adjustment). Hardware shall include cable clamps, brackets, pipe supports etc. All cable hardware shall be stainless steel construction. 11B5.2.6 Hardware: All nuts, bolts, washers, anchor bolts or any attachment hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. 11B5.2.7 Anchorages: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets necessary for the equipment furnished by him, as well as any templates required for setting the anchorage. The General Contractor shall place the anchorage in accordance with certified prints supplied by the equipment manufacturer. The minimum size of any drop-in anchor shall be 1/2” diameter. 11B5.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 11B5.3.1 Equipment And Materials Shipping And Storage: a. Preparation for Shipment: The pumping units shall be fully assembled and suitable crated for shipment. Electrical panels and components shall be protected from the weather and suitable packaged to facilitate handling and storage. All motors, electrical panels and components shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. b. Storage of Equipment: (1) All equipment stored on the Project Site shall be protected and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (2) Electrical equipment must be stored in weatherproof, ventilated enclosures. Temporarily connect motor space heater until permanently installed. (3) Equipment shall not be allowed to contact the ground directly. (4) The storage area shall be kept clean. 11B5.3.2 Installation: a. General: All installation shall be "First Class" and done in accordance with standard practice to provide a neat, structurally sound installation. The equipment shall be furnished complete by the manufacturer and shall be installed by the Contractor as directed by the manufacturer in his working drawings and written instructions. The installation shall be checked, tested and approved by a factory representative before acceptance. When installed, pumping units shall be level and in proper alignment. Piping shall not be in a "Bind". b. Installation of Anchorages: All cast in place anchor bolts shall be placed in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and templates. Length of the anchor bolts, depth of embedment and projection shall be in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's directions. Anchors other than cast in place shall be drop-in style (hole size equal bolt size) or chemical/ capsule anchors and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions, particularly embedment length. After the concrete or the anchoring chemical has set, coat the threads of the anchor bolt(s) with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before attaching equipment thereto. Threads of erection bolts shall also be coated with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before assembly. 11B5 Submersible Pumps Page 9 of 9 Airline Lift Station DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11C - MEASURING EQUIPMENT 11C10\[6\] ULTRASONIC FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT 11C10.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the strap-on flow meters to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11C10.2 GENERAL: a. Liquid to Be Measured: Raw wastewater. b. Flow Range: Total of one flow meter required. 1) Airline Lift Station – 12” Dia. PVC Pipe 0 to 2500 GPM (Contractor to verify force main pipe size before ordering) c. Detector Mounting: Located in a manhole in Airline St. and mounted on existing pvc pipe force main that is below ground an subject to flooding. d. Transmitter/converter will be located in the Electrical Control Room. 11C10.3 SUBMITTAL DATA: a. Before manufacture, the Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of detailed drawings, detailed specifications, installation and other pertinent information for the Engineer's review and approval. b. As part of the submittal data required above, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the equipment furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting this equipment, and hereby certifies that it should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. 11C10.4 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: The manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer with four (4) sets of complete operation and maintenance instructions. 11C10.5 FIELD SERVICE: The flow meter manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service representative to inspect the installation, check the calibration of each meter and instruct the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of the flow meter. 11C10.6 PRODUCTS/MATERIALS: 11C10.6.1 Flow Meter a. The flow meter shall be a fixed ultrasonic flowmeter based on the transit time measurement method for measuring flow rates of relatively clean homogeneous liquids utilizing clamp-on sensors. System shall be composed of a converter and sensor set. b. The flow meter shall provide a repeatable accuracy of ±0.5% of velocity for velocities greater than 1.0 FPS and ±1.5% to ±2.0% of velocity for velocities less than 1.0 FPS. The flow meter shall be mounted on mortar lined ductile iron pipe. c. Acceptable Manufacturer’s: 1) FUJI Electric Model FSV Time Delta-C \[NEMA-4X, IP66\] fixed type ultrasonic flowmeter converter and FSGB31 Detector manufactured by Fuji Electric Corp. of America complete with enhanced anti-bubble measurement technology \[ABM\] 2) SITRANS FUS 1010 \[NEMA-4X, IP66\] fixed type ultrasonic flowmeter converter manufactured by Siemens 11C10 Ultrasonic Flow Measuring Equip. Page 1 of 2 11C10.6.2 Digital Display Panel a. LCD Display: Configurable from keypad to display flow rate and totalizer values, velocity or output range. Flow shall be totalized on a 9 digit, non-resettable. It shall provide a cumulative total of the measured flow. The counter shall not reset or lose data in the event of a power failure or system shut down. 11C10.6.3 Ultrasonic Detector: The detectors shall be mounted on the outside of the pipe that is being measured. A single, surface- mounted detector consisting of two (2) universal sensors for 2" to 12" pipe diameters complete with two (2) sensor mounting kits, each consisting of spring loaded stainless steel cable with quick release mechanism and mounting brackets, detector coupling compound, NEMA 6X IP67 rating and the necessary length of RG58 coaxial cable. Maximum operating temperature of 200 degrees F. No part of the sensor shall penetrate the pipeline. All necessary cable between the ultrasonic detector and the converter shall be provided by the manufacturer. Note that the detectors for the Airline Lift Station force main shall be submersible (detector is located in a manhole below ground level). 11C10.6.4 Convertor Enclosure: a. The converter housed in a polycarbonate enclosure, rated NEMA 4X (IP-66) with a hinged cover having a clear window for viewing the display panel. b. Wiring between the detector and converter enclosure shall be provided by the meter manufacturer and enclosed in conduit and/or secured off the ground and to the pipe by s.s. clamps. c. Flowmeter auxiliary enclosure shall be labeled with a nameplate indicating the device as noted in the following and shall be black laminated plastic 2” inch wide with 1.5 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws or epoxy. Flowmeter Labe: Airline Lift Station Flow Meter 11C10.6.5 Electrical Connections: The flow meter converter shall have electrical connections for 120 volt, 50/60 hertz. 11C10.6.6 SCADA: Flow meter signal shall be wired to the SCADA panel. 11C10 Ultrasonic Flow Measuring Equip. Page 2 of 2 Airline Lift Station 11G1\[3\] SOIL BED BIOFILTER ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section covers the work necessary to provide all air plenum and activated soil media, air header and distribution pipe, humidification system, fans, moisture control, startup and performance testing services, and all necessary appurtenances for a complete and properly functioning soil bed biofilter odor control system. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 1. The scope of supply associated with the work, in addition to equipment and material supply, shall include the following services: Laboratory analysis, development and supply of the soil biofilter media and air plenum materials. Oversight of biofilter installation and operator training. Performance testing of the completed installation. 1.02 SYSTEM SUPPLIER A. Design, testing, and all components of the soil bed biofilter odor control system shall be provided by a single supplier who shall have sole-source responsibility for the performance of the system (the System Supplier). B. System Supplier Experience Requirements: The System Supplier must have a minimum of five (5) soil bed biofilter installations of similar size, or larger, that have successfully operated to control the odors associated with hydrogen sulfide, organic sulfur compounds, and other malodorous compounds associated with wastewater collection system. These installations must have been in operation for a minimum of ten (10) years. Successful operation will be defined as having operated within the original performance criteria for the life of the installation without requiring a media replacement. C. Acceptable System Suppliers: 1. Bohn Biofilter Corporation, Tucson, Arizona, (520) 624-4644. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The biofilter odor control system shall be installed as generally shown on the Drawings. This arrangement is intended to represent the minimum standard of quality and treatment capacity. B. Service Conditions: The biofilter system shall be designed to incorporate provisions to meet the following service conditions: 1. Temperature Ranges: 50° to 120°F 2. Precipitation: Approximately 32 inches per year. 3. Altitude: Approximately 18 feet above mean sea level (MSL). 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 1 of 13 Airline Lift Station C. The biofilter system shall be designed to treat 2,800 scfm of continuously ventilated air. This system shall be designed to eliminate odorous compounds from the airstream typical of a wastewater collection system or municipal wastewater treatment facility. These compounds shall include, but not be limited to, hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans, reduced sulfur compounds, and volatile organic compounds typical of this type of application. D. The biofilter design shall utilize a soil bed type media. Compost, wood chips, and other types of organic media will not be acceptable. E. The maximum allowable pressure drop through the biofilter media shall be 2 inches of water column (WC) per foot depth. 1.04 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Removal Efficiency: 1. Hydrogen Sulfide: A 99 percent removal rate for concentrations above 10 ppmv. A 100 ppbv maximum discharge concentration at inlet concentrations less than 10 ppmv. 2. Ammonia: A 90 percent removal rate for concentrations above 50 ppmv. For inlet concentrations below 50 ppmv, a maximum outlet concentration of 5 ppmv. B. Olfactory Performance: The biofilter shall emit no nuisance odors and have no detectable odors within a distance of thirty (30) feet of the bed. C. Media Life: The activated soil medium and the air plenum medium shall have a minimum useful life of ten (10) years. “Useful life” shall be defined to mean operation under the following conditions: no detectable degradation in the odor removal performance of the biofilter when operated and maintained in accordance with the System Supplier’s written operations and maintenance requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings/Submittal Data: All equipment and materials shall be new and shall be specially designed or selected for the function and service specified. No equipment or materials may be used in the project that has not been approved by the Engineer. Approval for incorporation into the project will be made only after the review of shop drawings, specifications and data as required below: 1. Shop Fabricated Piping: Pipe fabrication drawings showing special fittings and bends, dimensions, field connection details, and other pertinent information. 2. Specifications for all mechanical and electrical components, media, piping, valves; and complete wiring diagrams for all electrical equipment. 3. Details of the major components showing the arrangement of devices and materials of construction. 4. Manufacturer's recommended procedures for jobsite storage of equipment, handling and erection. 5. Fan performance curves. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 2 of 13 Airline Lift Station B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Submit performance test certificates and reports. C. Performance Test Submittals: 1. Submit a Detailed Performance Testing Plan which includes: Test equipment and apparatus. Calibration and setup procedures. The specific testing methodology to be used. The sampling and analysis procedures. 2. Submit a final report that provides a narrative of the sampling activities, a copy of the original sample log, photographs showing the locations of the velocity measurements, tabular summary of the data, calculated results, and conclusions of these results. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Furnish Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. The System Supplier shall guarantee the useful life of the activated soil biofilter medium for a period of at least 10 years and the System Supplier shall guarantee there will be no nuisance odors detectable a distance of 30 feet beyond the edge of the biofilter bed. If any defects or malperformance occurs in that period, the System Supplier must make all necessary alterations, repairs, or replacements free of charge. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BIOFILTER MEDIA A. Plenum Zone Material: Coarse gravel as approved by System Supplier. B. Activated Soil Medium: 1. The media shall be as tested and approved by the System Supplier. 2. Media development: blending, amendment components and quantities, and laboratory analysis, shall be the responsibility of the System Supplier. 3. The media shall be delivered moist; if stockpiled greater than 1 week, the Contractor shall make efforts to wet the material. Media shall be placed in a uniform manner that will prevent aggregation and compaction of materials and prevent displacement of the air piping. 2.02 FOUL AIR PIPING A. Pipe lengths and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. B. Protection shall be provided against ultraviolet light degradation using carbon black, not less than 2 percent well dispersed in the resin. C. Main Air Header Manifold Pipes: 1. Main air header manifold pipes shall be HDPE pipe meeting all requirements of AASHTO M294, Type S. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 3 of 13 Airline Lift Station 2. Manufacturer shall weld stubs onto the air header manifold pipes for the 6-inch HDPE lateral connections. Stubs shall consist of a short length of 6 inch SDR 32.5 HDPE welded flush into the header manifold pipe and a short length of 6 inch corrugated HDPE welded onto the other end. Total length of the stub shall not exceed 12 inches. No stubs shall be welded at a bell and spigot joint. Stub spacing shall be approximately 3 feet on center, as per System Supplier’s requirements. 3. Joints: HDPE water-tight bell and spigot couplings. D. Air Distribution Laterals: 1. Laterals shall be 6-inch-diameter corrugated and slotted HDPE pipe meeting all requirements of AASHTO M252, Type CD. 2. Slot size and quantity shall be as recommended by the System Supplier. 3. Joints: HDPE snap couplings. E. Fittings: Snap type or factory welded with HDPE welds per manufacturer’s standard procedures and requirements. F. Manufacturer: 1. Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS), Inc. 2. Or equal. 2.03 \[NOT USED\] 2.04 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. The biofilter system shall include a sprinkler system for moisture control of the activated soil media. The sprinkler system shall include a sprinkler nozzle, sprinkler timer, and solenoid control valve. B. The layout of the sprinkler system and the number of sprinkler system zones shall be determined by the Biofilter System Supplier. C. Sprinkler Nozzle: The sprinkler nozzles shall be a full or part-circle sprinkler. The sprinkler shall be a Rain Bird, Model 1800 sprinkler, or equal. D. Control Valve: The sprinkler control valve shall be a Rain Bird PESB scrubber valve. Valve shall be supplied with 24V ac coil and fail closed on a loss of power. E. Sprinkler Control System: The sprinkler control system shall consist of a Rain Bird Model ESP- Me sprinkler timer. Electrical input required: 120 VAC ± 10%, 60 Hz or 220V ± 10%, 50 Hz. Electrical output: 24-26.5 VAC. Controller shall be mounted in the Electrical Control Room. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 4 of 13 Airline Lift Station 2.05 FOUL AIR FAN A. The Fiberglass Centrifugal Backward Inclined Fan shall be manufactured by TEXEL-SEIKOW U.S.A., Inc. Fan housing shall be vinyl ester resin. The fan shall be completely assembled, packaged and ready to install. 1. Fan Details: a. Flow rate: 2,800 CFM b. Static pressure: 12 inches water column c. Fan rpm: 3,740 2. Motor Details: 10 HP, 460/60/3 phase, TEFC, Mill and Chemical Duty B. The fan wheel shall be vinyl ester resin and statically and dynamically balanced. The Minimum Balance Quality Grade: G6.3, in accordance with AMCA Standard 204 C. Bearing shall be oil lubricated bath bearing type. An oil level indicator shall be installed on the side of the oil bath housing. Minimum Average Bearing Life: ABMA L-10 = 100,000 hours at the maximum fan operating speed. D. The fan drive shall be belt driven and Arrangement 1. The V-belt drive shall be rated for a minimum 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower with machined, cast-iron pulleys and heat and oil resistant V-belts. The belt guard shall be FRP, ventilated and OSHA compliant with a quick access port. The shaft guard shall be FRP and OSHA compliant. E. Factory Run Test: Statically and dynamically balance each wheel in accordance with AMCA Standard 204 "Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans" to Fan Application Category BV-3, Balance Quality Grade G6.3. Test run assembled fan units prior to shipment at specified operating speed or maximum RPM allowed. F. Sound Enclosure: Bohn Biofilter shall furnish and Contractor shall install 1 each, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Sound Enclosure for each blower as listed on equipment schedule, as remarked to require sound attenuation package. 1. Sound enclosures shall be as manufactured only by companies with a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience of noise control equipment for fans, blowers, pumps and or compressors. 2. Sound enclosure manufacturer shall guarantee a minimum of -20dB”A” at 5 Feet insertion loss from noise producing equipment to be enclosed. 3. Sound enclosure shall have as a minimum the following dynamic insertion loss: OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) 0.060.1 Freq - HZ 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 3 25 Enclosure -15 -20 -25 -33 -35 -40 -42 -43 DIL 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 5 of 13 Airline Lift Station 4. Sound enclosure manufacturer shall obtain from the blower equipment manufacturer listed on schedule, the sound level ratings based on AMCA test standard 300, the housing radiated noise level and the inlet and discharge noise level ratings. a. Sound enclosure manufacturer shall coordinate with the equipment manufacturer listed on schedule requirements for cooling, temperature rise and special provisions for Inlet ducting, discharge ducting, appurtenances such as dampers, Flexible duct connections, inlet or discharge silencers, intake filters, vibration isolators, seismic restraints, motors, drives and guards, electrical connections, electrical safety disconnect switches. The sound enclosure manufacturer shall also make special provisions to allow access to serviceable items such as bearings, lubrication, seals, dampers, belts, motors and access doors. b. Sound adsorbing materials shall be a minimum of 1" thick, .5 Lb/Sq.Ft. loaded vinyl barrier acoustic insulating foam, with a vinyl facing. Acoustic Insulation shall have a NRC rating of .48 and an STC rating of 39. c. The sound enclosure shall be vertically split in such a manner to allow one half of the enclosure of the enclosure to be removed without disturbing the intake or discharge duct connections. The 2 sections of the enclosure shall be flanged and joined by use of stainless- steel hardware. d. Enclosure shall be provided with a louver and ventilator fan. Louver shall be min. 18 ga. channel frame, blades with acoustical material and removable ½” mesh 19 ga. galvanized bird screen, mounting flange to be baked polyester powder coated. Ventilator shall be 1/4 Hp roof mounted heavy gauge aluminum exhaust fan with explosion proof motor mounted on FRP roof curb. 2.06 CONTAINMENT LINER A. The containment liner shall be a PE fabric designed for safe containment of contaminated soils, liquids, or sludges with common use for contaminated materials, fuels, chemicals, water, etc. B. The containment liner shall conform to the following: PARAMETERS RATING STANDARD Description Black 16 x 16 Count per Inch Fabrication & Warehouse Prineville, Oregon Weight 18.5 oz/sq.yd. (+/- 5%) ASTM D751 Thickness 40 mil (+/- 10%) ASTM D1777 Coating Thickness 2.5 mil each (+/- 5%) MD 680 lbs Tensile Strength (Grab Method) ASTM D5034 TD 650 lbs MD 460 lbs Tensile Strength (Strip Method) ASTM D5035 TD 450 lbs 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 6 of 13 Airline Lift Station MD 150 lbs Tear Strength (Tongue Method) ASTM D5884 TD 155 lbs Bursting Strength (Mullen Burst) 1250 psi ASTM D3786 Hydrostatic Resistance 685 psi ASTM D751 Puncture Resistance 347 lbs ASTM D4833 Low Temperature Cold Crack ASTM D2136 - 85 F -12 Permeability < 2.65 x 10 cm/sec ASTM D4491 WARP 208 lbs/inch Seam Strength (SHEAR), min. ASTM D4851 WEFT 224 lbs/inch Seam Strength (PEEL), min. 25 lbs inch Carbon Black Content 3.0% ASTM D4218 Carbon Black Dispersion Category 1 ASTM D5596 > 90% strength retained UV Resistance ASTM G-154 after 2000 hours C. Manufacturer: 1. Bend Tarp & Liner, model BTL40 2. Or equal. 2.07 CONTROLS A. Control Sequence: 1. Each foul air fan shall be controlled by an On/Off selector switch on the control panel. In the "on" position, the blower motor shall run continuously. 2. A red pilot light shall be provided in the control panel to indicate each fan motor running. 3. Thermal switch in the fan motor shall shut down the motor when overheating. 4. Elapse time meter shall be provided for each fan in the control panel to indicate totalized motor running time. 5. Contacts shall be provided for the City's SCADA system. 6. Each fan enclosure ventilator shall be controlled by an On/Off selector switch on the control panel. In the "on" position, the blower motor shall run continuously. Ventilator only needs to be run when air temperatures are considered to hot (to keep the enclosure cool). A red pilot light shall be provided in the control panel to indicate each ventilator motor running. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 7 of 13 Airline Lift Station B. Control Panel: General Contractor shall provide the odor control fan control panel. Provide 120 volt breakers after the control power transformer to serve the ventilator fans. 1. Location: Control panel is located in existing Electrical Control Room. 2. Panel Enclosure: Control panels shall conform to 3R Standards and be constructed of fiberglass-reinforced polyester-resin or stainless steel. Fiberglass panels shall be Hoffman AxxHzzz12GQRLP or equivalent with quick-release latches with integral Type 316L s.s. padlocking hasp, sealed seams and no holes or knockouts. Stainless steel panels shall be Hoffman AxxHzzz12SSLP or equivalent of min. 14 gauge Type 304 s.s. bodies and doors with continuously welded and ground smooth seams, rolled lip around three sides of door, s.s. door clamp or luggage latch type assembly, hasp and staple for padlocking, s.s. continuous hinge and smooth #4 brushed finish. Backpanels for mounting components shall be aluminum with stainless steel fasteners. Devices shall be installed in the exterior door. All external hardware shall be stainless steel. Wall mounted panels shall be provided with external lugs for mounting. The panel shall be sized as required to contain all required components. 3. Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switches: Selector switches shall be heavy duty, corrosion-resistant NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001, type SK or approved equal. 4. Motor Circuit Protection: Short circuit and locked rotor protection shall be provided for each pump motor by a molded case circuit breaker with instantaneous magnetic trip. Trip and interrupting ratings shall be selected for actual motor full load and locked rotor amperage. Voltage rating shall be 480 minimum. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. 5. Motor Starters: Magnetic type, full voltage start, non-reversing starters shall be provided for each pump motor. Starters shall be horsepower rated in accordance with NEMA standards (IEC ratings are not acceptable). Overload relays shall be NEMA Class 20 with one thermal element per motor phase and shall be manually reset. Overload reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. Starter coils shall be 120 volt. 6. Circuit Breakers: Control and accessory circuits 240 volt and less shall be provided with molded case circuit breakers for short circuit protection and switching. Breakers shall be UL listed for 120/240 volts with 10000 A.I.C. Circuit breakers shall be labeled with the device served (Area Light, RTU, etc…) 7. Control Power Transformers (CPT): Transformers shall be low voltage resin filled general purpose epoxy encapsulated and shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified. Transformers 500 VA and smaller shall be internally mounted machine tool type, specifically designed for high inrush currents of starter and relay coils. Secondary windings shall be fused and grounded. Fused switches shall be provided for 480-volt primary windings. Transformers larger than 500 VA shall be externally mounted outdoor rated dry type. Enclosure shall be stainless steel if external mounted and suitable for use indoors or outdoors. 8. Control Relays: Relays for 120 and 24 volt circuits shall be industry standard plug-in type with tube type connectors. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps resistive, continuous. An internal light shall be provided to indicate relay energization. Relay sockets shall be the single-tier type. 9. Elapsed Time Meters: Meters shall be provided and mounted on the door to measure the running time of each pump. Meters shall be six digit, indicate tenths of hours and be non- 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 8 of 13 Airline Lift Station resettable. Operating power shall be 120 volt. Relays and interlocks shall be provided to prevent operation of the meters when motor short circuit or overload devices are tripped. 10. Pushbuttons And Pilot Lights: Pushbuttons, pilot lights, etc., shall be full size, heavy duty, non-metallic, NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001, type SK or approved equal. Pushbuttons shall be extended guard type. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test, transformer type. 11. Lightning Arrestor: The incoming power supply shall be furnished with a surge arrestor to limit damage from lighting surges. The arrestor shall be the silicon oxide varistor type designed for 600 volt, three-phase service with a maximum rating of 100,000 amp with 1500- joule maximum energy. 12. Wiring: Control panels shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired. Control wiring shall be stranded copper, #14 AWG minimum size. Power wiring shall be stranded copper, #12 AWG minimum. All wiring insulation shall be dual rated for Type THHN and THWN applications. All control wiring terminations shall be made using vinyl-insulated, crimp type connectors, with spade type lugs. Each control wire shall be labeled at each end with a pre- printed, tube type or heat-shrink type wire marker, or shall be color-coded. Screw type terminal strips shall be provided and suitably identified for termination of field wire control circuits. Submittal drawings shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Control terminal blocks shall be rated 300 volts minimum and shall provide four unidentified spare sets. Incoming power terminals shall be lug type rated 600 volts minimum. Separate bare copper ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and pump ground wire. 13. Name Plates: Legend plate indicating the operating function of pilot devices (HOA, RUN, RESET, etc.) shall be aluminum with black background and white lettering. Circuit breakers shall be labeled with the device served (Area Light, RTU, etc…). Nameplates indicating the controlled device shall be black laminated plastic 1/2 inch wide with 1/4 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates identifying the control panel and mounted on the exterior door shall be black laminated plastic one inch wide with 3/8 inch white lettering. Legends shall be mechanically attached with the pilot device. Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws or epoxy. 14. Voltage Warning Signs: Voltage warning signs shall be installed on all distribution enclosures or devices containing voltages over 120 volts to ground. Voltage warning signs on outdoor equipment shall be furnished and mounted by the supplier of the equipment. Signs shall read - "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" and shall indicate the circuit voltage present within the enclosure. Multiple source signs shall be provided for any enclosure containing voltage sources from more than a single disconnecting means. Signs shall be yellow laminated plastic with 1/4” high engraved lettering. "CAUTION: Energized wiring from sources is contained in this unit. Provide label indicating circuit and panel name from each source. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 BIOFILTER INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Elevations shall be surveyed at the biofilter floor, top of plenum zone, and top of soil media to establish correct slope and correct thickness of each layer. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 9 of 13 Airline Lift Station 2. Do not compact materials per Section 3.02. 3.02 PLACING SOIL/GRAVEL MATERIALS A. Placement Into Bed: 1. Plenum zone gravel shall be placed in a manner that will limit displacement of the HDPE lateral pipes. 2. Air plenum gravel shall be leveled and undisturbed prior to soil media placement. Do not permit workers to walk or stand directly on soil media; use boards that will sustain workers’ weight without displacing materials. 3. Use placement devices as approved by System Supplier; for example front end loaders, excavators, and/or concrete conveyors. B. Hot Weather: 1. Make provisions for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, wet cover, or other means to maintain media with a wet surface. 2. Addition of chemical wetting agents or other additives are not allowed. C. Bedding, Plenum Zone, and Soil Filter Media: 1. Place in layers as specified below: Gravel Layer Layer Thickness Size Limits 3 Plenum Zone 12- inches minimum 1 inch - /inch 8 Soil Filter Media 4- feet (place to Per System Supplier prevent aggregation) Cover Rock 3-inches minimum 2 inches – 3/8 inch 2. Complete each layer before next layer above is started. 3. Use only clean gravel. The contractor shall be responsible to avoid contamination of materials by native fill dirt or other. 3.03 ODOROUS AIR DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION A. Examination: Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment. B. Preparation: Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside. C. Installation–General: 1. Joint pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified. 2. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 10 of 13 Airline Lift Station D. Flanged Joints: 1. Install perpendicular to pipe centerline. 2. HDPE flange with no bolt holes. 3. Use torque-limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt tightness. 4. Use flat-face flange when joining with flat-faced FRP flange. Use minimum ¼” thick neoprene gaskets. 3.04 INSTALLATION–AIR DISTRIBUTION PIPE A. Placement: 1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. 2. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage to pipe and stubs. 3. Measure for grade at pipe invert not at crown. 4. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection. 5. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 6. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of day’s work. 7. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. 8. After joint has been made, check pipe elevation at pipe ends and corners of soil filter piping network. 3.05 BIOFILTER TESTING A. Functional Testing: 1. Test all system components for proper adjustment and operation. Adjust as necessary. 2. Provide certification of functional acceptance prior to commencing performance testing. B. Performance Testing: 1. General: To demonstrate that the biofilter system furnished hereunder is installed and performs in accordance with the provisions of these Specifications, the System Supplier shall conduct a four (4) hour performance test in accordance with an approved testing protocol. The performance test shall not commence until a test plan has been received and approved, and the functional testing has been completed. The System Supplier shall provide, install, and maintain, if required, all temporary metering or analytical equipment necessary to measure the 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 11 of 13 Airline Lift Station various performance parameters. The System Supplier shall inform the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the start of any performance testing. The Engineer shall have the right to observe, sample, and make any parallel determinations during the performance test. Within 10 days after the conclusion of the test period, the System Supplier shall submit a Performance Test Report, including all laboratory and field test data, stating the conclusions of the test with regard to the performance criteria. 2. Test Conditions: The biofilter shall have been fully functional and receiving odorous air from the facility for a minimum of 14 consecutive days prior to commencing the testing. All testing, adjusting, and balancing shall have been completed and approved. The actual sample day shall be chosen to limit weather interference. 3. Sampling and Data Measurement: During the test period, at a minimum, the following data and measurements shall be taken at the frequency indicated: Fan airflow rate: Initially. Fan discharge pressure in inches of WC: Initially. 2 Unit airflows (cfm/ft) shall be taken at four (4) locations across the biofilter; two corners and two equally spaced locations in the interior of the bed. These measurements shall be taken before gas sampling. Hydrogen sulfide concentrations (ppb) at the inlet to the biofilter: Every hour. Hydrogen sulfide concentrations (ppb) at two locations on the biofilter bed using a flux chamber: Every hour. The results will then be calculated by: 1) Percent Removal = (Average Inlet – Average Outlet)/Average Inlet Note: percent Removal only comes into play when the biofilter inlet sample’s concentrations of hydrogen sulfide are greater than 10 ppmv. For concentrations less than 10 ppmv, all Average Biofilter Outlet samples must be less than 100 ppbv to meet performance verification requirements. A photographic record of the sampling technique and bed sampling location will be completed for each type of sampling. Sampling Log: A sampling log shall be maintained that will include: 1) A hand-drawn map showing the approx. locations of all bed sampling locations. 2) Date, time, location, sampler, and results of each sample. 3) A description of each photograph taken. 4) Weather conditions for the sampling day. 5) A description of any exceptions from the sampling plan. Hydrogen Sulfide Sampling: Hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be completed using a Jerome Analyzer with a detection limit of 1 ppbv. The analyzer shall be operated in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. A copy of the instructions shall be submitted with the final report. The results of the hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be recorded in the sampling log. 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 12 of 13 Airline Lift Station 3.06 MANUFACTURERS’ SERVICES A. A representative for the System Supplier specified herein shall be present at the jobsite for the minimum person-days listed for the services hereinunder, travel time excluded: 1. Three person-days for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of the installation. Provide certificate. 2. Two person-days for functional testing, operator training, and performance testing. 3.07 MANUFACTURERS’ CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturers’ certificate(s) of proper installation. END OF SECTION 11G1\[3\] Soil Bed Biofilter Odor Control System Page 13 of 13 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT SECTION 11G -SPECIALTY EQUIPMENT 11G3\[4\]LIFT STATION IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 11G3.1SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing and installing all identification and wall signsto complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 11G3.2GENERAL: Identificationsigns are required for new fences at lift stationsand shall be installed on the gate. The signs shall be the fiberglass type with permanently legible lettering. 11G3.3DIMENSIONS: Identificationand wallsigns shall be sized as necessary for the wording required. 11G3.4NUMBER REQUIRED: IdentificationSigns: Two signs shall be provided, one for each gatelocation. Wall Signs: Signs as noted in the following shall be provided. 11G3.5WORDING: Letters shall be block lettering a minimum of 1.5 inches tall. 1.Identification signs shall read: AIRLINE LIFT STATIONAIRLINE LIFT STATION 24 HR EMERG. CONTACT24 HR EMERG. CONTACT (361) XXX(361) XXX--XXXXXXXX Coordinate with City wastewater staff and/or the City inspector for the contact telephone number. 2.Wall signs shall be located as noted in the following. Sign mounting shall be field located by the Engineer. Following signs shall be provided: Oninside of south CMUwall aboveAdjacent to Irrigation Control Valve detector check valve.In Electrical Control Room POTABLE WATER FEED TO IRRIGATION CONTROLLER HOSEBIB &ODOR CONTROL FOR ODOR CONTROL VALVE IRRIGATION VALVE TO KEEP MEDIA MOIST OnOdor Control Panel door.OnOdorControlPanel ONE ODOR CONTROL VENTILATOR FANON BLOWER SHOULD BE BLOWER ENCLOSURE RUNNING AT ALL TIMESSHOULD ONLY BE ON WHEN BLOWER IS ON AND THE AIR TEMPERATURE IS HOT At buried 20”air duct drain valve. Mount on CMU wall close to valve. BURIED VALVE IS CONDENSATE DRAIN VALVE FOR BURIED 20”AIR DUCT. NORMALLY CLOSED. 11G3 IdentificationSigns Page 1of 2 11G3.6 CONSTRUCTION: The signs shall be made of fiberglass that is resistant to chemicals, fumes, salt water and ultra-violet light. The lettering shall be applied by the "silk-screen" methods and shall be epoxy coated for added protection. Signs shall be made at least 1/16" thick and shall be mounted on a 1/4" thick aluminum plate using epoxy cement over the full contact surface. Signs shall be delivered to the job-site with the mounting holes pre-punched. 11G3.7 INSTALLATION: For chainlink fences use alum. or stainless steel wire at the four corners to secure Identification Signs to the gate fabric. Wall signs mounted on concrete wall shall be installed by bolting them to the wall with stainless steel anchor bolts. Airline LS DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13C - REPAIRS, ADDITIONS AND MODIFICATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 13C1\[1\] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13C1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to repair, renovate or modify the existing structures as required to complete the project. 13C1.2 SPECIFICATION TYPE: This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 13C1.3 INTENT: It is the intent of this Section to summarize the scope of work required to provide the repairs, additions, modifications and connections and to provide additional information and requirements that are not specified in other sections. The following schedules are provided in an attempt to assist the Contractor with construction of required improvements in an orderly manner with minor disruption of the lif station operation. The Contractor may submit revisions to the proposed schedule for review by the Engineer. Contractor shall be coordinate with the Engineer and Plant Operators prior to initiation of any work items affecting the treatment process. 13C1.4 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS: It is the intent of this specification that the Contractor shall verify all dimensions before starting demolition, modifications, renovations and the ordering of any material. 13C1.5 DEWATERING: Lift station existing pumps can be used to pump the station down as much as possible. Contractor shall be aware that the station will still contain an amount of raw wastewater and solids in the bottom of the wet well. Contractor shall provide all equipment, material and labor to completely dewater the lift station. All liquid to be removed from the lift stations after they are taken out of service for modifications shall be pumped or bailed to a manhole for return to the wastewater collection system. Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, and labor to completely clean the wet well of all solids. Solids from the wet well shall be removed and hauled by the Contractor to a sludge drying bed at the Greenwood WWTP (see Specification 027604). After the solids have dried the Contractor shall be responsible for removing the dried solids from the plant site, cleaning the bed to original condition and properly disposing of the solids at the Cefe Valenzuela Landfill (at the intersection of FM 2444 and CR 20). 13C1.6 SALVAGE: All items removed during lift station improvements shall be neatly piled at the site (out of the way of the construction operation) as directed by the Inspector. The Contractor shall notify the Wastewater Dept. upon removal of said items until it may be inspected by the Wastewater Dept. The Wastewater Dept. will, within seven (7) days after being notified, mark all items it wishes to keep. These items shall remain the property of the Wastewater Dept., especially the pump’s upper guide rail bracket and guide rails. Any item not marked by the Wastewater Dept. shall become the property of the Contractor. 13C1.7 PHOTO DOCUMENTATION: Contractor shall document the existing conditions at the lift station site using photographs prior to moving on to the site and before undertaking any construction work. 13C1.8 LIFT STATION CONTROL OF FLOW: a. General: Contractor shall provide a minimum of 72 hour notice to the Wastewater Dept. for the startup of control of flow operations at each lift station once the completed control of flow plan 13C1 – 13C2 Special Construction Page 1 of 5 Airline LS has been approved by the design engineer. The contractor shall consider and be responsible for the effects on the collection system area both upstream and downstream of the control of flow. Upstream effects include, but are not limited to backups and overflows. Downstream effects include, but are not limited to surcharges and overflows. Contractor is completely responsible for providing, installing, operating, and maintaining a pumping and flow control system for the lift station to be improved. Contractor shall neither anticipate nor expect any assistance from the City of Corpus Christi departments for any of the control of flow operation. Some locations require multiple control of flow systems. If control of flow system is provided with air release valves the valve drains shall be piped to a manhole for discharge. Contractor shall make all effort to minimize spills of raw wastewater during the improvements and control of flow. All spills and sanitary sewer overflows shall immediately be reported to the City at 361-826-2489 and contractor shall be solely responsible for clean-up of said spillages or overflows at no additional cost to the City of Corpus Christi. Contractor can work extended hours to perform the improvements during the control of flow operation. Work during extended hours cannot create a nuisance for the neighbors. Once the lift station is taken out of service and control of flow operations have begun, work shall be continuous on the lift station improvements until all improvements are completed and the lift station returned to service. b. Control of Flow Pump: Pumping capacity of the control of flow pump shall be capable of handling the flow conditions at all times and shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the existing pump capacity. Pumps shall be diesel operated, self-priming, auto-starting pumps (Godwin, Rain-for-Rent, or approved equal). Pumps shall be equipped with critically silenced, sound attenuated enclosures with a maximum 72 dB (30-feet from pump) and a diesel day tank with a minimum 24-hour runtime without refuel. Pumps shall also be provided with automatic level controls to pump out of existing manhole(s). Temporary Pump Capacities: 1) Airline L.S. – 2550 GPM (Based on existing two pump pumping rate of 1700 GPM) c. Inclement Weather: Contractor shall not be allowed to commence control of flow operation should inclement weather be forecast for the period of the scheduled improvements. d. Control of Flow Operations: 1) Once the control of flow plan is approved and 72 hours prior to initiation of the control of flow, the contractor is responsible for setting up a meeting between the consultant engineer/City/operating department to affirm the approved control of flow plan and verify the site installation conforms to the approved plan. 2) Contractor shall exercise (open and close) existing isolation valves to verify that the lift station piping can be isolated from the force main. 3) Contractor is responsible for operation and maintenance of the control of flow pumping system and fuel for the system. 4) Once lift station is taken out of service, all improvements, testing and inspection shall be completed prior to termination of control of flow pumping. 5) Control of flow pumping can only be initiated and terminated between 8:00 a.m. and 12:00 p.m. on a Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday, but not the day immediately before or after a holiday. 6) Before beginning control of flow operations, contractor shall provide emergency contact info/cell phone number of control of flow operators/monitors, project superintendent and pump supplier. 7) The City is permitted through the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality to operate the wastewater system. The final authority comes from the City as to the operation of the wastewater system and as such it reserves the right to halt the control of flow operation at any time in order to maintain public health and safety. 8) Any coordination or assistance required from the City personnel for lift station access, pumping systems down, etc. shall be done during City’s normal working hours and/or scheduled so that the City personnel can complete the service required by City personnel during the normal working hours. Normal working hours for the City are Monday through Friday from 7:30 am to 3:00 pm. 9) Control of flow system shall be manned by the Contractor 24 hours a day from the time it is started to the time the lift station is put back into normal automatic service. 13C1 – 13C2 Special Construction Page 2 of 5 Airline LS 10) Before the control of flow system is terminated, the Contractor must demonstrate that full automatic operation of the lift station has been restored and that the SCADA system is fully functional. The wastewater department will need to observe the functionality of the lift station for a full two hours (during normal working hours) before the control of flow pumping system is disabled to confirm that the lift station is operating properly. The two hour observance period shall begin no later than 12:00 p.m. on a Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday but not the day immediately before or after a holiday. Normal working hours for the City of Corpus Christi Wastewater Department is between 7:30 a.m. and 3:30 p.m. 11) Contractor is responsible for all control of flow pumping from time of startup to time of termination for each lift station. Contractor shall complete all work inside of wet well and drywell prior to termination of control of flow. All testing and inspections shall be completed and found acceptable prior to control of flow termination e. Control of Flow Plan: It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to submit, in writing, a control of flow pumping system plan prior to the installation of any control of flow pumping system proposed for use. The approval protocol is as follows: The contractor prepares and submits the plan to the Engineer. The Engineer reviews the control of flow plan and coordinates approval with Engineering Services and the operating department. At a minimum the control of flow plan should include the following items: 1) Size, type, and rating or pumps. 2) Size and type of inlet and discharge piping. 3) Approximate location (schematic) of control of flow pumping components. 4) General arrangement/type of additional support equipment. 5) Contractor personnel list of those manning the control of flow system 24 hours per day. 6) Traffic Control Plan if the control of flow system is within the right-of-way. 7) Decant location. 8) Handling of flows: Contractor is responsible to assure that the wastewater collection system is not compromised during the period in which the lift station has been shut off for control of flow installation, and Contractor shall insure that the system operates properly during this period. f. Discharge and Suction Piping shall be adequately secured to prevent movement during pumping operation. g. Odor Control: Contractor shall provide and install plywood or other materials as necessary to form around the suction piping to seal where it leaves the manholes. Use caulking, urethane foam, Ram-nek, etc. to help seal around the suction pipes and manhole tops. h. All Contractors and Sub-contractors are to provide their own power during construction. They are not allowed to use electrical power from the lift station as it is a violation of TCEQ and a code violation. All Contractors and Sub-contractor are to have a Superintendent on the jobsite at all times while working and no work should be performed with heavy equipment near high voltage lines without contacting AEP first. 13C1.13 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS: All fasteners, nuts, bolts, anchor bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. Coat the threads of all stainless steel anchor bolts, erection bolts, fasteners, etc with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before attaching equipment thereto or before assembly. 13C1.14 CONFINED SPACE: Contractor shall meet OSHA requirements while performing work in confined spaces. 13C1.15 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION: See Appendix A of this document. 13C1 – 13C2 Special Construction Page 3 of 5 Airline LS 13C2 MODIFICATIONS/REHABILITATION FOR AIRLINE LIFT STATION 13C2.1 SCOPE OF WORK: This item includes but is not limited to the following items of work: 1. Contractor is responsible for obtaining an electrical permit prior to construction. 2. Contractor shall locate and stake the limits of the Temporary Construction Easement and the Access Easement and all work, storage, vehicles, maneuvering, etc. shall be confined to within these limits. 3. Complete the reroute of sanitary sewer system that serves the Church and put it into service. 4. Replace with new the existing Emergency Bypass Connection tee and valve. Contractor shall plan on having to perform this piping replacement between the hours of midnight and 5 am during low flow conditions. 5. Provide control of flow pumping system to allow isolation of the existing lift station. 6. NOTE: There are three pressure relief valves in the bottom concrete slab of the wet ell and these valves cannot be sealed. Contractor shall provide pumps and means to deal with any ground water that migrates into the wet well while the lift station is out of service and work is being performed in the wet well. 7. Clean out wet well completely of all solids, grit, debris, etc. from the floor, walls and suction pipes, haul off and properly dispose of (see also Section 13C1.5 above). 8. Replace two pump bases and discharge piping with new, bases to be provided by Contractor. Contractor to verify size prior to ordering. Contractor to provide new 316 S.S. anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. Remove existing bases and clean off bottom slab to provide smooth surface for new bases. Chisel and break out existing anchor bolts if necessary to install new bases, drill and set new anchor bolts and epoxy grout. Secure new bases with 316 S.S. washers and nuts. 9. Install two new pump bases, guide rails, accessories and discharge piping, bases to be provided by Contractor. Contractor to verify size prior to ordering. Contractor to provide new 316 S.S. anchor bolts, nuts, and washers, drill and set new anchor bolts and epoxy grout. Secure new bases with 316 S.S. washers and nuts. 10. Vertical discharge piping inside of wet well to be DR 14 C-900 PVC. Provide uni-flange for PVC pipe connection to new pump base (or reducer). Provide all new 316 s.s. nuts and bolts for pipe flange connections. Clean and coat new flanges with two coats of coal tar epoxy 16 dry mil thickness total. 11. Install new submersible pumps and reinstall two existing submersible pumps. 12. Remove existing and install new electrical devices, panels, gear, etc. in the Electrical Control room. 13. Install new concrete foundation and electrical generator. 14. Install new concrete foundation, air duct piping and odor control facility. 15. When done with Control of Flow system install new 16” blind flange on Emergency Bypass Connection 90 degree bend. 16. Provide traffic control as necessary to allow construction of the new CMU fence and to allow installation of the new flow meter in the manhole in Airline St. Provide personnel, equipment, and materials needed to provide proper traffic control. 17. Install new CMU block perimeter fence with gates and new concrete driveway. 13C2.2 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION: 1. Contractor shall locate and stake the limits of the Temporary Construction Easement and the Access Easement and all work, storage, vehicles, maneuvering, etc. shall be confined to within these limits. 2. Remove existing tee and valve and install new emergency pumping connection. 3. Construct new sanitary sewer line and manhole and make tie-in to Church’s existing sanitary sewer line. This will take the existing san. sewer line out of service that is tied to the existing Influent Box at the lift station. 4. Order and collect all equipment and material necessary to begin and complete the improvements to the wet well, install existing and new pumps and replace the electrical gear and panels. That work 13C1 – 13C2 Special Construction Page 4 of 5 Airline LS associated with the generator, odor control facility, site work and new fence do not have to be performed while the Control of Flow is in use. 5. Verify size and number of gravity lines entering the lift station that need to be plugged for control of flow. Contractor to order and have all plugs, material and equipment delivered to job site prior to setting up and beginning control of flow operations. 6. Provide to Engineer the Control of Plan per Spec. 13C1.8. 7. Contractor shall notify Wastewater Dept. staff and Engineer a minimum of seven (7) days before lift station control of flow is started. 8. Exercise (open and close) existing isolation valves to verify that lift station piping can be isolated from force main. 9. Install traffic control (when required). 10. Install, start-up, and test control of flow pumping system. Install plugs and test control of flow pumping system under operating conditions. Take the lift station out of service. 11. Schedule power outage with the power company (when required). Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company for the power outages. 12. Perform improvements to the wet well, install existing and new pumps and replace the electrical gear and panels and as outline and detailed in the plans and specifications. Note that when removing, replacing or dealing with existing suction and discharge piping the contactor shall be prepared to handle and deal with any liquids or solids remaining in that piping. 13. Schedule return of power with the power company (when required). 14. Coordinate and schedule with Wastewater Dept. and Engineer time to inspect the completed work. Contractor shall demonstrate that pumps are turning in correct direction. 15. As soon as these improvements are completed, inspected and accepted by City and Engineer, return the Lift Station back to service. 16. Remove all control of flow materials and equipment, debris and salvaged material unwanted by City and return site to original conditions. 17. If not already done, construct all remaining improvements, including the generator, odor control facility, site work and new fence, as outline and detailed in the plans and specifications. 18. Coordinate and schedule with Wastewater Dept. and Engineer time to inspect the completed work. 19. Remove all of Contractor’s equipment, material, trash and any debris from the easements and return site to original conditions. 13C1 – 13C2 Special Construction Page 5 of 5 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15C - PROCESS PIPING AND FITTINGS 15C3\[1\] POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS 15C3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings required to complete the PVC process piping. This specification is a design specification as defined in Section 1D General Conditions, Subsection "Supplemental General Conditions", Art. SC-1 Definitions. 15C3.2 GENERAL: The following specifications apply to the process piping, unless noted otherwise on the plans. 15C3.2.1 Fittings: a. Fittings for SDR 21 and C900 Pressure Rated Piping: (1) Pipe 3" and smaller - PVC fittings (Except when ductile iron fitting are noted on the drawings) (2) Pipe Over 4"- Ductile Iron Fittings b. Fittings for SDR 26 Gravity Piping: PVC fittings c. Fittings for Schedule 80 Pressure Rated Piping: PVC fittings 15C3.2.2 Piping For Potable And Non-Potable Water Lines: a. Below Ground: 1) Up to 3” dia.: Schedule 80 PVC pressure pipe. 2) Greater than 3”: C900 PVC DR 25 pressure pipe b. Above Ground: Schedule 80 PVC pressure pipe 15C3.2.6 Piping For Pressure Lines (connected to pumps or pressure systems, except water lines): b. Below Ground: 3) Up to 12” dia.: SDR 21 PVC pressure pipe. 4) Greater than 12”: C900 PVC DR 25 pressure pipe b. Above Ground: Ductile Iron Pipe (See Subsection 15C2) 15C3.2.7 Piping For Non-Pressure Gravity Lines: a. Below Ground: 1) Up to 12” dia., SDR 26 PVC gravity pipe 2) Greater than 12”: C900 PVC DR 25 pressure pipe b. Above Ground: Ductile Iron Pipe (See Subsection 15C2) 15C3.2.8 Insulation: All PVC pipe and fittings installed above ground (except air duct piping and drain lines that drain completely) shall be insulated with 1 inch thick fiberglass pipe insulation. The fiberglass insulation shall be preformed mineral fiber pipe insulation comply with ASTM C547. The insulation shall be jacketed with a reinforced all-service vapor retarder jacketing. The jacketing will be a factory applied, double pressure sensitive, adhesive system which provides positive closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal joint. Joints between insulation will be sealed with butt strips which also have a two-component adhesive system. Pipe insulation shall be protected from weather with 0.016 aluminum jacketing complete with stainless steel straps placed at 12" centers. Fittings shall be installed with miter cut pieces. All joints shall be sealed with adhesive. To allow insulation installation mount PVC pipe at least 1” off the wall with alum. unistrut and s.s. anchors. 15C3 PVC Pipe Page 1 of 4 15C3.3 MATERIAL: 15C3.3.1 SDR 21 and Schedule 80 PVC Pressure Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from PVC 1120 which is a Type 1, Grade 1, polyvinyl chloride compound having a design stress rating of 2000 psi at 73° F and conforms to ASTM D-1784. Physical dimensions and tolerances of PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D-2241 for SDR 21 and D- 1785 for Schedule 80. Pipe shall be marked in accordance with ASTM D-2241, i.e., nominal pipe size, type of PVC schedule or SDR number, pressure rating, ASTM designation number, manufacturer's name and code and the National Sanitation Foundation Seal. 15C3.3.2 SDR 26 PVC Gravity Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from clean, virgin, Type I, Grade I, polyvinyl chloride compound conforming to ASTM D-1784. Physical dimensions and tolerances of PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034. Pipe shall be marked to show nominal pipe size, type of PVC, SDR number, ASTM designated number and manufacturer's name and code. Minimum pipe stiffness (before being perforated) at 5% deflection shall be 46 psi. Minimum pipe stiffness at 5% deflection shall be calculated in accordance with A.S.T.M. Standard Specification D-2412. 15C3.3.3 C900 PVC (DR 25) Pressure Pipe: PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C-90, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe" and shall be Class 165 and meet the requirements of DR 25. The pipe and gaskets shall be approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual and by the National Sanitation Foundation. Pipe shall conform to cast iron pipe outside diameters. Each length of pipe shall be marked to indicate Pressure Class, DR and UL approval. All pipe shall be suitable for use as pressure conduit and be furnished with an integral bell containing either: a. An elastomer gasket-sealing ring for the purpose of forming a hydraulic seal within the bell-spigot joint. The elastomer gasket ring shall be installed at the point of manufacturing and locked in place by a steel retaining ring. The gasket system shall be of the “Reiber” design or equivalent. The elastomer gasket ring shall not be glued into or chemically bonded into the bell ring groove, OR a. A flexible elastomeric ring seated in a deep groove that provides a tight seal within the bell-spigot joint. The push together joint shall protect the line from shock, vibration, and earth movement and shall compensate for expansion and contraction of pipe lengths. The bell section shall be designed to be at least as hydrostatically strong as the pipe wall and meet the requirements of AWWA C- 905. A complete set of joint material shall be furnished with each joint of pipe. The manufacturer shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with specifications and a certified copy of an analysis of the material in each gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. Certification shall accompany each order delivered. 15C3.3.4 PVC Pipe Couplings and Joints: a. Schedule 80 PVC Pipe: Couplings for Schedule 80 PVC Pipe shall be Schedule 80, Solvent Weld and shall conform to ASTM D-2467. b. SDR 21 PVC Pipe: Couplings for SDR 21 pipe PVC shall be SDR 21 PVC, shall be the compression gasket type, and shall conform to ASTM D-3139. Insertion depth of the pipe in the coupling shall be controlled by an internal PVC mechanical stop in the coupling that will allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Couplings shall permit 5-degree deflection (2-1/2 degree each side) of the pipe without any evidence of infiltration, exfiltration, cracking or breaking. c. SDR 26 PVC Pipe: Joints for SDR 26 PVC pipe shall consist of a bell that is an integral part of the pipe wall with compression rubber rings. The joint shall be capable of withstanding an internal hydrostatic pressure of 25 p.s.i. for 1 hour without any leakage. Joints shall conform to ASTM D-1869. 15C3 PVC Pipe Page 2 of 4 d. Steel Couplings: (1) Where steel couplings are shown on the plans or as required to make piping connections they shall be, unless noted otherwise, a dressor “type” flexible coupling consisting of one cylindrical sleeve with conical inner surfaces at each end, two resilient, wedge-shaped, rubber gaskets, two ring-shaped followers and a set of rolled-thread bolts with heavy hex nuts. (Steel couplings are not the same as “Solid Sleeve” MJ Fittings) (2) Coupling material as follows: 1. Sleeve: Ductile iron or carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi. 2. Follower: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 or carbon steel having a min. yield of 30,000 psi 3. Gasket: Nitrile (Buna-N) 4. Bolts and Nuts: 304 stainless steel 5. Finish: Fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213 (3) For installation on an existing pipe the contractor shall expose (if buried) and confirm the material type and outside diameter prior to ordering the coupling. (4) Buried steel couplings shall be wrapped in 8 mil thick polyethylene before being backfilled. Polyethylene wrapping shall be lapped with adjacent piping wrap with a minimum 6” lap. (5) Provide “long body” style sleeve when shown on the plans. (6) Steel couplings for potable water systems shall meet NSF 61 requirements. (7) Steel couplings shall be Smith Blair Style 411, Dresser Style 38 or Romac 501. 15C3.3.5 PVC Fittings: a. Schedule 80 PVC Pipe: Fitting shall be Schedule 80 PVC, shall be solvent weld, and shall conform to ASTM D-2467. b. SDR 21 PVC Pipe: (1) Pipe 3" and smaller: Fittings for pipe 3" and smaller shall be SDR 21 PVC, shall be the compression gasket type, and shall conform to ASTM D-3139. (2) Pipe Over 3": Fittings for pipe for over 3" shall be ductile iron with mechanical joints. c. SDR 26 PVC Pipe: Fitting shall be SDR 26 PVC with joints that conform to the requirements as set out above for SDR 26 pipe joints. 15C3.3.6 Gaskets: Gaskets shall be rubber and shall conform to ASTM F-477. 15C3.3.7 Gasket Lubricant: Lubricant shall be water soluble, non-toxic, non-supporting of bacteria growth, and shall have no deteriorating effect on the PVC or rubber gaskets. The lubricant shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 15C3.4 COUPLINGS: 15C3.4.1 Steel Couplings: (8) Where steel couplings are shown on the plans or as required to make piping connections they shall be, unless noted otherwise, a dressor “type” flexible coupling consisting of one cylindrical sleeve with conical inner surfaces at each end, two resilient, wedge-shaped, rubber gaskets, two ring-shaped followers and a set of rolled-thread bolts with heavy hex nuts. (Steel couplings are not the same as “Solid Sleeve” MJ Fittings) (9) Coupling material as follows: 6. Sleeve: Ductile iron or carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi. 7. Follower: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 or carbon steel having a minimum yield of 30,000 psi 8. Gasket: Nitrile (Buna-N) 9. Bolts and Nuts: 304 stainless steel 10. Finish: Fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213 c. For installation on an existing pipe the contractor shall expose (if buried) and confirm the material type and outside diameter prior to ordering the coupling. 15C3 PVC Pipe Page 3 of 4 d. Buried steel couplings shall be wrapped in 8 mil thick polyethylene before being backfilled. Polyethylene wrapping shall be lapped with adjacent piping wrap with a minimum 6” lap. e. Provide “long body” style sleeve when shown on the plans. f. Steel couplings for potable water systems shall meet NSF 61 requirements. g. Steel couplings shall be Smith Blair Style 411, Dresser Style 38 or Romac 501. 15C3 PVC Pipe Page 4 of 4 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15C - PROCESS PIPING AND FITTINGS 15C12\[1\] FIBERGLASS MANHOLES 15C12.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to construct all fiberglass manholes to complete the sanitary sewer system. This is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15C12.2 MATERIAL: 15C12.2.1 Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Section 3C1 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete. 15C12.2.2 Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel conforming to ASTM A-615. Also see Section 3B Concrete Reinforcement. 15C12.2.3 Material for Fiberglass Structure: a. Resin: The resins used shall be a commercial grade unsaturated polyester resin form of mat, continuous roving, chopped roving and/or roving fabric, having a coupling agent that will provide a suitable bond between the glass reinforcement and the resin b. Fillers and Additives: Fillers and additives shall meet chemical requirements defined in 15C12.7. c. The minimum wall thickness of fiberglass manholes shall be 1/2” 15C12.3 FABRICATION METHODS FOR FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: 15C12.3.1 Laminate: The laminate shall consist of multiple layers of glass matting and resin. The surface exposed to the wastewater shall be resin rich and shall have no exposed fibers. 15C12.3.2 Assembly Joints: Cured components may be joined to form composite. 15C12.3.3 Manway Reducer: Manway shall be concentric with respect to the larger portion of the manhole. The reducer shall be compatible with the manhole ring and cover as specified in 15C12.2.4. 15C12.4 DEFECTS NOT PERMITTED IN FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: 15C12.4.1 Interior Surfaces: a. Crazing b. Delamination c. Exposed fibers d. Blisters over 1/2 inch in diameter e. Pits and voids directly under surface that can be broken by finger pressure, over 5 per square foot f. Wrinkles over 1/8 inch 15C12.4.2 Exterior Surfaces: a. Delamination b. Exposed fibers c. Blisters over 1/2 inch in diameter d. Sharp projections; the surface shall be relatively smooth as to allow handling of manholes without the need for gloves or special protection. 15C12 Fiberglass Manholes Page 1 of 4 15C12.5 REPAIRS TO FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: Repairs shall not be permitted unless the required manhole meets all requirements of an undamaged manhole and its components. 15C12.6 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: 15C12.6.1 Load Bearing Capacity: The manhole minimum load rating shall be 16,000-lb. dynamic wheel load. 15C12.6.2 Structural Performance: All manholes shall meet the structural performance tests as defined in 15C12.8.1. In any case, the manhole tested must be long enough to include at least one of all unique or repetitive features and the minimum length tested must be 3 feet for each cylinder. a. When static load of 40,000 lb. is applied according to static load test the manhole shall not suffer damage or fail (See 15C12.8.8.1a). b. All manholes shall not, when tested according to 15C12.8.1 b, deflect downward vertically more than 6.35 mm (1/4") when measured at the point of load application. c. The manhole cylinder shall have a minimum pipe stiffness value as listed below: Total Length Minimum Pipe of Manhole Stiffness (PS) 2 1 to 1.8 m (3 to 6 ft.) ................................................................ 408 Kg/m (0.72 p.s.i.) 2 1.9 to 3.7 m (7 to 12 ft.) .............................................................. 889 Kg/m (1.26 p.s.i.) 2 3.8 to 6.1 m (13 to 20 ft. ............................................................. 1417 Kg/m (2.01 p.s.i.) 2 6.2 to 7.6 m (21 to 25 ft.) ............................................................ 2129 Kg/m (3.02 p.s.i.) 2 7.7 to 10.7 m (26 to 35 ft.) ............................................................ 3694 Kg/m (5.24 p.s.i.) 15C12.6.3 Laminate Properties: Significant laminate properties shall be established for each laminate construction. Laminate properties shall be established, if possible, on a section taken from a manhole manufacture according to the method of fabrication selected by the manufacturer. If it is not possible to take laminates from a manhole that will meet dimensional requirements for testing, the laminate may be made independent of the method but, in any case, must be consistent in all respects with the construction of the manhole. The following pipe wall properties shall be established: a. Material Compositions (% by weight) b. Compressive Strength (p.s.i.) (1) Hoop (2) Axial c. Flexural Strength (p.s.i.) (1) Hoop (2) Axial d. Flexural Modulus (1) Hoop (2) Axial e. Surface Hardness (barcol) 15C12.7 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: Testing shall be performed according to 15C12.8, and the log of percent property retention versus long of time data graph should be extrapolated by a linear plot beyond the 12-month results to 10 years. The extrapolated data must assure retention of at least 50% of the initial properties in all categories. 15C12.8 METHOD OF TESTING FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: 15C12.8.1 Physical: The physical tests shall be performed to evaluate compliance with requirements set forth in 15C12.6. a. Static Load Test: The manhole to be tested must be complete with cover and supporting ring installed. The specified load shall be applied eccentrically on a 15 cm x 15 cm x 1.25 cm (6" x 6" x 1/2") steel 15C12 Fiberglass Manholes Page 2 of 4 plate resting on the manhole cover. The steel loading plate shall be located so that the center of the plate is within 10 cm (4" from the edge of the cover. Loading shall be done in 909-Kg (2000 lbs.) increments with close inspection between increases. The specified load shall be maintained for not less than 15 minutes. Interior constraint may be used at the bottom, as required to maintain round shape during testing. b. Deflection Test: The manhole shall be supported and loaded according to procedure set in 15C12.8.1a. When the applied load is 24,000 lb. the length that the manhole cover deflects vertically downward from its pre-loaded position shall be recorded. c. Stiffness Test: The circular cylindrical portion of the manhole shall have the minimum pipe stiffness values as listed below when tested according to ASTM D-2412 (Parallel Plate Test). d. Barcol Hardness Test: Equipment used shall be according to ASTM D-2583, Standard Method of Testing for Indentation Hardness of Plastics by means of a Barcol Impressor. The frequency of checks shall not be less than 3 random points per component part. The minimum acceptable value of cure shall not be less than 90% of the resin manufacturer's minimum value for the cured resin. e. Composition Test: Conducted per ASTM D-2584. For laminates with fillers and/ or additives, the residue must be separated into its components (i.e. glass, sand, etc.) in order to determine the glass content. f. Compressive Strength: Conducted per ASTM D-695 (Note 1). g. Flexural Strength and Modulus: Conducted per ASTM D-790 (Note 1). Note 1 - Strength property test methods require flat laminates consistent with the method of fabrication selected for the manhole. The frequency of check shall be at least once per 5 manholes. h. Dimensions: (1) Dimensions other than thickness shall be measured with a steel tap with graduations of 3 mm (1/8") or less. (2) Thickness: Measure to the nearest percent 0.25 mm (0.01") with a micrometer, caliper, 22 gauge or other suitable instrument. A minimum of one thickness reading per 3 m (33.4 ft.) of laminate surface in areas of constant thickness shall be made. Through regions of wall taper, sufficient checks must be made to establish actual thickness. The test shall be run at least once per 10 manholes. 15C12.8.2 Chemical Resistance: Testing procedures for measuring chemical resistance shall conform to ASTM C-581. The percent retention of each property (See 15C12.6.3) after immersion testing (versus the initial value) is to be plotted against the log of the immersion time. 15C12.9 CERTIFICATION OF FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: The Contractor shall submit a written certification before shipping the fiberglass structure. This certification shall consist of a copy of manufacturer's test report or a statement by the supplier, accompanied by a copy of the test results, that the fiberglass structure has been sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with the provisions of ASTM D-3753 and meets all requirements and also meets all physical and chemical requirements as listed in 15C12.6 and 15C12.7 of this specification. Each certification so furnished shall be signed by an authorized agent of the supplier or manufacturer. 15C12.10 QUALITY CONTROL OF FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE: Physical tests of manhole strength shall be conducted in accordance with 15C12.8.1a b and c. Each test shall be conducted at least once per shipment of manholes. Test of physical properties of laminate, as specified in 15C12.8.1d, e, f, g and h of this specification, shall be done on at least one of every 50 manholes. Results of testing shall be submitted in writing. 15C12 Fiberglass Manholes Page 3 of 4 15C12.11 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION OF FIBERGLASS STRUCTURES: All manholes shall be marked on the inside. The markings shall be permanent and include: a. Manufacturer's name or trademark b. Manufacturing Serial No. (Number to appear in report for identification) c. Total length and nominal diameter 15C12.12 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 15C12.12.1 Excavation: See Subsection 2B2 15C12.12.2 Trench Excavation Safety: See Subsection 2B2. 15C12.12.3 Manhole Preparation: Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline-powered circular saw with masonry blade. Do not use ax or other impact-type tools. 15C12.12.4 Handling: Do not drop or impact the manholes. Manholes shall be chocked if stored horizontally. If manholes must be moved by rolling, the ground traversed shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. When lifting manholes in horizontal position, use two slings with spreader bar. For lifting in vertical position, 3 lift lugs may be provided (recommended by manufacturer) at top of manhole. Only a pliable strap or rope should contact manhole; do not use chains or steel cables. 15C12.12.5 Backfill Material: See manhole detail shown on the drawings or Subsection 2B2 - Structural Excavation and Backfill. 15C12.12.6 Schedule of Backfilling: See Subsection 2B2 - Structural Excavation and Backfill. 15C12.12.10 Backfill: See Subsection 2B2 - Structural Excavation and Backfill. 15C12 Fiberglass Manholes Page 4 of 4 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15C - PROCESS PIPING AND FITTINGS 15C14\[1\] PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15C14.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 15C14.1.1 Scope: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to design and to provide hangers, supports, restraints and appurtenances for all piping systems complete and operational as shown and specified. 15C14.1.2 Specification Type: This is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15C14.1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Section 9K – Painting b. Section 15C2 – Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings c. Section 15C3 – Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings d. Section 15C5 – Installation of Process Piping e. Section 15C15 – PVC Duct and Fittings for Air Service 15C14.1.4 Quality Assurance: a. All supports and hangers shall be furnished by a manufacturer fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. All supports and hangers shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications. b. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. The Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (Latest update): a. MSS SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials and Design. b. MSS SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application. 2. Federal Specification, FS W-H-171, Hangers and Support, Pipe. 3. ASTM A 575, Merchant Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars. 4. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-203-Pipe Hanger Equipment. 15C14.1.5 Acceptable Products: Standard pipe supports and components shall be manufactured by Aickinstrut, B-Line, Carpenter & Patterson, Kin-Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Unistrut, or equal. 15C14.1.6 Submittal Data: The Contractor shall submit eight (8) sets of manufacturer’s catalogs, literature, and engineering data on all hangers, supports and restraints. 15C14.2 MATERIALS: 15C14.2.1 General: a. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories of the type indicated on the drawings and/or as required to properly support the piping to prevent sagging and as hereinafter described. The Contractor shall review the piping layout in relation to the surrounding structure and adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the type of support to be used at each hanger point. 15C14 Pipe Hangers & Supports Page 1 of 3 b. The equipment furnished under this Section shall be constructed of new material free from defects in workmanship and material quality. c. Hangers and supports shall withstand all static and specified dynamic conditions of loading to which the piping and associated equipment may be subjected. As a minimum, consideration should be given to the following conditions: 1. Weights of pipe, valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended hanger components, and normal fluid contents. 2. Reaction forces due to the operation of safety or relief valves. 3. Wind loadings on outdoor piping. d. Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe, tubing, or, where specified, the outside diameter of insulation. e. Install hangers or supports at all locations where pipe changes direction. There shall be a hanger within 2 feet of each elbow or tree. Provide additional supports at valves, strainers, etc. Ductile iron pipe shall have no less than one hanger per length of pipe. f. All hangers and supports to be capable of adjustment after placement of piping. Wall hangers shall have slotted bolt holes. Ceiling hangers shall have turnbuckles and floor supports shall have extended anchor bolts such that the support can be wedged to proper elevation and grouted. g. Each type of hanger or support to be the product of one manufacturer. Keep types of hangers or supports to a minimum. Stock hanger and support components shall be used wherever practical. h. The supporting systems shall provide for and control the free or intended movement of the piping including its movement in relation to that of connected equipment. Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location, hanger components shall be selected to allow for swing. The vertical angle of the hanger rod shall not, at any time, exceed 4 degrees. i. Provide a hanger or support adjacent to each hub on all suspended or supported cast iron pipe. j. All vertical risers shall be supported by riser clamps or supports at each floor and between floors at every 8 feet. k. Where negligible movement occurs at hanger locations, rod hangers should be used for suspended lines, wherever practical. For piping supported from below, bases, brackets or structural cross members should be used. Install hanger rods straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap or perforated bar hangers shall not be permitted. Do not suspend hangers from piping. l. Maximum support spacing, unless otherwise shown or approved for standard weight steel pipe, shall be: Pipe Size Spacing (inches) ( feet ) up to 1-1/2 6 2 through 3 10 3-1/2 and greater 12 m. Unless otherwise shown, maximum support spacing for plastic pipe at ambient temperature to be one-half of the values specified for steel pipe. n. Supports midway between expansion joints shall be rigid clamps allowing no vertical or horizontal movement. All other supports in lines with expansion joints shall be of the roller type with the roller contoured to the pipe outside dimension. Where the pipe is insulated, the roller type support shall be contoured to the insulation and protective saddle. o. Where proper hanger or support spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, structural steel channels may be attached to joists or ribs and pipes suspended therefrom. p. There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component of dissimilar metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when supporting copper tubing by use of copper- plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel hanger and support components. Isolate thin walled stainless steel piping from carbon steel used by use of plastic coated hangers or supports or by taping at points of contact with PVC or vinyl. q. Unless otherwise specified, hangers and supports shall be hot-dip after fabrication. Nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot-dip or 304 stainless steel. 15C14 Pipe Hangers & Supports Page 2 of 3 15C14.3 EXECUTION: 15C14.3.1 General: Restrain, block, brace, support, or suspend pipe and fittings as shown on the Drawings and as required to prevent displacement, vibration, sagging, warping, deformation, or failure of piping and fittings while allowing for expansion and contraction. 15C14.3.2 Hanger and Support Locations: a. The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports as near as possible to concentrated loads such as valves, flanges, etc. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within the maximum span lengths specified to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loads. b. There should be at least one hanger or support located within 2 feet from where pipe changes direction. c. The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment, tanks, etc., are substantially free from loads transmitted by the piping. d. Where piping is connected to equipment, a valve, etc., that will require removal for maintenance, the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary supports shall not be necessary. e. Pipe shall not have low spots formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings. 15C14.3.3 Installation: a. Install items to be embedded before concrete placement. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement during concrete placement. b. Install hangers and support units on piping systems as recommended by manufacturer. c. Hanger components shall not be used for purposed other than for which they were designed. They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes. d. Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp edges. Rollers shall roll freely without binding. e. Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC M011. Unless otherwise specified, there shall be no drilling or burning of holes in the building structural steel. f. Plastic or rubber end caps shall be provided at the exposed ends of all framing channels that are located up to 7 feet above the floor. g. The Contractor shall adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation. Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Stanchions shall be adjusted prior to grouting their baseplates. 15C14 Pipe Hangers & Supports Page 3 of 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15C - PROCESS PIPING AND FITTINGS 15C15\[1\] PVC DUCT AND FITTINGS FOR AIR SERVICE 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing the PVC duct and fittings required to complete the odor control piping. 1.02 SPECIFICATION TYPE This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The duct system, as shown on the plans, shall be used for the new odor control system. The odor control system will be responsible for eliminating the atmospheric H2S and other noxious odors found in the structures. Blowers shall pull air from the lift station for treatment at the Biofilter Odor Control Facility. All equipment and hardware shall be resistant to attack by chemicals that are expected to be found in this application. 1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15C14 Pipe Hangers and Supports 1.05 REFERENCES Fabrication shall be in general conformance with guidelines established by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) in their Thermoplastic Duct Construction Manual. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE The duct system shall be furnished by a manufacturer engaged in the production of the specific type of equipment for a minimum of 5 years. The manufacturer shall have furnished similar equipment for at least 5 other installations performing similar duty. Each previous installation shall have performed satisfactorily for at least 5 years and are still in operation. 1.07 SUBMITTAL DATA Before manufacturer, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a PDF of shop fabrication drawings showing details of materials, piping, fittings, couplings, joint locations and details, types and locations of supports and other data necessary to show conformance of the complete piping system to these specifications. Submittal drawings shall also show interfacing with equipment and appurtenances. 15C15 PVC Duct & Fittings For Air Service Page 1 of 3 2.0 MATERIAL 2.01 DUCT Duct shall be round and fabricated from rigid, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and shall have heat welded joints. Duct that is not extruded shall have fusion- welded, longitudinal seams. PVC material shall conform to ASTM D-1784. Type II, Grade I, high impact PVC is preferred, but Type I PVC is acceptable where applicable. CPVC material shall conform to ASTM D-1784. The duct shall be impregnated with UV inhibitor suitable for outdoor applications. The following minimum material thickness schedule shall apply to round duct: Duct Size Thickness 6" to 18" diameter 0.187" 20" diameter 0.219" 24" diameter 0.250" Reinforcing shall be per SMACNA guidelines. Duct may also be provided as Sch. 40 PVC. Joints may be glued using a clear, slow dry cement. 2.02 FLANGES Flanges shall be made of PVC angle material that is heat formed. Flat stock is used to make flanges for CPVC duct. All flanges are continuously back-welded to the duct. Bolt holes shall be no more than 3" to 4" apart on centers. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be 304 stainless steel. Gasket material shall be silicone sealant, a corrosion-resistant soft, mastic type, or 1/8" thick closed cell neoprene. 2.03 SLEEVES (COUPLINGS) Couplings shall be made from three (3) inch wide flat PVC material having a thickness at least as great as the wall thickness of the duct to be joined. Couplings shall be welded to one end of a duct section, leaving at least one-half of the sleeve length into which the adjoining duct section can slip. 2.04 ELBOWS Elbows shall have a centerline radius of at least 1.5 times the diameter wherever possible. Molded, seamless elbows shall be used whenever possible. Otherwise, ninety degree elbows and forty-five degree elbows are to have a minimum of three (3) gores. 2.05 BRANCHES Branches shall enter the main at no more than forty-five degree angle to the direction of flow. Branches shall be continuously welded to the main. 2.06 REDUCERS Reducers shall be tapered, cone-type only. Tapers shall change 1" in diameter for every 5" in length whenever possible. The cone shall be the same material thickness as the duct material. Transitions shall be concentric, unless noted otherwise. 2.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Duct shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 8 feet on centers. Duct shall be supported independently of other equipment. Hangers and supports shall be securely fastened to the building or 15C15 PVC Duct & Fittings For Air Service Page 2 of 3 structure. Material for clamp, hangers, and rod shall be sized in accordance with SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct Construction Manual. Unless otherwise specified, all hangers, rods, structural attachments, and other components of support systems for PVC duct shall conform to Section 15C14. 2.08 MARKING All duct pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, the nominal duct size, material designation and the date of manufacture. 3.0 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation shall be done in accordance with recognized industry standards, and with guidelines in the Thermoplastic Duct Construction Manual. Duct pipe system shall be installed true to alignment. Supports and hangers shall be provided as required to prevent sagging and to provide adequate support as specified in Section 15C14. All piping shall have a sufficient number of flanges and expansion joints to allow convenient removal of piping and to allow movement generated by expansion or contraction. All joining materials shall be supplied by the installing manufacturer. All joints shall be flanged or sleeved and made watertight. The sleeves may be either welded or cemented. Thermal welding shall be performed by personnel adequately trained in the art of PVC welding utilizing the hot gas fusion welding method using virgin PVC filler welding rod as manufactured for this purpose. when solvent cemented connections are utilized, the use of an extra heavy bodied PVC solvent cement and appropriate primer is recommended due to tolerance extremes that can be encountered when working with duct and fabricated duct fittings. Proper solvent cement jointing procedures shall be followed. Flanged joints shall be provided at all connections where dismantling may be required. Sleeved joints are preferred on all other field connections. Duct at field connections shall be provided with six inches of trim. Flanges shall be provided with one loose side to accommodate field adjustment. Field drilling of flanges will be required. Duct and debris shall be removed from inside the ductwork as it is installed. Temporary closures shall be used to prevent entrance of dust and debris until such time that all connections have been completed. 3.02 SHIPPING All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur in transit or during prolonged storage at the site. Each box, crate, or package shall be properly marked to show its contents and the net weight. 15C15 PVC Duct & Fittings For Air Service Page 3 of 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15D - PROCESS VALVES 15D3\[1\] PLUG VALVES 15D3.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the plug valves and accessories as required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 15D3.2 GENERAL: Plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric type. Flanged ends shall be faced and drilled to ANSI 125 lb. The valve shall be designed for a minimum 150 p.s.i. water working pressure service, and shall be capable of tight shut-off against 50 p.s.i. reverse pressure differential. Valves 6” and larger shall be provided with geared actuators conforming to AWWA C-504-87, Section 3.8. The valves shall have a flow area not less than 80% of the connecting pipe area. Seat end and standard flow direction shall be cast on the valve body. Provide position indicator for above ground valves. 15D3.3 CONSTRUCTION: 15D3.3.1 Body: Cast iron ASTM A-126 Class B in compliance with AWWA C-504-87, Sec. 2.2. 15D3.3.2 Plug: Resilient faced with neoprene or nitrile butadiene. The plug/seat interface shall be externally adjustable while the valve is in service and under pressure. 15D3.3.3 Seat: Nickel overlay (minimum 90% nickel) in compliance with AWWA C-507-87, Sec. 3.2 and AWWA C-504-87, Sec. 3.5. 15D3.3.4 Bushings: Stainless steel or bronze in compliance with AWWA C-504-87, Sec. 3.6. 15D3.3.5 Stem Seal: Adjustable, multiple ring Buna packing in compliance with AWWA C-507-87, Sec. 3.2 and C-504- 87, Sec.3.7. Stem seals shall be replaceable without disassembling the valve and while the valve is under system operating pressure. 15D3.3.6 Fasteners: All exposed fasteners for buried valves shall be stainless steel. Coat threads with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before assembly. 15D3.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES: 15D3.4.1 Above Ground: Valves installed above ground shall have flanged ends conforming to ANSI A21.15 and AWWA C- 115. All valves whose centerline is 6 ft. or greater above the floor shall be equipped with a chainwheel actuator and galvanized steel chain. 15D3.4.2 Below Ground: Valves installed below ground shall be wrapped with polyethylene and have mechanical joint connections conforming to ANSI A21.11 and AWWA C-111. All direct buried valves shall be equipped with a valve box and stem extension consisting of 8” SDR 18 PVC pipe and a cast iron drop- in cap. The stem extension shall have a 2" operating nut extended to within 6" of finished grade. All 15D3 Plug Valves Page 1 of 2 valves shall have a geared actuator suitable for buried service with necessary stem seals and gaskets to prevent entry of water into housing. 15D3.4.3 Valve Wrenches: When five or more buried valves are required provide two suitable tee wrenches. For above ground where handwheels or levers can not be used provide two wrench heads with suitable length of Schedule 40-pipe handle. All wrenches shall be painted as set out hereinafter. 15D3.5 PAINTING: 15D3.5.1 Valve Interior: Valve interior shall be coated with 4-6 mils of epoxy. 15D3.5.2 Valve Exterior: a. Above Ground Installation: See Section 9K. b. Under Ground Installation: Exterior of valve shall be coated by the manufacturer with a material suitable for underground service to protect against corrosion. 15D3.6 SUBMITTAL DATA: Before shipping, the Contractor shall submit six sets of detailed drawing, detailed specifications and installation instruction to the Engineer for approval. 15D3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer four sets of printed instructions, including a parts list, as required to provide proper operation and maintenance of the plug valves. 15D3 Plug Valves Page 2 of 2 26 01 26ELECTRICAL TESTING 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals of a NETA certified independent testing agency. Testing shall be inclusive of all medium voltage and low voltage equipment including conductors for the pump station. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and operation of the low and medium voltage equipment. 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE Independent testing agency shall be NETA certified. 1.03SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00, “Document Management” and shall include: A.EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation checks, operation and testing of the medium voltage equipment. This report shall certify that 1) the equipment has been properly installed, 2) is in accurate alignment, 3) meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the equipment manufacturer, and 4) NETA certification of the testing agency. B.ASSESSMENT REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing maintenance checks, operation and testing of the electrical equipment. The report shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. The report shall summarize the results of the analysis and include recommendations of equipment repair or replacement. The report shall also establish a timeframe to repair/replace equipment by giving a target date. 1.04STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Electrical Testing26 01 26 - 1 2.00EXECUTION 2.01GENERAL A.Perform all testing identified in the latest edition of NETA Standard for Accepting Testing Specifications B.All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative. Types of equipment required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the following: 1.Low voltage cables 2.Grounding 3.CT’s 4.Surge arresters 5.600V VFD’s C.All testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for energization and start-up of the equipment. D.Testing shall include a complete functionality testing of electrical equipment under all the different operating parameters identified by the OWNER and ENGINEER. E.Testing shall be in accordance with NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. F.The following is a listing of the major equipment test to be performed. 1.Low Voltage Cables a.Insulation - resistance test. 2.600V VFD’s a.Bolted Connections resistance test and torque verifications b.Operation and sequence testing for electrical and mechanical interlocks c.Perform ground system cable testing. 3.Surge Arresters a.Doble Test END OF SECTION Electrical Testing26 01 26 - 2 26 05 00COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B.This Section, as well as Division 01, incorporate to all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Electrical Contractors’ Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen, trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. B.Workmanship: Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit and motors shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from objectionable vibrations from all systems. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in PDF format with proposed items clearly marked. Unmarked submittals shall be rejected. Submittals shall include: 1.Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2.Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 3.Complete control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams. 4.Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications, the following information shall be included for motors: a.Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified. b.Make and motor type. c.Brake horsepower of the motor. d.Locked rotor current at full load. e.Motor efficiency at full load (three-phase motors only). f.Starting torque. g.Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (three-phase only). h.Speed of the motor at full torque. i.Full load current. Common Work Results For Electrical26 05 00 - 1 j.Service factor. k.Number of poles l.Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 C ambient. 1.04STANDARDS A.Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local Utility Companies Local Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B.Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. C.Contractor shall submit the company names of the electrical contractor with the bid documents. 1.05DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Follow the Manufacturer’s directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials. Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. Common Work Results For Electrical26 05 00 - 2 1.06JOB CONDITIONS A.Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B.The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed. The Contractor shall utilize approved manufacturer shop drawings for final layouts of equipment and raceways. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C.Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer’s review and approval. D.Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size, the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the owner. E.All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 4X, 304 Stainless Steel for exterior installations, NEMA 1 for indoor enclosures. 2.00EXECUTION 2.01INSTALLATION A.Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the roof, exterior walls and floors. B.Submit location drawings and obtain Engineer approval prior to installing conduit penetrations through slabs, beams, and walls. The complete installation shall be watertight and the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be maintained. C.Install steel reinforced concrete foundations, (housekeeping pads), below floor mounted switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, and other floor mounted electrical equipment. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4 inches high. Neatly chamfer top edges. Concrete foundations shall be 6 inches wider and 6 inches longer than the base of the equipment being installed. Concrete shall be in accordance with Division 03, and shall be reinforced with a minimum of 6-by-6-inch #6 welded wire mesh. 2.02CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. Common Work Results For Electrical26 05 00 - 3 2.03PAINTING A.Painting shall be in accordance with Division 09. Maintain the original factory finish on material and equipment installed, unless specifically indicated on the plans or specifications. If the finish is marred in transit or during installation, re-finish to a neat, workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment and raceway systems clean and free of grease, dirt, rust, and in a suitable condition for painting. 2.04EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A.Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner’s representative, utility companies and Owner’s facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B.Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C.Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D.All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants as existed. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day warranty on new turf and landscaping. E.Determine if irrigation systems exist prior to trenching and excavation. Obtain record or as- built drawings and locate control wiring and pressure main branches and devices. Determine by actual operation that systems are functional and repair or replace damaged systems to their original condition prior to beginning construction. 2.05ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 “Identification for Electrical Systems.” Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC, the local authorities, and as specified. Common Work Results For Electrical26 05 00 - 4 B.Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA 4X enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1.Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2.Spares shall be labeled “Spare”. 3.Each branch circuit panel - on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4.Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel - on outside of cover. 5.Each exhaust fan switch - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6.Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7.Each motor starter - on outside cover. 8.Each Variable Frequency Drive. 9.Outside light switches - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 10.Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C.Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as “Spare.” D.Refer to Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for conductor coding requirements. E.Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F.Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.06LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A.Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner’s locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.07ACCESS DOORS A.Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. B.Refer to Division 08 for access door requirements. Common Work Results For Electrical26 05 00 - 5 2.08CLEAN AND ADJUST A.Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.09TESTING A.See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Common Work Results For Electrical26 05 00 - 6 26 05 19LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600-volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical.” B.Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing: Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer’s recommended values. B.Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA and/or NRTL C.Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include: 1.Product Data for each type of product 2.Field Test / Quality Control Reports 3.Qualification Data for Testing Agency 1.04STANDARDS A.The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1.National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) Standards: Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and NEMA WC-3 Distribution of Electrical Energy Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and NEMA WC-5 Distribution of Electrical Energy 1.05DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. 2.00MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 2.01CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 19 - 1 A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division 2.Alpha Wire 3.Belden Inc. 4.Encore Wire Corporation 5.General Cable Technologies Corporation 6.Southwire Incorporated 7.Okonite Company (Preferred) B.Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. C.Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN, Type THWN, and Type XHHW or as indicated on the drawings. D.Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Tray Cable, Type TC with ground wire. E.Conductors: Soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be #12. F.Single Conductors: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. G.Ground Wire: Tinned, Class B stranded conductor without insulation H.Paired Shielded Cable: 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded, tinned copper conductors with 0.015-inch extruded PVC; 0.004-inch nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100 percent coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and 0.045-inch minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383. I.Triad Shielded Cable (RTD Cable): RTD cable shall have the following characteristics: 1.Eight triads each with three 18 AWG conductors 2. Triads shall each have individual shield and overall shield. 3.Each conductor insulated for 600 V and entire cable rated for 90 C. Primary Insulation 15 mils nominal; PVC; 4 mils nylon Number of Conductors 3 Color CodeBlack and white and red Group Identification Each triad numbered Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 19 - 2 100% coverage; .35 mil aluminum x .5 mil Mylar tape and 20 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire; shield tape to Pair Shield be applied to give a total shield isolation from all other triad shields. 100% coverage; 2.35 mil aluminum Mylar tape shield and Cable Shield an 18 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire. Jacket Black 90 C FR PVC J.Tray Cable: Type TC; multi-conductor cable specifically approved for the installation in cable trays, in accordance with NEC Article 340. Each cable conductor shall be insulated with THHN/THWN or XHHW type insulation rated at 600 volts. The individual conductors shall be twisted together and jacketed with a PVC outer covering containing a U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer, the number of conductors, size, insulation type, sun-resistance, and other pertinent information. K.Telephone Wire: Telephone station wire conductors shall be bare solid, annealed copper, 22 AWG insulated with high density polyethylene. Insulated conductors shall be twisted and assembled in a weather and flame resistant compound of polyvinyl chloride. Color coding shall be one red, one green, one yellow, and one black. The wire shall comply with REA Specification PE-20. 2.02CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2.Gardner Bender 3.Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4.Ideal Industries, Inc. 5.Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation 6.NSi Industries LLC 7.O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group 8.3M; Electrical Markets Division 9.Tyco Electronics / Raychem (Preferred) B.Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, Ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated. 2.03SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application. B.Comply with NFPA 70. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 19 - 3 3.00EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.02CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A.Feeders: Stranded Copper B.Branch Circuits: Stranded Copper 3.03CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A.Service Entrance: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway B.Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway C.Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway D.Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway E.Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC F.Exposed Branch Circuits: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway G.Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway H.Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC 3.04INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 2.Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed, wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 3.Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: a.Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable. b.Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 19 - 4 c.Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. d.Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. LA3- 23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). e.Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an “S” suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a “T” suffix. f.Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 4.Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is #12 AWG, except as specifically indicated on the plans. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 5.Color coding of cables shall comply with the local city codes. In the absence of a local color coding requirement, the following shall be used: a.For 480/277-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Neutral Gray Equipment Grounding Conductor Green b.For 208/120 or 240/120-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green c.For 240/120-V, 1-phase wiring: Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 19 - 5 6.Colored, vinyl marking tape shall be allowed only on conductors greater than 8 AWG. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. 7.Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. B.Single Conductors: Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. C.Paired Shielded and Triad Shielded Cable: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. D.Ground Conductors: 1.Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Wire connections to the ground rods of the ground mat shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 2.Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal and not an end bell. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt. 3.Ground wire shall be uninsulated tinned copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with insulation as specified for low voltage wire. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 19 - 6 26 05 19.01WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wire connections and devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1.600-volt connectors shall comply with the specifications and the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: a.Burndy. b.Thomas & Betts. c.Ideal Industries. d.Ilsco e.Gould Shawmut f.Allen Bradley g.Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with DIv 01 and shall include all applicable wire connectors and devices. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A.Connectors, Compression: For splicing and termination; 600-volt wiring; connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall be the long barrel type for double indentation (soldered connections shall not be permitted). B.Connectors, 600-Volt Twist-On: Spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration; may be used for No. 14 through No. 10 gauge conductors. C.Connectors, 600-Volt Terminal: Of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards; two holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 MCM or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. D.600-Volt Plastic Tape: Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company, No. 35. Wire Connections and Devices26 05 19.01 - 1 E.Wirenuts: Buchannan B-Cap, Ideal, ITT or Panduit spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering; shall be reusable after initial installation and removal. 3M Scotchloks shall not be installed on this project. F.Mechanical Set Screw Connector: Blackburn HPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. G.Rubber Tape: Scotch 2210. H.Vinyl Tape: Scotch 88. I.Insulating Resin: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. J.Power Distribution Blocks: Gould Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Insulate connections made with non-insulated connectors with a minimum of three layers of plastic tape. Half-lap each layer. B.Splice 600-volt conductors in junction boxes or at outlets only. C.For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3 feet above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that conductor and spring materials are encapsulated by the resin. Conductor splices and taps inside the VFD’s shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. D.For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3 feet above the finished grade, the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. E.Furnish and install power distribution blocks as shown on the plans for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. F.Pair shielded cable shield and triad shielded cable (RTD cable) shield shall be broken at terminal strips only. END OF SECTION Wire Connections and Devices26 05 19.01 - 2 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Submittal shall include: 1.Grounding materials, equipment and processes. 2.Product Data: For each type of product supplied. 3.Field quality-control test reports. 4.Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5.Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B.Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C.Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.04JOB CONDITIONS A.Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.Ground Rods: Copper-clad, having a diameter of 3/4 inch and a minimum length of 10 feet. B.Ground Cables: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98 percent conductivity and as specified in Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.” C.Conduit Ground Fittings: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp., type NE or Thomas & Betts No. 3951 series or approved equal. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems26 05 26 - 1 D.Ground Rod Boxes: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read “ground rod” on lid. Brooks Precast Model. “3-RT” or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO H-20 rating. E.Ground Plate Electrodes: 20 gauge copper with terminated 2-foot welded pigtail connection. 2.02PROCESSES A.All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. B.All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. C.All welding materials used shall be Cadweld Materials – as manufactured by ERICO Products, Inc., or approved equal. 2.03GROUNDING SYSTEM A.Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchor supports, thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1.Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors. 2.Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3.Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 4.Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. B.Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. C.Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12 inches below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. D.Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. E.Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems26 05 26 - 2 F.Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor in accordance with Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.” Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC. G.Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. H.Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1.Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 2.Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 3.Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4.Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. I.Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1.Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building’s main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2.Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3.Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. J.Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. K.Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1 foot to 1 foot-2 inches or larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. L.All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. M.Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems26 05 26 - 3 N.Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray section. Provide #4/0 bare copper in cable tray. O.Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner’s Representative. P.Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6 inches below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box. Q.Install #4/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main grounding system at both ends. R.At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of #12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. S.Signal and Communication Equipment: 1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2.Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 3.Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.02INSPECTION A.Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B.Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer’s recommendation using the fall of potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. C.All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. D.Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E.Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F.A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G.Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than the following values: 1.Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA or less: 5 ohms. 2.Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3.Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity more than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems26 05 26 - 4 4.Power Distribution Units or Panelboards serving electronic equipment: 1 ohm. 5.Substations and Pad Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6.Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. H.Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner’s Representative promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the resistance to required level. END OF SECTION Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems26 05 26 - 5 26 05 29HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install supporting devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”. B.Comply with NFPA 70. 1.03COORDINATION A.Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified together with Concrete Specifications. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include all applicable units, materials and appurtenances for the following: 1.Steel slotted support systems. B.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1.Trapeze Hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel Slotted Channel Systems. Include Product Data for Components. 3.Equipment Supports. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A.Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory fabricated components for field assembly. For this project, all steel supports shall be 316 stainless steel or aluminum materials where approved. 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Allied Tube & Conduit. b.Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c.ERICO International Corporation. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems26 05 29 - 1 d.GS Metals Corporation. e.Thomas & Betts Corporation. f.Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. (Preferred) g.Wesanco, Inc. 2.Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 3.Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard PVC, polyurethane or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4.Painted Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5.Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B.Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C.Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless Steel and aluminum hangers, clamps and associated fittings designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D.Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36A 36M, steel plates, shapes and bars; black and hot dipped galvanized. E.Mounting, Anchoring and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1.Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded- 316 stainless steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel or wood with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Hilti Inc. (Preferred) b.ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c.MKT Fastening, LLC. d.Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2.Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 316 stainless steel for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b.Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. c.Hilti Inc. (Preferred) d.ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e.MKT Fastening, LLC. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems26 05 29 - 2 3.Concrete Inserts: Stainless Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4.Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, stainless steel type suitable for attached structural element. 5.Through Bolts: 316 Stainless steel Structural type, hex head and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6.Toggle Bolts: 316 Stainless steel All-steel springhead type. 7.Hanger Rods: Threaded galvanized steel. 2.02FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A.Description: Welded or bolted, structural steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions and bare weight of supported equipment. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01APPLICATION A.Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B.Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall ¼ Inch in diameter. C.Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D.Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in the Article. B.Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C.Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200lb. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems26 05 29 - 3 D.Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1.To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2.To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3.To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4.To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5.Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete, 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6.To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7.To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8.Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate. E.Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A.Comply with installation requirements in Section (05 50 00 ?) “Metal Fabrications” for site fabricated metal supports. B.Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C.Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.04CONCRETE BASES A.Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than the supported unit and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base. B.Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive strength. Install concrete materials, reinforcement and placement requirements as per drawings and details. C.Anchoring Equipment to Concrete Base: 1.Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer’s setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded / mounted. 2.Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.Install anchor bolts in accordance with anchor bolt manufacturer’s written instructions. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems26 05 29 - 4 3.05PAINTING A.Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching-up field painted surfaces. 1.Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B.Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems26 05 29 - 5 26 05 33RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2.Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3.Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4.Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5.Surface raceways. 6.Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7.Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B.RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C.EMT: Electrical Metalic Tubing. D.RNC: Rigid Non Metallic conduit. E.LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit F.FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit 1.04ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, standard floor boxes, standard hinged-cover enclosures, and standard cabinets. B.Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.05INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 1 1.Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2.HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B.Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C.Source quality-control reports. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2.Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3.Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4.Electri-Flex Company. 5.O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6.Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7.Republic Conduit. 8.Robroy Industries. 9.Southwire Company. 10.Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11.Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12.Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13.Approved Equal B.Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C.RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D.ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E.IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F.PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1.Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2.Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 3.EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 2 G.FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. H.LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I.Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1.Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2.Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3.Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. J.Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2.Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3.Arnco Corporation. 4.CANTEX Inc. 5.CertainTeed Corp. 6.Carlon 7.Electri-Flex Company. 8.Kraloy. 9.Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10.Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11.RACO; a Hubbell company. 12.Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13.Approved equal. B.Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C.ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D.RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E.LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 3 F.Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G.Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B. H.Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. I.RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. J.Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. K.Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. L.Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). M.Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.03METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2.Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3.Mono-Systems, Inc. 4.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric – (Preferred). 5.Approved equal. B.Description: Stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized, or aluminum, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1.Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C.Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D.Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged-and- gasketed as indicated. E.Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 4 1.Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2.Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3.Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4.Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 5.Approved equal. B.Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C.Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with stainless steel captive screws. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D.Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E.Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F.Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G.Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.05BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Adalet. 2.Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3.EGS/Appleton Electric. 4.Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5.FSR Inc. 6.Hoffman; a Pentair company – (Preferred). 7.Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8.Kraloy. 9.Milbank Manufacturing Co. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 5 10.Mono-Systems, Inc. 11.O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12.RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13.Robroy Industries. 14.Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15.Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16.Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17.Wiremold / Legrand. 18.Approved equal. B.General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C.Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D.Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E.Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F.Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G.Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H.Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I.Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J.Gangable boxes are prohibited. K.Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1.Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3.Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01RACEWAY APPLICATION A.Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1.Exposed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 6 2.Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid Aluminum. 3.Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4.Underground Conduit Stub-ups to Equipment Pads, Concrete Floors or Other: Utilize Long Radius Sweeps for transition from underground ductbank to above ground. 5.Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6.Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X SS as indicated. B.Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1.Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 2.Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 3.Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 4.Exposed in Electrical Room: Rigid Aluminum C.Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer than 72”. D.Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1.Rigid Aluminum Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 2.Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E.Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F.Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G.Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B.Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C.Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D.Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E.Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 7 F.Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G.Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H.Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached or as otherwise dictated by Code. I.Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1.Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2.Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3.Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4.Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Engineer for each specific location. 5.Change from ENT to PVC coated RGS or Rigid Aluminum as per conditions before rising above floor. J.Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K.Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L.Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M.Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N.Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O.Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. P.Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q.Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 8 each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. R.Surface Raceways: 1.Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2.Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S.Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T.Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1.Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2.Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3.Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V.Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1.Install in each run of aboveground aluminum that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a.Revise list below to include all locations in Project with environmental conditions that require considering expansion-joint fittings in conduit runs. For each Project, consider only locations with PVC conduit with straight-run length exceeding 25 feet (7.6 m) or metal conduit in lengths over 100 feet (30 m). Also revise temperature change for each location so it safely represents conditions anticipated. Temperature-change figures below are examples of maximum total swings from the lowest to the highest environmental temperatures at the indicated types of locations and must be revised to represent temperature swings or changes that may occur at Project locations. b.Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. c.Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. 2.Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 9 contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3.Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4.Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W.Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1.Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2.Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X.Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y.Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z.Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA.Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure with stainless steel hardware. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.03INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A.Duct Bank – Install duct bank per drawing and details. B.Direct-Buried Conduit: Not Permitted for this Project 3.04INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A.Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B.Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C.Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D.Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E.Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 10 3.05SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.06PROTECTION A.Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1.Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2.Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems26 05 33 - 11 26 05 43UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2.Handholes and boxes. 1.03DEFINITION A.RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.04ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For the following: 1.Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2.Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement. 3.Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4.Warning tape. 5.Warning planks. B.Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following: 1.Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2.Reinforcement details. 3.Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4.Ladder details. 5.Grounding details. 6.Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7.Joint details. C.Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1.Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 1 2.Cover design. 3.Grounding details. 4.Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. 1.05INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1.Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings. 2.Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. B.Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858. C.Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. D.Source quality-control test reports. E.Field quality-control test reports. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B.Comply with ANSI C2. C.Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming. B.Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C.Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.08PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2.Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 1.09COORDINATION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 2 A.Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. B.Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to and handholes, and as approved by Architect. 1.10EXTRA MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B.Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01CONDUIT A.As per section 26 05 33 “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”. 2.02HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A.Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1.Color: Green. 2.First option in first subparagraph below facilitates bottom duct entry. Second option may be provided by a separate slab placed in the excavation under an open-bottom enclosure; third option is obtained by molding or fabricating the bottom integrally with the body of the unit. 3.Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 4.Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 5.Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6.Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." Or as indicated for each service. 7.Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8.Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. B.Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 3 1.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Armorcast Products Company. b.Carson Industries LLC. c.CDR Systems Corporation. d.NewBasis. e.Approved equal. C.Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Armorcast Products Company. b.Carson Industries LLC. c.Christy Concrete Products. d.Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. e.Approved equal. D.Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Carson Industries LLC. b.Christy Concrete Products. c.Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d.Approved equal. 2.03SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037. B.Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1.Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 4 2.Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A City provided qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3.Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION A.Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. B.Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. C.Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. D.Underground Ducts Crossing paved paths, walks, driveways, roadways or railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete. 3.02UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION A.Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring: 1.Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating. 2.Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. 3.Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. 4.Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading. 3.03EARTHWORK A.Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. B.Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed. C.Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 5 3.04DUCT INSTALLATION A.Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions. B.Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. C.Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D.Duct Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1.Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2.Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 3.Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. E.Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to- conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in F.Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure. G.Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. H.Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1.Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2.Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a.Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 6 b.If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 3.Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 4.Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5.Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6.Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts. 7.Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 8.Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 9.Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a.Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b.Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 10.Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally. 3.05INSTALLATION OF, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A.Precast Concrete Handhole Installation: 1.Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 7 3.Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 3.06INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A.Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer. B.Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C.Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D.Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. E.Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. F.For enclosures installed in asphalt paving or earth and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1.Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete," with a troweled finish. 1.Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep). 3.07GROUNDING A.Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.08FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. 2.Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 8 3.Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B.Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. 3.09CLEANING A.Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts. B.Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material. END OF SECTION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems26 05 43 - 9 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Round sleeves. 2.Rectangular sleeves. 3.Sleeve-seal systems. 4.Sleeve-seal fittings. 5.Grout. 6.Pourable sealants. 7.Foam sealants. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section. 1.2ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1ROUND SLEEVES A.Steel Wall Sleeves: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a.Flexicraft Industries. b.GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 2.General Characteristics: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends and integral waterstop. B.PVC Pipe Sleeves: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a.GPT; an EnPro Industries company. b.Metraflex Company (The). Sleeve s and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling26 05 44 - 1 2.General Characteristics: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40. C.PVC Molded Sleeves: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a.ABB, Electrification Business. b.American Polywater Corporation. 2.General Characteristics: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. D.Round, Galvanized-Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a.Specified Technologies, Inc. 2.General Characteristics: Galvanized-steel sheet; thickness not less than 0.0239 inch; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 2.2RECTANGULAR SLEEVES A.Rectangular, Galvanized-Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Specified Technologies, Inc. b.Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC. 2.General Characteristics: a.Material: Galvanized sheet steel. b.Minimum Metal Thickness: 1)For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inch and with no side larger than 16 inch, thickness must be 0.052 inch. 2)For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter not less than 50 inch or with one or more sides larger than 16 inch, thickness must be 0.138 inch. 2.3SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Advance Products & Systems, LLC. 2.American Polywater Corporation. 3.Flexicraft Industries. B.General Characteristics: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable or between raceway and cable. C.Options: Sleeve s and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling26 05 44 - 2 1.Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2.Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3.Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.4SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1.Holdrite; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. B.General Characteristics: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit must have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.5GROUT A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1.Specified Technologies, Inc. 2.W. R. Meadows, Inc. B.General Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors. 1.Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 2.Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3.Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade, Non-Fire-Rated, Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1.Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a.Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall or floor so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. b.Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 90 00 "Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking." 2.Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Sleeve s and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling26 05 44 - 3 3.Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless sleeve-seal system is to be installed or seismic criteria require different clearance. 4.Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5.Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inch above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. B.Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies: 1.Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2.Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for wall assemblies. C.Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. D.Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve-seal systems. Use PVC sleeves where subject to H2S corrossion. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. E.Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: 1.Install steel pipe sleeves with integral waterstops. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Install sleeve during construction of floor or wall. 2.Install steel pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Grout sleeve into wall or floor opening. 3.2INSTALLATION OF RECTANGULAR SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS A.Install sleeves in existing walls without compromising structural integrity of walls. Do not cut structural elements without reinforcing the wall to maintain the designed weight bearing and wall stiffness. B.Install conduits and cable with no crossings within the sleeve. C.Fill opening around conduits and cables with expanding foam without leaving voids. D.Provide metal sheet covering at both wall surfaces and finish to match surrounding surfaces. Metal sheet must be same material as sleeve. 3.3INSTALLATION OF SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A.Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. Sleeve s and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling26 05 44 - 4 B.Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. END OF SECTION 26 05 44 Sleeve s and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling26 05 44 - 5 26 05 53IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00GENERAL 1.01WORK INCLUDED A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B.Section Includes: 1.Identification for raceways. 2.Identification of power and control cables. 3.Identification for conductors. 4.Underground-line warning tape. 5.Warning labels and signs. 6.Instruction signs. 7.Equipment identification labels. 8.Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Comply with ANSI A13.1. B.Comply with NFPA 70. C.Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D.Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E.Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, are not acceptable. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: Identification for Electrical Systems26 05 53 - 1 1.Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 2.Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 3.Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 4.Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number (e.g. LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 5.Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an “S” suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a “T” suffix. 6.Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 2.02CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.03UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A.Tape: 1.Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications lines. 2.Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3.Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B.Color and Printing: 1.Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2.Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE 2.04WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A.Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B.Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C.Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Identification for Electrical Systems26 05 53 - 2 1.Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2.1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3.Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D.Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1.Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2.Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A.Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B.Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C.Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D.Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E.Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F.Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. G.Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A.Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. Identification for Electrical Systems26 05 53 - 3 1.Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a.Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG b.Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1)Phase A: Black. 2)Phase B: Red. 3)Phase C: Blue. 4)Neutral: White c.Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1)Phase A: Brown. 2)Phase B: Orange. 3)Phase C: Yellow. d.Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. B.Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1.Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2.Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. C.Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels 1.Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2.Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3.Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4.For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a.Power transfer switches. b.Controls with external control power connections. D.Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. E.Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. Identification for Electrical Systems26 05 53 - 4 1.Labeling Instructions: a.Indoor Equipment: stainless steel screws and nuts, engraved and laminated nameplates. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b.Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label c.Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d.Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2.Equipment to Be Labeled: a.Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be laminated acrylic or melamine label and placed in a clear plastic sleeve. b.Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c.Switchgear. d.Switchboards. e.Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f.Motor-control centers. g.Enclosed switches. h.Enclosed circuit breakers. i.Enclosed controllers. j.Push-button stations. k.Contactors. l.Monitoring and control equipment. m.UPS equipment. n.Junction and Pull Boxes. END OF SECTION Identification for Electrical Systems26 05 53 - 5 26 05 73ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 1.00GENERAL 1.01DESCRIPTION General: This section specifies that the CONTRACTOR prepare a short circuit and protective device coordination study, and an arc flash hazard analysis for the electrical power system as shown on the plans. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE ENERGIZED UNTIL THE POWER SYSTEM STUDIES HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, THE PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND BREAKERS HAVE BEEN SET PER THE SHORT CIRCUIT AND RELAY COORDINATION STUDY AND THE ARC FLASH LABELS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED ON THE EQUIPMENT. NO EXCEPTIONS. U Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis The studies shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the protective relays or devices and metering or motor monitoring devices for setting by the CONTRACTOR. The Studies shall include settings for all protective relays and electric system monitoring. The Contractor shall obtain any needed data or information for the electrical equipment from Contract Documents, various suppliers, and from conducting his own field investigations. A.Scope: 1.The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing all pertinent information necessary for the successful completion of the Short Circuit and Relay Coordination Study, and Arc Flash Analysis. All cable and raceway data, data from all new Switchgear, motor control centers, transformers, panelboards, and separately mounted fuses, starters or circuit breakers shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. Obtain all existing or new protective device information to include all present settings. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. The data obtained shall be organized and submitted to the ENGINEER to show that all the necessary data gathering work has been done. 2.Calculations shall utilize actual X/R and three phase short circuit values obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Electric Utility. The use of infinite bus fault current calculation is not acceptable. 3.The studies shall include both scenarios: under normal power. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 1 4.Provide a complete short circuit study. Include three phase and phase-to-ground calculations. Provide an equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project. Generic devices are not acceptable. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations that could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors identified as "standby" shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the electrical equipment busses. The Study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents available and system impedances as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Study is not acceptable. Study shall use actual motor X/R and subtransient reactance data obtained from equipment suppliers. 5.A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings. The study shall include all electrical equipment provided under this contract and any up-stream equipment that has an impact on the coordination study. The study shall show transformer damage curves, generator damage curves, cable short circuit withstand curves and motor curves. Include all medium and low voltage switchgear, distribution switchboards, motor control centers, starters, and panelboards main circuit breakers. Complete the short circuit study down to the main breaker or main lugs on all panelboards. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase over current and ground-fault protection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. All motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier’s equipment (such as soft starters, switchgear) shall be in included. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utility’s system feeding each facility being considered. 6.Provide Time-Current Curves on 11X17 log-log paper. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. Include a one-line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. Include motor and transformer damage curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. Coordination study time-current curves (11x17 log-log type) including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker. Organize the curves as specified here in. Ground fault time current curves shall be on a separate sheet. 7.An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panelboard level up to the main Switchgear or protective device. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 8.Provide arc flash hazard analysis in accordance with the applicable NFPA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. 9.The studies shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 10.Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 2 11.Use industry standard short circuit software, SKM CAPTOR and DAPPER or an equal approved by the ENGINEER. 12.The report shall include a comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting capacity of the equipment that is protecting that bus. 13.The report shall include all data that was used as input to the report. This data shall include cable impedance, conduit type, source impedance, equipment ratings, motor X/R and subtransient reactance data, etc. 14.The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Utility for electrical data required for the studies. 15.The studies shall include and model the different operating configurations that may be encountered. This includes different transformers operating individually with various main and tie breakers open and closed. The studies shall clearly identify the particular operating configuration being evaluated. 1.02REFERENCES A.This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. U Reference UU Title IEEE 141Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE 242Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems NFPA 70E Handbook for Electrical Safety in the Workplace IEEE 1584IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NECNational Electrical Code 1.03SCHEDULE A.The report shall be provided to the ENGINEER NO LATER THAN 60 days before the equipment is shipped to the Work site. SHIPMENT AND DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED AT THE JOBSITE UNTIL THE STUDY HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SUBMITTED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 1.04SUBMITTALS Submittals shall include: A.Shop Drawings: 1.Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log-log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. 2.Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 3 a.Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. b.Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1)Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a)Green to indicate a Category 0 b)Blue to indicate a Category 1 c)Brown to indicate a Category 2 d)Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e)Orange to indicate a Category 4 f)Red to indicate Above a Category 4 B.Provide PDF copies of the completed studies to be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Each hard copy of studies shall be bound in a 3-ring binder. C.The Contractor shall redo the Power System Studies if any changes are made during the field testing checkout and/or start-up. The Contractor shall submit the Power System Studies for Engineer Approval. The Studies shall include an updated copy of the color copy Arc Flash Labels. D.A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. 1.T wo Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. 2.00EXECUTION 2.01GENERAL A.Provide a short-circuit and relay coordination study load flow and motor starting study, and arc flash hazard analysis on the electrical power distribution system, as specified. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242, IEEE 1584, ANSI, and the NEC and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for all equipment. The coordination studies shall use the data from the manufacturer of protective devices. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 4 2.02QUALIFICATIONS A.The studies shall be performed by the by an electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. 2.03SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A.The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all data needed to perform the study. B.As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1.One-Line Diagram: a.Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct- acting trips, fuses, etc. b.Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c.Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. Use the ratings (ie. Impedence, X/R, etc.) of the actual transformers being provided where available. d.Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. e.Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their subtransient reactances. Transient reactances of synchronous motors and generators and synchronous reactances of all generators. Obtain data on the actual equipment being provided. Generic or average data numbers are not acceptable. f.Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation), and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. 1)Show short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus. Provide the same data in tabular from. g.All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc shall be included. h.The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, if applicable. i.One-Line showing available fault current at each bus all the way down to the 208Y/120V panelboards. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 5 2.Impedance Diagram: a.Available MVA or impedance from the utility company. b.Local generated capacity impedance. c.Bus impedance. d.Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e.Cable impedances. f.Equipment impedances. g.System voltages. h.Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solidly grounding, or no grounding). i.Motor contribution assuming the new and existing motors as shown on the plans all running at the same time. 3.Calculations: a.Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. b.Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. c.A discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment method of calculation and formulas used such that all calculations can be verified manually by the ENGINEER, with recommendations as required for improvements to the system. d.Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER and recommendation made for improvements. 2.04PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A.As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1.The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with aid of a digital computer. a.Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing, but still maintain a low incident energy level. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 2.Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. 3.Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4.Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5.Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6.Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.05ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A.The study shall be performed in accordance with the NEC and all applicable OSHA, ANSI, and IEEE standards. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 6 B.The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all adjustable time-current devices such that the trip settings lower the arc flash exposure and minimizing the clearing time. However, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust the time-current devices to avoid nuisance tripping. C.The CONTRACTOR shall utilize fault current values from the short circuit analysis to determine the Incident energy, limited approach boundary, restricted approach boundary, prohibited approach boundary and appropriate PPE required. D.The CONTRACTOR shall provide project specific arc-flash labeling. The arc-flash labeling shall be placed on the outside of the cover of the switchgear, motor control centers, combination motor starters, panelboard, switchboard, distribution panel, and all electrical panels, etc. such that it can be read without opening the electrical equipment. Mount arc-flash labels a maximum of 6’-6” AFF, include the housekeeping pad in the mounting height. The CONTRACTOR shall provide arc-flash labeling on all existing panelboards, switchboards, distribution panel, etc. where breakers are added or work is performed in or on the electrical equipment. E.Arc Flash Labels shall be chemical resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, scratch resistant, and made of 3.0 mil vinyl tape as manufactured by DuraLabel, Brady or approved equal. The lettering shall be performed by thermal transfer print. 1.Arc Flash labels and label lettering shall be sized large enough to be legible at a distance outside the hazard area. 2.Arc Flash Labels shall be placed on the door(s) of the room if the hazard area reaches or extends beyond the electrical room door(s). 3.The arc flash label shall include a DANGER header when the incident energy is above 2 40cal/cm, and a WARNING header for all other incident energy levels. F.To ensure a safe workplace, and that the labeling meets NEC, OSHA, IEEE, and NFPA requirements, use specialized arc flash software to calculate protection boundaries. These protection boundaries shall include the Flash Protection Boundary, Limited Approach Boundary, Restricted Approach Boundary and the Prohibited Approach Boundary. G.The arc-flash analysis shall be based on calculated fault from the Short Circuit Study at each respective bus. The arc-flash software program shall be used to calculate the available arcing fault at each bus in the system, the resultant flash protection boundary based on the applicable protective device operating times and the associated incident energy that workers may be exposed to at the specified working distances. H.The report shall include the following information: Arc-flash evaluation table, arc-flash and shock hazard label definitions, arc-flash evaluation information, arc-flash and shock hazard labels and definitions of terms used in the arc-flash hazard analysis. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 7 I.Arc Flash labels shall be similar to the following example: END OF SECTION Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 8 Attachment A SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST SPECIFICATION: 26 05 73.01 Electrical Power INSTRUCTIONS: 1.Prior to sending submittal fill out checklist and verify all of the following information is included and clearly identified by highlighting, circling or other method. The items below are the minimum required and the Engineer may require additional information. 2.Indicate any substitutions or deviations from the specification and provide additional information as required per Specification 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures.” 3.Sign form prior to submittal and include with submittal. Submittals provided without “Submittal Checklist” will be returned without review. CHECK BOX IF ITEM HAS BEEN ADDRESSED: 1. Provide Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study. Time current curves shall be on 11x17 log- log type paper. The CONTRACTOR can provide time current curves on 8 ½ x 11 log-log type paper as a supplement but not as a replacement. 2. Provide Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. 3. Provide a color copy of project specific Arc Flash labels for each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, disconnect, Motor Control Center, VFDs, starters, transfer switches, including all existing electrical equipment – switchgear, starters, motor control center, panelboards, starters, etc. 4. Provide a copy of the one-line diagram color-coded to show the incident ranges & clothing classifications at each bus. The one-line shall be on 11x17 paper and shall be separated out across three (3)-11x17 sheets. 1) Provide a table indicating the color coding used for each incident range & clothing classification. The one-line shall also include the information specified in section 2.03 below. The following is a recommended color coding for the following Hazard/Risk Category numbers: a) Green to indicate a Category 0 b) Blue to indicate a Category 1 c) Brown to indicate a Category 2 d) Yellow to indicate a Category 3 e) Orange to indicate a Category 4 f) Red to indicate Above a Category 4 5. A CD with all SKM input files and a PDF of all output files is required for both the preliminary and final power system studies submittals. Provide Two Software copies of actual power systems computer program project data files burned in on a CD. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy on a CD-ROM of all files used to develop the electrical system model in the power system analysis program and all files for the written study analysis and summary data tables. For instance if SKM software is used for the power system studies, then the SKM files shall be burned in on a CD-ROM and provided to the OWNER/ENGINEER. This shall include any library files used for circuit breakers, fuses, etc. for the power system analysis. Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 9 8. Provide letter of qualification for studies being performed by the electrical manufacturer/consultant service/electrical testing agency who is regularly engaged in power system studies. A Licensed Professional Engineer with proficiency in electrical power engineering shall conduct the studies and shall seal and sign the studies. The Professional ENGINEER shall be licensed to practice engineering in the State of Texas. A study submitted without a Professional ENGINEER’s seal will not be reviewed and returned Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit. CONTRACTOR NOTES/COMMENTS TO ENGINEER: STATEMENT: I have reviewed and certify that the submittal is complete and that the submittal is legible, accurate, and complete in a clear, easily understood manner. Signature: Date: Electrical Power System Studies26 05 73 - 10 26 22 00LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1.00GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1.Distribution transformers 2.Buck-boost transformers 1.03ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. B.Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.04INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Electrical Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following: 1.Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a.The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b.The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3.Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B.Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Source quality-control test reports. D.Field quality-control test reports. Low Voltage Transformers26 22 00 - 1 1.05CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.06QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B.Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. C.Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer. D.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E.Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 1.08COORDINATION A.Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast stainless steel anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete B.Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Acme Electric Corporation. Low Voltage Transformers26 22 00 - 2 b.Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c.Controlled Power Company. d.Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. e.Federal Pacific Transformer Company. f.General Electric Company. g.Hammond Co. h.Magnetek Power Electronics Group. i.Micron Industries Corp. j.Myers Power Products, Inc. k.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. l.Sola/Hevi-Duty. m.Square D Co./Groupe Schneider NA; Schneider Electric. 2.02GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A.Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B.Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C.Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1.Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2.Coil Material: Copper. 2.03DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A.Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B.Cores: One leg per phase. C.Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1.Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. D.Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1.Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray. 2.04ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 “Identification for Electrical Systems.” Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC, the local authorities, and as specified. B.Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch Low Voltage Transformers26 22 00 - 3 high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA 4X enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1.Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2.Spares shall be labeled “Spare”. 3.Each branch circuit panel - on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4.Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel - on outside of cover. 5.Each exhaust fan switch - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6.Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7.Each motor starter - on outside cover. 8.Each Variable Frequency Drive. 9.Outside light switches - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 10.Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point - custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C.Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as “Spare.” D.Refer to Section 26 05 19 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for conductor coding requirements. E.Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F.Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.05LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A.Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner’s locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.06ACCESS DOORS A.Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. B.Refer to Division 08 for access door requirements. Low Voltage Transformers26 22 00 - 4 2.07CLEAN AND ADJUST A.Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.08TESTING A.See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Transformers26 22 00 - 5 26 24 16PANELBOARDS 1.00GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Distribution panelboards. 2.Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3.Load centers. 4.Electronic-grade panelboards. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B.TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.04ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B.Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1.Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2.Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3.Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4.Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5.Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6.Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7.Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8.Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.05INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Panelboards26 24 16 - 1 A.Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B.Field Quality-Control Reports: 1.Test procedures used. 2.Test results that comply with requirements. 3.Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C.Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. 1.06CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1.Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2.Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.07MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2.Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3.Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4.Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.08QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B.Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C.Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Panelboards26 24 16 - 2 E.Comply with NEMA PB 1. F.Comply with NFPA 70. 1.09DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. Store inside building or enclosed storage unit. B.Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.10PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: 1.Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2.Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a.Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b.Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (2000 m). B.Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1.Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2.Altitude not exceeding 3300 feet (2000 m). C.Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2.Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3.Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.11COORDINATION A.Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Panelboards26 24 16 - 3 B.Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast stainless steelanchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 1.12WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A.Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1.Rated for environmental conditions at installed location unless ortherwise noted on the drawings. a.Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b.Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X 316 grade SS. c.Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316 grade SS. d.Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 2.Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3.Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4.Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5.Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6.Finishes: a.Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b.Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. c.Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7.Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. Card to be type written with circuit service. Hand written legends are not allowed. B.Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. Panelboards26 24 16 - 4 C.Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1.Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2.Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3.Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4.Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5.Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D.Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1.Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2.Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3.Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4.Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5.Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus. E.Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. F.Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. G.Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL. H.Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.02PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with UL 1449 SPD Type 1. 2.03DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2.General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Panelboards26 24 16 - 5 4.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) 5.Approved equal B.Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C.Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1.For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike. D.Mains: As indicated. E.Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. F.Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.04LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2.General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) 5.Approved equal. B.Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C.Mains: Circuit breaker. D.Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E.Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. F.Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2.05DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2.General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (Preferred) Panelboards26 24 16 - 6 5.Approved equal. A.Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1.Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2.Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3.Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a.Instantaneous trip. b.Long- and short-time pickup levels. c.Long- and short-time time adjustments. 2 d.Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and It response. 4.Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5.GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground- fault protection (6-mA trip). 6.Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7.Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. 8.Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a.Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b.Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c.Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d.Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. e.Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit B.Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. Panelboards26 24 16 - 7 1.Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. 2.Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with switch handle operation. 2.06ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A.Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B.Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. 3.00EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B.Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C.Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B.Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. C.Mount top of trim 72 inches (1828 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D.Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. E.Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1.Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F.Install filler plates in unused spaces. G.Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. H.Comply with NECA 1. 3.03IDENTIFICATION A.Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B.Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Panelboards26 24 16 - 8 C.Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D.Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C.Perform tests and inspections. 1.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D.Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1.Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2.Test continuity of each circuit. E.Tests and Inspections: 1.Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2.Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b.Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c.Instruments and Equipment: 1).Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. F.Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G.Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.05ADJUSTING Panelboards26 24 16 - 9 A.Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B.Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C.Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1.Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2.Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3.After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4.Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.06PROTECTION A.Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. Store in a building or eclosed storage unit unit ready for installation. END OF SECTION Panelboards26 24 16 - 10 26 27 26WIRING DEVICES 1.00GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2.Twist-locking receptacles. 3.Weather-resistant receptacles. 4.Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 5.Communications outlets. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B.GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C.Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D.RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E.TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F.UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.04ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: 1.Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2.Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 1.05ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 1.06INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Field quality-control reports. Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 1 1.07CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 2.00PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1.Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2.Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3.Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4.Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). B.Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A.Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B.Comply with NFPA 70. C.Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1.Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2.Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.03STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A.Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b.Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c.Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d.Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). 2.04GFCI RECEPTACLES A.General Description: 1.Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 2 2.Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3.Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B.Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper; VGF20. b.Hubbell; GFR5352L. c.Pass & Seymour; 2095. d.Leviton; 7590. 2.05TOGGLE SWITCHES A.Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B.Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Single Pole: 1).Cooper; AH1221. 2).Hubbell; HBL1221. 3).Leviton; 1221-2. 4).Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. b.Two Pole: 1).Cooper; AH1222. 2).Hubbell; HBL1222. 3).Leviton; 1222-2. 4).Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2. c.Three Way: 1).Cooper; AH1223. 2).Hubbell; HBL1223. 3).Leviton; 1223-2. 4).Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3. d.Four Way: 1).Cooper; AH1224. 2).Hubbell; HBL1224. 3).Leviton; 1224-2. Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 3 4).Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4. C.Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper; TWRBR15. b.Hubbell; DR15TR. c.LevitonTRW15. d.Pass & Seymour; TRW26252. 2.Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section, when installed in wet and damp locations. D.GFCI Non-Feed -Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper; VGF15. b.Hubbell; GF15LA. c.Leviton; 8599. d.Pass & Seymour; 1594. E.GFCI, Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper; TWRVGF15. b.Hubbell; GFTR15. c.Pass & Seymour; 1594TRWR. 2.Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. F.Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W- S-896. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way). b.Hubbell; DS115 (single pole), DS315 (three way). Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 4 c.Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way). d.Pass & Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way). 2.06FINISHES A.Device Color: 1.Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Engineer otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2.TVSS Devices: Blue. B.Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. 3.00EXECUTION 4.00INSTALLATION A.Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B.Coordination with Other Trades: 1.Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2.Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3.Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4.Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C.Conductors: 1.Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2.Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3.The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4.Existing Conductors: a.Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b.Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c.Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D.Device Installation: Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 5 1.Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2.Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3.Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4.Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5.When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6.Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7.When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8.Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9.When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E.Receptacle Orientation: 1.Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. F.Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 4.02GFCI RECEPTACLES A.Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles. 4.03IDENTIFICATION A.Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B.Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 4.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform the following tests and inspections\[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative\]: 1.Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2.Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. B.Tests for Convenience Receptacles: Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 6 1.Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2.Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3.Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4.GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5.Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6.Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. C.Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D.Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices26 27 26 - 7 ¸ ¸ ¸ 26 36 00AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 1.00GENERAL 1.1SUMMARY AThis section includes the following items from a single supplier: 1.Automatic transfer switch 2.Related Accessories as specified BRelated Requirements 1.It is the intent of this specification to secure an automatic transfer switch that has been prototype tested, factory built, production-tested, and site-tested together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings and specified herein. 2.Any exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval of the engineer and submitted minimum 10 days prior to the closing of the bid with a line by line summary description of all the items of compliance, any items that have been are omitted or have been taken exception to, and a complete description of all deviations. 3.It is the intent of this specification to secure an automatic transfer switch that has been tested during design verification, in production, and at the final job site. The automatic transfer switch will be a commercial design and will be complete with all of the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. The equipment supplied shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes and regulations. 4.All equipment shall be new and of current production by an international, power system manufacturer of generators, transfer switches, and paralleling switchgear. The manufacturer shall be a supplier of a complete and coordinated system. There will be single-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a factory-authorized representative with factory-trained technicians. 1.2SUBMITTALS AAction Submittals 1.Product Data a)The submittal shall include specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied; schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciator panel if it is included elsewhere in these specifications. 2.Shop Drawings BInformational Submittal 1.Certificates 2.Test and Evaluation Reports Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 1 3.Manufacturer’s Instruction 4.Source Quality Control Submittals 5.Field or Site Quality Control 6.Manufacturer’s Report 7.Special Procedure Submittal 8.Qualification Statement 9.Operation And Maintenance Data 10.Warranty Documentation 11.Record Documentation CMaintenance Material Submittals 1.Literature 2.Spare Parts 3.Extra Stock Materials 4.Tools 1.3QUALITY ASSURANCE ARegulatory Agency 1.The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: a)UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment b)IEC 947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear; Multifunction equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. c)NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code d)NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities e)NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems f)IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications g)NEMA Standard ICS 10-2005, Electromechanical AC Transfer Switch Equipment. h)EN61000-4-4 Fast Transient Immunity Severity Level 4 i)EN61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Class 4 (voltage sensing and programmable inputs only) j)IEEE 472 (ANSI C37.90A) Ring Wave Test k)IEC Specifications for EMI/EMC Immunity (CISPR 11, IEC 1000-4-2, IEC 1000-4-3, IEC 1000-4-4, IEC 1000-4-5, IEC 1000-4-6, IEC 1000-4-8, IEC 1000-4-11) l)CSA C22.2 No. 178 certification 2.Qualifications Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 2 a)The automatic transfer switch shall be produced by a manufacturer who is ISO 9001 certified for the design, development, production and service of its complete product line. b)A manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 10 years and who maintains a service organization available twenty-four hour a day throughout the year shall produce the automatic transfer switch. 3.Manufacturers a)The automatic transfer switch shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and testing of the complete system. The entire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. b)The manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of employing personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The Service center’s personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. c)The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years. 4.Suppliers a)The supplier of the generator shall also be the supplier of the transfer switch. Acceptable manufacturers are still responsible for meeting all requirements of this spec: 1.ASCO 2.Generator supplier 3.Approved equal 1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ADelivery and Acceptance Requirements BStorage and Handling Requirements CPackaging Waste Management 1.5SITE CONDITIONS AAmbient Conditions 1.Automatic transfer switch shall operate in the following conditions without any damage to the unit or its loads. a)Ambient Temperature: -4 to 158 Degrees F b)Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% noncondensing Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 3 BExisting Conditions 1.6WARRANTY OR BOND AManufacturer’s Warranty 1.The ATS shall include a standard warranty covering five (5) years to guarantee against defective material and workmanship in accordance with the manufacturer's published warranty from the date of initial startup. Labor, travel and parts shall be included for the duration of this warranty. 2.The ATS manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a 24-hour parts and service organization. This organization shall regularly engage in maintenance contract programs to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment similar to that specified. A service agreement shall be available and shall include system operation under simulated operating conditions; adjustment to the generator set, transfer switch, and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and functional tests performed on all systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1EQUIPMENT AEquipment 1.Furnish and install an automatic transfer switches system(s) with ratings indicated on drawings, Solid Neutral, 60Hz. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an inherently double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer. B Construction 1.The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held with double throw construction, and operated by a momentarily energized solenoid-driven mechanism. 2.All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and commonality of parts. 3.The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentarily outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. 4.All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts. 5.Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 800 amperes and higher shall have front removable and replaceable Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 4 contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars. 6.Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources, are not acceptable. 7.For two and three pole switches, where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the plans, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided. 8.For four pole switches with a switching neutral, where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the plans, the contactor shall be provided with fully rated switched neutral transfer contacts. Overlapping neutral contacts may be used as an alternative. 9.Automatic transfer switch shall be open transition transfer switch. CEnclosure 1.The ATS shall be furnished open style to be mounted in Motor Control Center as indicated on drawings. 2.All standard door mounted switches and indicating LEDs shall be integrated into a flush- mounted, interface membrane or equivalent in the enclosure door for easy viewing & replacement. The panel shall be capable of having a manual locking feature to allow the user to lockout all membrane mounted control switches to prevent unauthorized tampering. This cover shall be mounted with hinges and have a latch that may be padlocked. The membrane panel shall be suitable for mounting by others when furnished on open type units. 2.2OPERATION AOperators BControls 1.A four line, 20 character LCD display and dynamic 4 button keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and control through the communications interface port or USB. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via a password protected programming on the controller: aNominal line voltage and frequency bSingle or three phase sensing cOperating parameter protection dTransfer operating mode configuration (Standard transition, Programmed transition, or Closed transition) CVoltage and Frequency Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 5 1.Voltage (all phases) and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources shall be continuously monitored. Voltage on both normal and emergency sources and frequency on the emergency sources shall be adjustable with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified): a)Parameter Dropout/Trip Pickup/Reset b)Under voltage 75 to 98% 85 to 100% c)Over voltage 06 to 135% 95 to 100% of trip d)Under frequency 95 to 99% 80 to 95% e)Over frequency 01 to 115% 105 to 120% f)Voltage unbalance 5 to 20% 3 to 18% 2.Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating temperature range of -20°C to 70°C. 3.An adjustable dropout time for transient voltage and frequency excursions shall be provided. The time delays shall be 0.1 to 9.9 seconds for voltage and .1 to 15 seconds for frequency. 4.Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad, remotely via the communications interface port or USB. 5.The controller shall be capable of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or BAC). Unacceptable phase rotation shall be indicated on the LCD; the service required LED and the annunciation through the communication protocol and dry contacts. In addition, the phase rotation sensing shall be capable of being disabled, if required. 6.The controller shall be capable of detecting a single phasing condition of a source, even though a voltage may be regenerated by the load. This condition is a loss of phase and shall be considered a failed source. 7.Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases (phase to phase and phase to neutral), frequency, and phase rotation. DTime Delays 1.An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 12 or 24 VDC power supply. 2.A time delay shall be provided on transfer to the emergency source, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency. 3.A time delay shall be provided on re-transfer to normal. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. 4.A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 6 5.A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive external relay(s) for selective load disconnect and reconnect control. The controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 9 individual output time delays to step loads on after a transfer occurs. Each output may be individually programmed for their own time delay of up to 60 minutes. Each sequence shall be independently programmed for transferring from normal to emergency and transferring from emergency to normal. 6.All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments. 7.All time delays shall be adjustable by using the display and keypad, with a remote device connected to the communications interface port or USB. 8.Each time delay shall be identified and a dynamic countdown shall be shown on the display. Active time delays can be viewed with a remote device connected to the communications interface port or USB. EAdditional Features 1.The controller shall have 3 levels of security. Level 1 shall allow monitoring of settings and parameters only. The Level 1 shall be capable of restricted with the use of a lockable cover. Level 2 shall allow test functions to be performed and Level 3 shall allow setting of all parameters. 2.The display shall provide for the test functions, allowed through password security. The test function shall be load, no load or auto test. The auto test function shall request an elapsed time for test. At the completion of this time delay the test shall be automatically ended and a retransfer sequence shall commence. All loaded tests shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. 3.A contact closure shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. 4.Auxiliary contacts shall be provided consisting of a minimum of two contacts, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and two contacts closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source. 5.LED indicating lights shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red). 6.LED indicating lights shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal (green) and emergency sources (red), as determined by the voltage, frequency and phase rotation sensing trip and reset settings for each source. 7.A membrane switch shall be provided on the membrane panel to test all indicating lights and display when pressed. 8.Provide the ability to select “commit/no commit to transfer" to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load. 9.Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which closes to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 7 through the keypad, communications interface port or USB. A “not-in-auto" LED shall indicate anytime the controller is inhibiting transfer from occurring. 10.An in-phase monitor shall be a standard feature in the controller. The monitor shall control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents, and shall not require external control of power sources. The in-phase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the ATS manufacturer. The in- phase monitor shall be capable of being enabled or disabled from the user interface, communications interface port or USB. 11.A time based load control feature shall be available to allow the prioritized addition and removal of loads based during transfer. This feature may be enabled for either or both sources. The user shall be able to control up to nine loads with independent timing sequences for pre and post transfer delays in either direction of transfer. 12.The controller shall provide 2 inputs for external controls that can be programmed from the following values: aCommon fault, Remote test, Inhibit transfer, Low battery voltage, Peak shave, Time delay bypass, Load shed forced to OFF position (Programmed transition only) 13.The controller shall provide two form "C" contact outputs rated for up to 12A @ 240VAC or 2A @ 480VAC that can be programmed from the following values: aAux switch open, Transfer switch aux contact fault, Alarm silenced, Alarm active, I/O communication loss, Contactor position, Exercise active, Test mode active, Fail to transfer, Fail to acquire standby source, Source available, Phase rotation error, Not in automatic mode, Common alarm, In phase monitor sync, Load bank control active, Load control active, Maintenance mode active, Non-emergency transfer, Fail to open/close, Loss of phase, Over/under voltage, Over/under frequency, Voltage unbalance, Start signal, Peak shave active, Preferred source supplying load, Standby source supplying load 14.The controller shall be capable of expanding the number of inputs and outputs with additional modules. 15.Optional input/output modules shall be furnished which mount on the inside of the enclosure to facilitate ease of connections. 16.Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to 21 different exercise routines based on a calendar mode. For each routine, the user shall be able to: a)Enable or disable the routine b)Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine. c)Set the start time, time of day, day of week, week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every) d)Set the duration of the run. e)At the end of the specified loaded exercise duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. All loaded exercises shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the standby source fails. The next exercise period shall be displayed on the main screen with the type of exercise, time and date. The type of exercise and the time remaining shall be display when the exercise is active. It shall be possible of ending the exercise event with a single button push. Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 8 17.Date and time - The date shall automatically adjust for leap year and the time shall have the capability of automatically adjusting for daylight saving and standard times. 18.System Status - The controller shall have a default display the following on: a)System status b)Date, time and type of the next exercise event c)Average voltage of the preferred and standby sources d)Scrolling through the displays shall indicate the following: I.Line to line and line to neutral voltages for both sources II.Frequency of each source III.Load current for each phase IV.Single or three phase operation V.Type of transition VI.Preferred source VII.Commit or no commit modes of operation VIII.Source/source mode IX.In phase monitor enable/disable X.Phase rotation XI.Date and time 19.Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display “coded" system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator’s manual, are not permissible. 20.Self-Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed. 21.Communications Interface - The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through a standard communications with a network of transfer switches and generators. It shall be able to be connected via an RS-485 serial communication (up to 4000 ft. direct connect or multi-drop configuration). This module shall allow for seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices and generators. 22.The controller shall contain a USB port for use with a software diagnostic application available to factory authorized personnel for downloading the controller’s parameters and settings; exercise event schedules; maintenance records and event history. The application can also adjust parameters on the controller. 23.Data Logging - The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 2000 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory. The controller shall be able to display up to the last 99 events. The remaining events shall be accessible via the communications interface port or USB. a)Event Logging 1. Data, date and time indication of any event b)Statistical Data 1. Total number of transfers* 2. Total number of fail to transfers* Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 9 3. Total number of transfers due to preferred source failure* 4. Total number of minutes of operation* 5. Total number of minutes in the standby source* 6. Total number of minutes not in the preferred source* 7. Normal to emergency transfer time 8. Emergency to normal transfer time 9. System start date 10. Last maintenance date 11.The statistical data shall be held in two registers. One register shall contain data since start up and the second register shall contain data from the last maintenance reset. 24.External DC Power Supply - An optional provision shall be available to connect up to two external 12/24 VDC power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control indicators to remain functional when both power sources are dead for extended periods of time. This module shall contain reverse battery connection indication and circuit protection. 2.3SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ATest and Inspection 1.Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification. 2.The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001. BNon-Conforming Work CManufacturer’s Services DCoordination of Other Tests and Inspections 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1INSTALLATION A.Unit shall be mounted as indicated on drawings. 3.2CONNECTIONS B.Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. C.Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 10 D.Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3FIELD QUALITY CONTROL E.Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. F.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. G.Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1.After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2.Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3.Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a.Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b.Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. 4.After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a.Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b.Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c.Verify time-delay settings. d.Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e.Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. H.Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections: 1.After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2.Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3.Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 11 a.Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b.Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c.Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d.Perform manual transfer operation. 4.After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a.Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b.Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c.Verify time-delay settings. d.Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e.Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations. f.Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. g.Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool- down and shutdown. 5.Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a.Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. I.Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. J.Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. K.Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. L.Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4DEMONSTRATION M.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. N.Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. O. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system as specified in Section 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Generator. Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 12 END OF SECTION Automatic Transfer Switches26 36 00 - 13 26 64 19MOTOR- CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2SUMMARY A.Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components: 1.Incoming main lugs and OCPDs. 2.Full-voltage magnetic controllers. 3.Feeder-tap units. 4.TVSS. 5.Instrumentation. 6.Auxiliary devices. 1.3DEFINITIONS A.BAS: Building automation system. B.CE: Conformite European (European Compliance). C.CPT: Control power transformer. D.EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E.GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupting. F.IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. G.LAN: Local area network. H.LED: Light-emitting diode. I.MCC: Motor-control center. J.MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. K.MCP: Motor-circuit protector. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 1 L.NC: Normally closed. M.NO: Normally open. N.OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. O.PCC: Point of common coupling. P.PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. Q.PT: Potential transformer. R.PWM: Pulse-width modulated. S.RFI: Radio-frequency interference. T.SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier. U.TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. V.THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand. W.TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC. Include shipping and operating weights, features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B.LEED Submittals: 1.Product Data for Credit EA 5: For continuous metering equipment for energy consumption. C.Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1.Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a.Each installed unit's type and details. b.Factory-installed devices. c.Enclosure types and details. d.Nameplate legends. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 2 e.Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure and each unit. f.Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices. g.Specified optional features and accessories. 2.Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: Forpower, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. 3.Nameplate legends. 4.Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5.Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. D.Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. E.Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. F.Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. G.Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. H.Product Certificates: For each MCC, from manufacturer. I.Source quality-control reports. J.Field quality-control reports. K.Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1.Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both. 2.Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 3.Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4.Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced- voltage, solid-state controllers. 5.Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 6.Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 3 L.Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. M.Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. N.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing shall be as per NETA standards. B.Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer. C.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D.Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths. B.Handle MCCs according to the following: 1.NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts." 2.NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers." C.If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per vertical section. 1.7PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1.Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 4 2.Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C). 3.Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 4.Altitude: Exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC includes solid-state devices. B.Interruption of Existing Electrical Service or Distribution Systems: Do not interrupt electrical service to, or distribution systems within, a facility occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2.Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3.Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 4.Comply with NFPA 70E. C.Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for MCCs, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and other items. 1.8COORDINATION A.Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast or drill and epoxy stainless steel anchor- bolts. B.Coordinate features of MCCs, installed units, and accessory devices with remote pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. C.Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each MCC, each controller, and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuits, motors, required control sequences, and duty cycle of motors and loads. 1.9WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace TVSS that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10EXTRA MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 5 1.Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 2.Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 3.Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 4.Power Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1MANUFACTURED UNITS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Eaton Electrical Inc.. 2.Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. 3.Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.; Power Distribution. 4.Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B.General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845. 2.2FUNCTIONAL FEATURES A.Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of MCC. B.Controller Units: Combination controller units. 1.Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. 2.Equip units in Type B and Type C MCCs with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections. C.Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 6 D.Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units. E.Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare." 2.3INCOMING MAINS A.Incoming Mains Location: Bottom or as indicated on contract drawings. B.Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1.Material: copper. 2.Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. C.MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1.Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2.Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3.Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a.Instantaneous trip. b.Long- and short-time pickup levels. c.Long- and short-time time adjustments. 2 d.Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and It response. 4.Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5.Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. 6.MCCB Features and Accessories: a.Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b.Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. c.Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d.Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e.Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 7 f.Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. g.Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. h.Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. D.Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker: 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current. 1. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting. 2.Two-step, stored-energy closing. 3.Standard-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings: a.Instantaneous trip. b.Long- and short-time time adjustments. 2 c.Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and It response. 4.Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. 5.Remote trip indication and control. 2.4COMBINATION CONTROLLERS A.Full-Voltage Controllers: 1.General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. 2.Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. a.Configuration: Nonreversing. B.Disconnecting Means and OCPDs: 1.MCP Disconnecting Means: a.UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. b.Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. c.Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d.NC alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e.Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 8 2.MCCB Disconnecting Means: a.UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b.Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. c.Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d.Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e.NC alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. 3.Molded-Case Switch Disconnecting Means: a.UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with in-line fuse block for Class J or L power fuses (depending on ampere rating), providing an interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only. b.Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. c.Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with molded-case switch handle. d.NC alarm contact that operates only when molded-case switch has tripped. C.Overload Relays: 1.Bimetallic Overload Relays: a.Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c.Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d.Ambient compensated. e.Automatic resetting. D.Control Power: 1.Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT control power source of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a.CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA. 2.5TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES A.Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid- state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 9 suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the MCC short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1.Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2.Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3.Integral disconnect switch. 4.Redundant suppression circuits. 5.Redundant replaceable modules. 6.Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7.LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8.Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9.Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one NO and one NC, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 10. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. B.Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase. Retain "Withstand Capabilities" Paragraph below for MCCs located at or near Category C locations. C.Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. D.Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1.Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2.Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3.Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2.6MCC CONTROL POWER A.Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from CPT. B.Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied from remote branch circuit. C.Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two CPTs in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each CPT at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. D.Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 10 E.Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. 2.7ENCLOSURES A.Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. B.Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. 1.Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating. 2.Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking. C.Compartments: Modular; individual lift-off doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device. D.Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. E.Wiring Spaces: 1.Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place. 2.Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place. 2.8AUXILIARY DEVICES A.General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1.Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type. a.Push Buttons: Recessed types; momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. b.Pilot Lights: LED types; RED RUN; GREEN STOPPED; push to test. c.Selector Switches: Rotary type. 2.Elapsed-Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; nonresettable. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 11 3.Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy with selector switches having an off position. B. Reversible NC/NO contactor auxiliary contact(s). C.Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. D.Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. E.Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures. 2.9CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS A.Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. B.Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V, three phase, three wire. C.Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated; 65 kA. D.Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 65 kA. E.Environmental Ratings: 1.Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. 2.Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C) 3.Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). F.Main-Bus Continuous Rating: as noted on drawings. G.Vertical-Bus Minimum Continuous Rating: 300 A. H.Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating. I.Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions. J.Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units. K.Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs: Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 12 1.Main Devices: Fixed mounted. 2.Controller Units: Drawout mounted. 3.Sections front and rear aligned. L.Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic MCC. M.Pull Box on Top of an MCC: 1.Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as MCC. 2.Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3.Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily removable for drilling and cutting. 4.Insulated bottom of fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into MCC. 5.Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables, including those for future installation. 6.Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness. N.Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit. O.Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C. P.Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for OCPDs and other components including instruments and instrument transformers. 2.10SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.MCC Testing: Inspect and test MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18. B.MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C.Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 13 C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2INSTALLATION A.Coordinate layout and installation of MCCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B.Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2.For supported equipment, install stainless steel anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3.Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4.Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C.Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D.Install fuses in each fusible switch. E.Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. F.Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. G.Comply with NECA 1. 3.3IDENTIFICATION A.Comply with requirements in Division 26 05 53 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring. 1.Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2.Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 3.Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 4.Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 14 B.Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs. 3.4CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A.Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. B.Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1.Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2.Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5CONNECTIONS A.Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 26 05 33 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B.Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.6FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C.Perform tests and inspections. 1.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D.Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1.Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2.Test continuity of each circuit. E.Tests and Inspections: Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 15 1.Test system in de-energized state as recommended by manufacturer. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2.Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3.Test continuity of each circuit. 4.Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5.Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6.Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7.Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8.Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b.Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c.Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9.Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 10.Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. F.Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G.Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.7STARTUP SERVICE A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform Perform startup service. 1.Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 16 3.8ADJUSTING A.Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. B.Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C.Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings. 3.9PROTECTION A.Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B.Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.10DEMONSTRATION A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION Motor Control Center26 64 19 - 17 40 39 80 PUMP CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 1WORK INCLUDED A.This section Includes: 1.Pump controls B. Covers the furnishing and installation of controls, including all devices, accessories and appurtenances required for proper operation of the control equipment. This section is supplemented by Division 26 Electrical. Also supplementing this section are the drawings which indicate locations and arrangement of equipment. The drawings also provide one- lines and schematics regarding connection and interaction with other equipment. 1.2COORDINATION Controls equipment supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and specifications. All equipment shall be applied in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the device manufacturer and the related equipment manufacturer. Review of drawings submitted prior to the final determination of related equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from supplying systems in full compliance with the specific requirements of the related equipment. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrument/control devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other specifications associated with this project. Installation drawings shall be prepared for interconnecting wiring between the related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. 1.3RESPONSIBILITY The pump controls shall be provided and installed by the Contractor or his appointed subcontractors. The services of the controlled equipment supplier's technical representative shall be provided as necessary to calibrate, test, and advise others of procedures for adjustment and operation. 1.4SUBMITTAL DATA The following data shall be submitted for approved to the Engineer prior to fabrication or assembly of the pump controls. Partial submittals of drawings or data will not be acceptable. No part of the control system shall be fabricated, assembled or shipped to the jobsite until the submittal data has been approved by the Engineer. 1.Outline drawings showing equipment arrangement, dimensions and weight. 2.Descriptive bulletins and catalog information on all components sufficient for the Engineer to determine whether the proposed item is in compliance with the drawings and specifications. Pump Controls40 39 80 - 1 3.Schematic diagrams showing all breakers, switches, relays, etc. The diagrams shall also show all equipment sizes and ratings and for each control circuit showing device and terminal block numbers and all wire numbers. 5.Wiring diagram showing the relative physical location of all items in the back panel and all interconnecting wiring between devices. The wiring diagrams shall also show the identification of all device terminals, terminal blocks and wires, 6.Interconnection diagrams shall be furnished by the supplier of the control panels. These drawings shall show the interconnection field wiring between the control panel and any remote equipment, panels, devices, etc. The interconnection drawings shall show the termination of this wiring both at the back panel and at the remote location. These drawings shall also show wire numbers, terminal block numbers, wire groupings in conduits and conduit numbers corresponding to those used on the plan drawings. 7.Material list - listing the quantity, manufacturer, rating, type, and manufacturer’s catalog number of all components in the panel. PART2.0MATERIALS 2.01.CONTROL COMPONENTS 1.PLC as specified in section 40 94 43 Programmable Logic Controllers. 2.Lift Pump Control Panel Devices: 1.PLC 2.Breakers/Fuses 3.Auxiliary Relays 4.Mini Cas Relays (By pump provider) 5.24VDC Power Supply 6.Graphic Operator Interface 7.Surge Protection 8.Fused Terminals 9.Network devices 10.Wireway, wire management 11.Name Plates as required 12.Field wiring terminal blocks 3.Control Devices: All required control devices shall be furnished and installed as specified herein. All selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights, etc., for non- hazardous service shall be heavy duty, corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001, type SK or equal. Push- buttons shall be extended guard type. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test, transformer type. Pump Controls40 39 80 - 2 4.Circuit Breakers: Control and accessory circuits 240 volt and less shall be molded case circuit breakers for short circuit protection and switching. Breakers shall be U.L. listed for 120/240 volts with 10000 A.I.C. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. 5.Provide a separate D.C. power supply providing regulated D.C. power sources. Power supplies shall be sized to source all panel and field hardware burden plus fifty percent. Input of all power supplies shall be protected with DIN-rail mounted circuit breakers sized for 125% of Load. In no case shall any AC or DC power supply output exceed 10 Amperes. Power supplies/converters shall have an input to output efficiency rating exceeding 85%. Power supplies shall have an operating temperature range of -20 to 70 C. The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices or power supplies necessary to obtain proper operation of the supervisory control system or instrumentation from these energy sources shall be provided with the control panels. 5.Control Relays: Relays for 120 and 24 volt circuits shall be industry standard plug-in type with tube type connectors. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps resistive, continuous. An internal light shall be provided to indicate relay energization. Relay sockets shall be the single-tier type. 6.Wiring: Controls shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired. The supplier shall thoroughly test the control system and level control system for proper operating sequence under all conditions before shipment of the panel to the job site. Control wiring shall be stranded copper, #14 AWG minimum size. Power wiring shall be stranded copper, #12 AWG minimum. All wiring insulation shall be dual rated for Type THHN and THWN applications. All control wiring terminations shall be made using vinyl insulated, crimp type connectors, with spade type lugs. Each control wire shall be labeled at each end with a preprinted, tube type or heat-shrink type wire marker, or shall be color coded. Screw type terminal strips shall be provided and suitably identified for termination of field wire control circuits. Submittal drawings shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Control terminal blocks shall be rated 300 volts minimum and shall provide four unidentified spare sets. Incoming power terminals shall be lug type rated 600 volts minimum. Separate bare copper ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and pump ground wire. All wiring shall be neatly tie-wrapped and secured. 7. Legends and Nameplates: Provide an appropriately engraved laminated plastic nameplate for each control device in panel. Legend plate indicating the operating function of pilot devices (START, STOP, RESET etc.) shall be aluminum with black background and white lettering. Nameplates indicating the controlled device shall be black laminated plastic 1/2 inch wide with 1/4 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates identifying the control panel and mounted on the exterior door shall be black laminated plastic one inch wide with 3/8 inch white lettering. Legends shall be mechanically attached with the pilot device. 8. Float Switches: Wet well liquid High level shall be signaled by non-metallic float switch with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise. Switch shall be the non- Pump Controls40 39 80 - 3 floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switch shall consist of a polypropylene float housing, mercury switch and neoprene jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leakproof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased, shock resistant, with 10 amp, 120 volt contact, N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection but not less than 20 feet. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific, Inc. or Flygt or an approved equal. 9.Field Wiring: Panel shall include terminal strip for field wiring for the following: a.Control Power b.Pump Controls c.Level Sensor 10.Operator Interface: Panel shall include 8” graphic Operator interface to show pump station status and adjustments. 11.Pump controls shall be installed in a NEMA 4X fiberglass or Stainless steel enclosure sized as required. 2.03CONTROL SEQUENCE A.Lift Station Control Pumps 1.Coordinate with Owner prior to programming to review sequence of operation. The lift station pumps shall be controlled by a Hand-Off-Auto switch located in the motor control center. In the “hand” position the motor shall run continuously, regardless of wet well level. In the “auto” position, each pump shall be controlled by the PLC and wet well level signal. Pumps shall start, latch in, and run until level fall below cut off level. Final levels shall be determined in field or as recommended by City. LEVELFUNCTION (Preliminary)RISING LEVELFALLING LEVEL El. xx.xxHigh Level Alarm (Red) High Level Alarm El. xx.xx Off (Reset) El. xx.xxStart 4th Lag Pump (Future) El. xx.xxStart 3rd Lag PUmp El. xx.xxStart 2nd Lag PUmp El. xx.xxStart 1st Lag PUmp El. xx.xxStart Lead Pump El. xx.xx All Pumps Off Pump Controls40 39 80 - 4 2.Lead pump to always start first at level set on operator interface. As level continues to rise, Lag pump shall start. As level continues to rise, the second, third, and fourth pumps shall start at each respective levels. All pumps shall latch in and operate until shut off level is reached. Pumps shall alternate Lead and Lag after each pump down cycle. 3.Auxiliary contacts in the HOA switch “Auto” position shall be provided for control monitoring. 4.A wet well high level alarm shall be routed to the SCADA RTU from float switch. 5.Elapsed time meters shall be located in the Motor Control Center and shall be interlocked with motor starter to indicate accumulated run time. A red pilot light shall be located in the MCC to indicate motor run status. 6.The pump run status, position of pump starter HOA switch, pump MCP trip, Motor Overload/ Leak, motor current, pump run status shall be routed to SCADA RTU via communcation. 7.Each pump motor shall have an adjustable time delay, 1-10 seconds between the automatic start signal and actual motor starting. Time shall be adjustable from Operator Interface. 8.MiniCAS units shall trigger alarms for pump seal leak and thermal overload and shall trigger a pump shutdown. MiniCAS alarms shall be routed to pump control panel. 9.System status and alarms shall be monitored as per I/O list. 10.Operator interface mounted on panel exterior door shall display Pump station status including wet well, level, pump run, motor current, and pump alarms. Operator interface shall operators to adjust pump START/STOP Setpoints. 11.Panel PLC shall communicate with Pump Station SCADA RTU Panel PLC and allow sharing of pump status and alarm information. 12.Any pump not in “Auto” mode, pump that has been shut down due to alarm or disabled due to alarm condition shall be removed from the sequence of rotation. PART 3.0EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A.Pump controls shall be installed in a Pump Control panel as indicated on drawings and as specified herein. 3.2 STARTUP AND FIELD TESTING: Pump Controls40 39 80 - 5 A.General: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for one 8-hour working day at the site to inspect the installation and instruct the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of equipment. The qualifications of the field service engineer are subject to the approval of the Engineer B.Installation Inspection: After the motors have been completely installed and wired the contractor shall: a.Megger stator and power cables b.Check for proper motor rotation c.Check power supply voltage d.Measure motor no load current e. Check control operation and sequence During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the Owner’s personnel. Any defects or improper operation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 CONTROL PANEL SECTION A.Labeling 1.Compartment: Labels shall be provided for control panel compartment as specified herein and on drawings. 2.Control devices: Limit switches, and similar pilot devices shall be labeled with stainless steel tags having 1/4" high indented lettering. The tags shall be permanently and securely attached with stainless steel tie wire. B.Wiring: All field control wiring shall be labeled with wire markers where entering control enclosures, terminal boxes, etc. Wire markers shall be tube type, heat-shrink type or write-on adhesive type. Single digit individual markers shall not be used. Wire numbers shall be in accordance with the approved schematic drawings. C.Voltage warning signs 1.Voltage warning signs shall be installed on all distribution enclosures or devices containing voltages over 120 volts to ground. Voltage warning signs on outdoor equipment shall be furnished and mounted by the supplier of the equipment. Signs shall read - "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" and shall indicate the circuit voltage present within the enclosure. 2.Multiple source signs: Multiple source signs shall be provided for any enclosure containing voltage sources from more than a single disconnecting means. Signs shall be yellow laminated plastic with 1/4” high engraved lettering. "CAUTION: Pump Controls40 39 80 - 6 Energized wiring from sources is contained in this unit. Provide label indicating circuit and panel name from each source. END OF SECTION Pump Controls40 39 80 - 7 40 69 80 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1.0GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01SCOPE This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish, install and place into operation all instruments required to complete the project. 1.02SUPPLIERS All instruments shall be furnished and installed by the contractor as indicated on drawings and as specified herein for a complete and working system. 2.0PRODUCTS/MATERIALS 2.01LEVEL TRANSMITTER: The liquid level transmitter shall be a submersible hermetically sealed sensor suitable for water/waste water, and wet well depth measurement applications. Transmitter shall be as follows: a.Input10-30Volt DC b.Output4-20ma 2 wire c.Accuracy0.5% of span d.Operating Temperature+15 deg F to 122 deg F e.Electrical connectionVented watertight cable connection f.Wetted parts316 and 304 Stainless steel g.Transmitting fluidSilicon Oil h.Rated IP68 Provide cable clamp, cable junction box, vented tube filter, level guard anti clog attachment and sensor weight. Transmitter shall be Model #LS-10 as manufactured by Wika. PART 3.0INSTALLATION 3.01OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer PDF sets of complete installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the equipment furnished under this specification. The information furnished shall include erection drawings, "as-built” drawings of electrical equipment, assembly details, and parts lists. Level Transmitter40 69 80 - 1 3.02SUITABILITY CERTIFICATION As part of the submittal data required above, the General Contractor shall submit a certification stating that the manufacturer's authorized representative for the equipment furnished under this section has studied the Contract Documents (drawings and specifications), questioned the General Contractor and/or the Engineer to determine the conditions affecting this equipment and hereby certifies that they should be suitable for use on this project and should require no more than normal maintenance if not damaged or abused. END OF SECTION Level Transmitter40 69 80 - 2 ±± • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • MATERIALS ENGINEERING & TESTING • SOILS • ASPHALT • CONCRETE GEOTECHNICAL SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AIRLINE ROAD CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS RETL REPORT NUMBER: G122346 PREPARED FOR: URBAN ENGINEERING 2725 SWANTNER AVENUE CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78404 JULY 14, 2022 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, INC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 P: (361) 883-4555; F: (361) 883-4711 TBPE FIRM NO. 2101 ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, INC. Corpus Christi San Antonio Round Rock Office: 361.883.4555 Office: 210.495.8000 Office: 512.284.8022 Fax: 361.883.4711 Fax: 210.495.8015 Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St. 10856 Vandale 7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi, TX 78409 San Antonio, TX 78216 Round Rock, TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING & TESTING SOILS ASPHALT CONCRETE July 14, 2022 Urban Engineering 2725 Swantner Avenue Corpus Christi, Texas 78404 Attention: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. SUBJECT:SUBSURFACEINVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Airline Road Corpus Christi, Texas RETL Job No. – G122346 Dear Mr. Wik, In accordance with our agreement, we have conducted a subsurface investigation, laboratory testing program, and geotechnicalevaluation for the above referenced project. The results of this investigation, together with our recommendations, are to be found in the accompanying report, one electronic copy of which is being transmitted for your records and for distribution to the project design team. Often, because of design and construction details that occur on a project, questions arise concerning soil conditions and Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. (RETL) (TBPE Firm No. 2101), would be pleased to continue its role as the Geotechnical Engineer during project implementation. RETL also has great interest in providing materials testing and observation services during the construction phase of this project. If you will advise us of the appropriate time to discuss these engineering services, we will be pleased to meet with you at your convenience. Sincerely, Mark C. Rock , P.E. Senior Consultant ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, INC. Corpus ChristiSan AntonioRound Rock Office: 361.883.4555Office: 210.495.8000Office: 512.284.8022 Fax: 361.883.4711Fax: 210.495.8015Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St.10856 Vandale7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi, TX 78409San Antonio, TX 78216Round Rock, TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION, LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM, AND GEOTECHNICALRECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROPOSED AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS AIRLINE ROAD CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS RETL JOB NUMBER: G122346 PREPARED FOR: URBAN ENGINEERING 2725 SWANTNER AVENUE CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78404 JULY14, 2022 PREPARED BY: ROCK ENGINEERING AND TESTING LABORATORY, INC. 6817 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78409 PHONE: (361) 883-4555; FAX: (361) 883-4711 TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM REGISTRATION NO. 2101 James P. Bauer, P.E.Francisco J. Arias, P.E. Corpus Christi Branch ManagerSenior Geotechnical Engineer TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 1 Authorization ........................................................................................................................................................ 1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................................................................................. 1 General ................................................................................................................................................................ 1 SITE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................... 2 FIELD EXPLORATION ........................................................................................................................................... 2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................... 2 Drilling and Sampling Procedures ....................................................................................................................... 3 Field Tests and Observations .............................................................................................................................. 3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM .................................................................................................................. 4 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 4 General ................................................................................................................................................................ 4 Soil Conditions ..................................................................................................................................................... 5 Groundwater Observations .................................................................................................................................. 5 OSHA Soil Type Classification ............................................................................................................................ 6 Seismic Site Classification ................................................................................................................................... 7 FOUNDATION DISCUSSION ................................................................................................................................. 7 Project Description ............................................................................................................................................... 7 PVR Discussion ................................................................................................................................................... 7 Foundation Types Considered ............................................................................................................................ 9 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................................................. 9 Conventional Continuous Strip Footings ............................................................................................................. 9 Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundations ............................................................................................................. 10 Lateral Pier Analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 11 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS ....................................................................................................................... 11 11 Drainage Considerations ................................................................................................................................... CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS................................................................................................................ 12 Foundation Pad Preparation .............................................................................................................................. 12 Select Fill ........................................................................................................................................................... 12 Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction Considerations .................................................................................. 13 Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance............................................................................................................. 13 Utilities ............................................................................................................................................................... 14 Expansion and Control Joints ............................................................................................................................ 14 GENERAL COMMENTS ....................................................................................................................................... 14 APPENDIX: Site Vicinity Map Boring Location Plan Boring Log B-1 Key to Soil Classification and Symbols July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a soil exploration and geotechnical analysis for the proposed Airline Road Lift Station Improvements project to be located off Airline Road in Corpus Christi, Texas. This study was conducted for Urban Engineering. Authorization The work for this project was performed in accordance with Rock Engineering and Testing Laboratory, Inc. (RETL) Proposal No. CGP061522A dated June 20, 2022. The proposal with the defined scope of work and fee was approved on June 21,2022 by Mr. Brian Wik representing Urban Engineering, and returned to RETL via e-mail transmission. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide foundation recommendations suitable for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface soils, provision of foundation recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report or on the boring log regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide foundation recommendations for the proposed project. The information submitted for the proposed project is based on project details provided to RETL by Urban Engineering and the soil information obtained at the boring location. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design of the proposed foundation system and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, then RETL will provide the additional information requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer’s profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. RETL operates in general accordance with “Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction”, (ASTM D3740). No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. Page 1 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas This study was conducted for Urban Engineering and the design team for the specific application to the proposed Airline Road Lift Station Improvements project to be located off Airline Road in Corpus Christi, Texas. SITE DESCRIPTION The existing lift station is located approximately 100 feet southeast from the intersection of Airline Road and La Bianca Drive, in Corpus Christi, Texas, at the location shown in the Site Location Map included in the Appendix. The current lift station occupies an approximate area of 3,500 square feet and is bordered to the west by Airline Drive, to the north by a neighboring residence, and to the south and east by an undeveloped area. The site consists of the existing lift station. The surface at the site was dry and relatively flat and level, covered with grass and isolated trees, and provided adequate support to our drilling equipment which was able to access the boring location with no difficulties. Evidence of overhead utilities were observed along the east sidewalk on Airline Drive and around the exiting lift station. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the foundation bearing materials included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the test boring operations and obtaining disturbed split spoon samples and relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring log in accordance with “Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock”, (ASTM D5434). Based on the client’s request, one (1) boring was drilled for the purpose of providing foundation recommendations for the proposed project. The table below provides the boring identification, boring depth and approximate GPS coordinates. Summary of Boring Information Boring Identification Boring Depth (ft) Approximate GPS Coordinates B-1 35 N 27.66862°, W 97.36441° Urban Engineering determined the location and depth of the boring. RETL performed the drilling and logging operations. The approximate GPS coordinates were obtained at the actual boring location using a Garmin GPS model eTrex and are provided in this report and on the boring log. Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations, the boring was backfilled with excess soils obtained during drilling operations. A Boring Location Plan is provided in the Appendix. Page 2 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas The boring performed for this project was used to determine the classification and strengths of the subgrade soils. The information provided on the boring log includes boring location, boring depth, soil classification, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring log is included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test boring was performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning hollow stem augers to advance the borehole. Disturbed soil samples were obtained using split-barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for “Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils”, (ASTM D1586). Relatively undisturbed soil samples were obtained using thin-wall tube sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for “Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils”, (ASTM D1587). The samples obtained by this procedure were extruded by a hydraulic ram in the field. The samples were visually classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depth and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Tests and Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) – During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration values of the soil at selected intervals. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1 foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The “N” value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. An automatic hammer was utilized when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of one. The results of standard penetration tests indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations – Water level observations were obtained during the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted on the boring log provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sandy soils, the indicated depths are usually reliable groundwater levels. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to water bodies and recent rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater. The amount of water in open boreholes largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring locations. Ground Surface Elevations – The ground surface elevation at the boring location was not provided, therefore, depths referred to in this report are from the ground surface at the boring location during the time of our field investigation. Page 3 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the foundation system for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318) and percent material finer than the #200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140). The shear strength of selected cohesive soil samples was evaluated from unconfined compressive strength tests (ASTM D2166). The estimated soil strengths were obtained using a hand penetrometer. The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring log provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of foundation bearing materials encountered in the test boring have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring log. The results of the standard penetration tests, water level observations and laboratory tests are presented on the boring log. Representative samples of the soils were placed in polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring log, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring location. Variations may occur and should be expected beyond the boring location. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test boring was drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Page 4 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Soil Conditions The generalized soil conditions encountered at the project site have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength, and plasticity are provided in the following table. Soil Profile Table D Description LL PI C -#200 N P e 0-3 CLAYEY Sand 39 22 1,000 0 120 39 8 -- 3-5 CLAYEY Sand 34 19 2,800 0 120 47 -- 4.5+ 5-11 Sandy Lean CLAY 31 16 1,500 0 120 55 -- 2.5-3.0 11-17 Silty SAND -- -- 0 28 55 15 2-7 -- 17-35 Lean CLAY 47 29 2,500 0 60 89-90 -- 3.0-4.5+ Where: D = Depth in feet below existing grade LL = Liquid limit (%) PI = Plasticity index C = Soil Cohesion, psf (undrained) = Effective soil unit weight, pcf = Angle of Internal Friction, deg. (undrained) e -#200 = Material passing #200 sieve, % N = Standard Penetration Test (blows per foot) P = Pocket penetrometer resistance, tsf Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered are provided on the boring log included in the Appendix. Groundwater Observations Groundwater (GW) observations and the depth the boring caved are provided in the following table. Groundwater (GW) Observations Boring During Drilling Upon Completion B-1 GW at 11 feet GW and caved at 11 feet Based on observations made in the field, it appears as if the groundwater at this site was present at a depth of approximately 11 feet at the time of our field investigation. Groundwater may require several hours to several days to stabilize depending on the permeability of the soils and groundwater levels at the site may be subject to seasonal conditions, recent rainfall, proximity to bodies of water and drought or temperature effects. With these considerations we recommend that the contractor verifies the groundwater depth before construction starts and be prepared to implement dewatering techniques, as warranted. Page 5 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas OSHA Soil Type Classification The table below provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring location. Soil Type Classification Table OSHA Soil Type Depth (feet) Description Classification Cohesive Soil Above Water Table 0-11 Type B (average undrained shear strength greater than 500 psf) 11-20 Cohesive and Non-Cohesive Soil Below Water Table Type C It should be noted that the contractor’s “competent person” shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during excavation of the soils at the jobsite. If groundwater is encountered during construction, all soils from which water is freely seeping should be downgraded to Type C soils. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet need to be designed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided in the following table. Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil Type Max. Allow. Slopes for Excavations < Than 20’ Deep Type B 1 Horizontal : 1 Vertical Type C 1½ Horizontal : 1 Vertical Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents, but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes, which will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply RETL is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. RETL is assuming that the contractor will comply with all rules, ordinances and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. Page 6 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Seismic Site Classification As stated on Page 205, Chapter 20, “Site Classification Procedure For Seismic Design” of ASCE/SEI 7-05, “Where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless authority having jurisdiction or geotechnical data determines Site Class E or F soil are present at the site.” Since our field investigations have not included a 100-foot-deep boring, by definition the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Additionally, Table 20.3-1-Site Classification provides that the soil undrained shear strength for Site Class E soils should have a Standard Penetration Resistance of 15 to 50 bpf, or an undrained shear strength between 1,000 and 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). The predominate soil strengths at this site and the soils expected below the maximum depth of exploration of the boring are anticipated to meet or exceed the typical strength range above and therefore the site should be classified as Seismic Site Class D. FOUNDATION DISCUSSION Project Description Based on information provided to RETL, the project consists of constructing a new perimeter Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) wall for the existing lift station, with an alignment of approximately 200 linear feet around the facility. It is understood that the proposed new wall is planned to be supported either on continuous footings or drilled piers. Anticipated structural loading information, grading plans and other design details have not been provided. PVR Discussion The laboratory test results indicate that the subsoils in the active zone at this site are low to high in plasticity. The calculated total potential vertical rise (PVR) at this site is on the order of 1 inch. This PVR value represents the vertical rise that can be experienced by dry subsoils if they are subjected to conditions that allow them to become saturated, such as poor drainage. The actual movement of the subsoils is dependent upon their change in moisture content. This PVR was calculated using the Texas Department of Transportation Method TEX- 124E and took into account the depth of the active zone, estimated to extend to a depth of approximately 11 feet at this site, and the Atterberg limits test results of the soils encountered within the active zone. It is important to note that the PVR value provided herein represents the vertical rise that can be experienced by the subsoils in their current moisture state that are subjected to increases in soil moisture content resulting from capillary or surface water. The TEX-124E method is widely used in Texas for predicting expansive soil movements and has been found to be reasonably accurate for moisture variations resulting from normal seasonal and climatic controlled conditions (environmental conditions). The actual movement of the subsoils is dependent upon their change in moisture content. Page 7 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Conditions that allow the soils to become saturated or significantly exceed typical moisture variations resulting from environmental conditions or exceed the dry and wet boundary conditions established by the TEX-124E method, such as poor drainage and/or broken utilities may result in 2 to 3 times or more the magnitude of moisture related soil movements than estimated by the PVR provided herein. Differential vertical movements may occur over a distance equal to the depth of the active zone and can potentially be equal to the expected total movements. It is understood that conventional continuous strip footings are proposed to be used to support the perimeter wall. With this type of foundation system, the site should be prepared as necessary to not qualify as “expansive” in accordance with Chapter 18 of the International Building Code (IBC) which typically requires the site to modified for a PVR of ½ an inch. Alternatively, the footings could bear at a depth where the supporting soils feature a PVR of a ½ inch or less. The required excavation depth for either a removal and replacement with Select Fill or construction of footings on native insitu soils is shown in the table below PVR Reduction Required Excavation Depth (ft) Approximate PVR (in) 1 0.7 2 0.6 3 0.5 An excavation depth of 3 feet below existing grades will also enhance the capacity of the soil for shallow foundation system. If a removal and replacement is performed to bear the footing at a shallower depth, then the excavation needs to be extended horizontally at least 3 feet beyond the footprint of the foundation and any appurtenances associated with the foundation. Upon completion of the excavation and prior to placement of select fill, the exposed subgrade soils shall be moisture conditioned and recompacted, and compacted select fill soils shall be properly placed and compacted in the excavation to achieve the planned subgrade elevation, as recommended in the “Foundation Pad Preparation” section of this report. Additional undercutting and replacement may be required to further reduce the PVR based on architectural or structural design considerations, in which case RETL should be given the opportunity to revisit the recommendations provided herein to determine if supplemental recommendations are warranted. Page 8 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Foundation Types Considered As indicated before, the proposed new perimeter wall is proposed to be supported either by continuous footings or by drilled shafts. These foundations options are further detailed below. Conventional Continuous Strip Footings – Conventional continuous strip footings do not provide enough stiffness to resist differential soil movements and created moments. Accordingly, continuous footing foundations are most appropriate for use on sites that do not qualify as “expansive” or have been prepared to not qualify as “expansive” per the IBC. Conventional continuous strip footings, as planned, are feasible to support the proposed perimeter wall provided that the site is prepared as recommended in the “Foundation Pad Preparation” section of this report to reduce the PVR to ½ inch or less, or the footing bears at a depth of 3 feet below existing grades. Drilled Piers – Conventional straight shaft drilled piers and underreamed drilled piers were considered for use at this site for support of the proposed perimeter wall. Underreamed drilled piers are not considered appropriate at this site due to the presence of sand in the soils at depths where underreamed piers are typically founded. Instead, straight shaft drilled piers are suitable and can be used for supporting the proposed wall. Temporary steel casing may be required in order to prevent sloughing and/or groundwater inflow and to successfully install straight shaft drilled piers below the free water depth at the time of construction. The pier drilling contractor should have casing on-site and be prepared to use casing for successful drilled pier installation. Recommendations for conventional continuous strip footings and straight shaft drilled piers for supporting the planned perimeter wall are discussed below. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Conventional Continuous Strip Footings Conventional continuous strip footings may be used to support the proposed perimeter wall provided that the site is prepared as discussed in the “Foundation Pad Preparation” section of this report in order to achieve a PVR value of approximately ½ inch or less, or if the footings bear at a depth of 3 feet below existing grades. Footings founded at a minimum depth of 2 feet and on at least 1 foot of select fill or soils, or footings founded at a depth of 3 feet, below the final grade elevation may be designed using an allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. The footings should be designed with a minimum dimension of 12 inches. The allowable bearing pressure is based on dead load and sustained live load considerations and includes a design safety factor of 3. The footings should be geometrically shaped and proportioned to resist the loading conditions, including uplift. Uplift can be resisted using the weight of the concrete footing and the weight of compacted backfill soil above the footing. A unit weight of 115 pcf may be used for compacted backfill soil above the footing foundations when calculating uplift resistance. Page 9 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas In order to reduce the effects of any slight differential movement that may occur due to variations in the character of the supporting soils, it is recommended that all footings be suitably reinforced to make them as rigid as possible. Foundation excavations may be neat cut with conventional excavation equipment, preferably with a smooth-mouthed bucket. If a toothed bucket is used, excavation with this equipment should be stopped 12 inches above the final grade and the foundation excavation completed with a smooth-mouthed bucket or by hand labor. Backfill material below, around and above the footing foundations should consist of imported “Select Fill”. The backfill material shall be placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts and shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698). The moisture content of each compacted lift shall be maintained at or above the optimum moisture content. Straight Shaft Drilled Pier Foundations If straight shaft drilled piers will be used for the support of the proposed perimeter wall, the structural designer can utilize the allowable unit skin friction values for the range in depths included in the following table for straight shaft drilled piers to resist the axial compressive loads given the strengths of the subsurface soils encountered. Allowable Unit Skin Friction Values Depth Below Existing Grade (ft) Allowable Unit Skin Friction (psf) 0-5 Neglect 5-11 400 11-17 200 17-30 600 The allowable unit skin friction values provided above are based on the strengths of the in-situ soils and utilize a design safety factor of 2 against shear failure. The straight shaft drilled piers should be proportioned to resist axial loads, including uplift forces due to expansive soils and live loading conditions, as well as lateral loading conditions. If it is essential to minimize movements, the piers should be proportioned to be founded at depths between 20 and 30 feet. The straight-shaft drilled piers will be subject to uplift forces resulting from adhesion of the expansive soils along the perimeter of the shafts. The uplift force due to expansive soils can be estimated (in kips) by multiplying the diameter of the pier (in feet) by 5. Uplift can be resisted utilizing the dead load on the pier and the buoyant weight of the pier itself. If additional resistance to soil induced uplift is required, the allowable skin friction values below a depth of 11 feet can be used. For uplift resulting from loading conditions, 60 percent of the allowable unit skin friction values provided in the table above may be utilized in the design. Page 10 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Settlement of a properly designed and constructed straight shaft drilled pier is estimated to be on the order of 1 percent of the shaft diameter of the pier and differential settlements of equally loaded same size drilled shafts founded at the same depth should experience differential settlements on the order of ½ percent of the pier shaft diameters. Straight shaft drilled piers should be spaced no closer than three pier diameters apart measured center to center to avoid bearing capacity reductions for closely spaced drilled shafts. Drilled piers at this site should be adequately reinforced with a minimum of 1 percent of the cross-sectional area of the pier shaft throughout the depth of the pier to withstand uplift forces. Lateral Pier Analysis Drilled piers may be subjected to lateral loads. Lateral pier analysis programs such as L-pile will require the following soil parameters for this site: L-Pile Design Criteria D Description C K E 50 e 0-5 CLAY Neglect 5-11 CLAY 1,500 0 120 500 0.007 11-17 SAND 0 28 55 20 -- 17-30 CLAY 2,500 0 60 1,000 0.005 Where: D = depth (ft) = effective unit weight, pcf C = shear strength, psf = angle of internal friction, deg. K = modulus of subgrade reaction (pci) E = 50% strain value 50 K and E values were estimated from known correlations. 50 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Drainage Considerations The change in moisture content of the subgrade soils is the primary mechanism resulting in the volumetric changes of the supporting soils. Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations, thus reducing the soil’s volume change potential. Some of these measures are outlined below: We recommend that effective site drainage plans be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during and after construction. Page 11 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the foundations should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundations at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the foundation areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in south Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Foundation Pad Preparation The foundation area should be prepared by initially removing soils, organics and any other deleterious materials to a minimum depth of 3 feet as previously indicated in the “PVR Discussion” section of this report. If removal and replacement is performed with select fill materials, the excavation should extend laterally outside the foundation footprint and any appurtenances for a minimum distance of 3 feet. Disturbed soils resulting from excavations should be properly undercut to remove all soft or otherwise unsuitable soils and replaced with properly compacted “Select Fill”. Once the excavation operations in the foundation area are performed, the upper 1 foot of exposed subgrade soils, prior to select fill placement, shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and the moisture content shall be maintained at or above the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified, the soils should be removed and recompacted in place. Upon completion of the subgrade preparation operations, compacted “Select Fill” material should be placed inside the excavation to achieve the planned subgrade elevation. Properly compacted “Select Fill” soils shall be placed and compacted as indicated in the “Select Fill” section of this report. The fill shall be placed in such a manner to provide a uniform foundation pad thickness beneath the footings. Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the #200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1½ inches will be permitted. The select fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) at or above the optimum moisture content. Page 12 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas Drilled, Cast-in-Place, Pier Construction Considerations Temporary steel casing may be required in order to prevent sloughing and/or groundwater inflow and to successfully install straight shaft drilled piers below the free water depth at the time of construction. The casing must be installed (“sealed”) into a competent clay layer to avoid water infiltration into the pier excavation. The selection of the proper clay layer to seal the casing is the sole responsibility of the drilled pier foundation contractor, who shall be prepared and have casing available and on-site. Care must be taken during concrete placement and casing removal to ensure that sufficient concrete head is maintained inside the casing to prevent soil intrusions in the pier concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after all loose material has been removed, the pier excavation inspected and reinforcing steel installed. A relatively high slump concrete mix (6 to 7 inches) is suggested to minimize problems related to the concrete adhering to the casing as the casing is removed and to minimize aggregate segregation caused by the reinforcing steel. Free fall of concrete into the pier excavation is permitted provided the concrete can be placed into the pier excavation without striking the sides of the excavation or hitting the rebar. It should be noted that research has shown that free fall concrete guided at the top of the excavation to avoid contact with the sides of the pier excavation and reinforcing steel can drop more than 80 feet without any measurable segregation. In addition, the research has shown that as long as the concrete drop is in air the strength of the concrete was not adversely affected. In situations where it is impossible for the concrete to fall freely without striking the rebar cage or sides of the pier excavation the free fall should be limited to 10 feet or placed with a Tremie pipe. Under no circumstances pier excavations should be allowed to stay open overnight. The successful placement of a pier foundation is dependent on the expertise of the drilled pier foundation contractor. It is recommended that at least one (1) test pier excavation be performed at the site at the time of construction to verify groundwater conditions at the specific location and time, and to ensure that the proper method of pier installation is being performed. The Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative should be present to witness the test pier excavation and the installation of all production piers. Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance Exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at the foundation bearing level if the excavations remain open for long periods of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the foundation excavations be extended to final grade and that the foundation be constructed as soon as possible to minimize potential damage to the bearing soils. The foundation level should be free of loose soil, ponded water or debris and should be observed prior to concreting by the Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative. Foundation concrete should not be placed on soils that have been disturbed by rainfall or seepage. If the bearing soils are softened by surface water intrusion or by desiccation, the unsuitable soils must be removed from the foundation excavations and be replaced with properly compacted select fill prior to placement of concrete per Engineer’s direction. Page 13 of 14 July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E. Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346 Corpus Christi, Texas The Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative should monitor subgrade preparation and placement of fill. As a guideline, a minimum of one, in-place density test shall be performed on the subgrade soils and each subsequent lift of fill for each 3,000 square feet, or a minimum of three in-place density tests per testing interval, whichever is greater. Any areas not meeting the required compaction should be recompacted and retested until compliance is met. Utilities Utilities that project through the foundations should be designed with either some degree of flexibility or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. Expansion and Control Joints Expansion and control joints should be designed and placed in various portions of the structure. Properly planned placement of these joints will assist in controlling the degree and location of material cracking that normally occurs due to material shrinkage, thermal affects, soil movements and other related structural conditions. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed Airline Road Lift Station Improvements project, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of RETL be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation excavations prior to concreting to verify that the bearing soils are consistent with those encountered in the borings. RETL cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundation if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for RETL to accept any liability, then RETL must agree with the plans and perform such observation during construction as we recommend. All sheeting, shoring and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 14 of 14 APPENDIX GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING & TESTING SOILS ASPHALT CONCRETE SITE VICINITY MAP SITE July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E.Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, INC. Corpus ChristiSan AntonioRound Rock Office: 361.883.4555Office: 210.495.8000Office: 512.284.8022 Fax: 361.883.4711Fax: 210.495.8015Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St.10856 Vandale7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi, TX 78409San Antonio, TX 78216Round Rock, TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ENGINEERING & TESTING SOILS ASPHALT CONCRETE BORING LOCATION PLAN July 14, 2022 AIRLINE ROAD LIFT STATION IMPROVEMENTS Attn: Mr. Brian Wik, P.E.Airline Road RETL Job Number G122346Corpus Christi, Texas ROCK ENGINEERING & TESTING LABORATORY, INC. Corpus ChristiSan AntonioRound Rock Office: 361.883.4555Office: 210.495.8000Office: 512.284.8022 Fax: 361.883.4711Fax: 210.495.8015Fax: 512.284.7764 6817 Leopard St.10856 Vandale7 Roundville Ln. Corpus Christi, TX 78409San Antonio, TX 78216Round Rock, TX 78664 www.rocktesting.com 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED CONFORMANCE SET FOR CONSTRUCTION ASSEMBLED 02/04/2024 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED 02-04-24 PLANS CONFORMED